Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation — Volume 06
 - Madiera, the Canaries, Ancient Asia, Africa, etc.
Author: Hakluyt, Richard
Language: English
As this book started as an ASCII text book there are no pictures available.


*** Start of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation — Volume 06
 - Madiera, the Canaries, Ancient Asia, Africa, etc." ***


** Transcriber's Notes **

The printed edition from which this e-text has been produced retains the
spelling and abbreviations of Hakluyt's 16th-century original. In this
version, the spelling has been retained, but the following manuscript
abbreviations have been silently expanded:

- vowels with macrons = vowel + 'n' or 'm'
- q; = -que (in the Latin)
- y[e] = the; y[t] = that; w[t] = with

And the following substitutions have been made:

- I + reversed 'C' (for the number 500) = D
- CI + reversed 'C' (for 1000) = M

This edition contains footnotes and two types of sidenotes. Most footnotes
are added by the editor. They follow modern (19th-century) spelling
conventions. Those that don't are Hakluyt's (and are not always
systematically marked as such by the editor). The sidenotes are Hakluyt's
own. Summarizing sidenotes are labelled [Sidenote: ] and placed before the
sentence to which they apply. Sidenotes that are keyed with a symbol are
labeled [Marginal note: ] and placed at the point of the symbol, except in
poetry, where they are placed at a convenient point.

** End Transcriber's Notes **

THE PRINCIPAL

NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES

AND

DISCOVERIES

OF

THE ENGLISH NATION.

Collected by

RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER.

AND

Edited by

EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S.

VOL. VI

MADEIRA AND THE CANARIES; ANCIENT ASIA, AFRICA, ETC.


[Title Page to volume 2 of the original edition.]

THE SECOND VOLVME

OF THE PRINCIPAL

NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQVES,

AND

DISCOUERIES

OF THE

ENGLISH NATION,

MADE BY SEA OR OUER-LAND,

TO THE SOUTH & SOUTH-EAST PARTS OF THE WORLD.

AT ANY TIME WITHIN THE COMPASSE OF THESE 1600. YERES:

DIUIDED INTO TWO SEUERALL PARTS:

WHEREOF THE FIRST CONTAINETH

THE PERSONALL TRAUELS, &c. OF THE ENGLISH, THROUGH AND WITHIN THE STREIGHT
OF GIBRALTAR,

TO

Alger, Tunis, and Tripolis in Barbary, to Alexandria and Cairo in Aegypt,
to the Isles of Sicilia, Zante, Candia, Rhodes, Cyprus, and Chio, to the
Citie of Constantinople, to diuers parts of Asia Minor, to Syria and
Armenia, to Ierusalem, and other Places in Iudea;

AS ALSO TO:

Arabia, downe the Riuer of Euphrates, to Babylon and Balsara, and so
through the Persian Gulph to Ormuts, Chaul, Goa, and to many Islands
adioyning vpon the South Parts of Asia;

AND LIKEWISE FROM

Goa to Cambaia, and to all the Dominions of Zelabdim Echebar The Great
Mogor, to the Mighty Riuer of Ganges, to Bengala, Aracan, Bacola, and
Chonderi, to Pegu, to Iamahai in the Kingdome of Siam, and almost to the
very Frontiers of China.

THE SECOND COMPREHENDETH

THE VOYAGES, TRAFFICKS, &c. OF THE ENGLISH NATION, MADE WITHOUT THE
STREIGHT OF GIBRALTAR,

TO THE ISLANDS OF THE ACORES, OF PORTO SANTO, MADERA, AND THE CANARIES, TO
THE KINGDOMES OF BARBARY, TO THE ISLES OF CAPO VERDE,

To the Riuers of Senega, Gambra, Madrabumba, and Sierra Leona, to the Coast
of Guinea and Benin, to the Isles of S. Thome and Santa Helena, to the
Parts about the Cape of Buona Esperanza, to Quitangone, neere Mozambique,
to the Isles of Comoro and Zanzibar, To the Citie of Goa, Beyond Cape
Comori, to the Isles of Nicubar, Gomes Polo, and Pulo Pinaom, to the maine
Land of Malacca, and to the Kingdome of Iunsalaon.

BY RICHARD HAKLVYT PREACHER,
AND SOMETIME STUDENT OF CHRIST CHVRCH IN OXFORD.

IMPRINTED AT LONDON BY GEORGE BISHOP, RALPH NEWBERY,
AND ROBERT BARKER.

ANNO 1599.



DEDICATION TO THE FIRST EDITION.

TO THE

RIGHT HONOURABLE

SIR ROBERT CECIL KNIGHT,

PRINCIPALL SECRETARIE TO HER MAIESTIE, MASTER OF THE COURT OF WARDES AND
  LIUERIES, AND ONE OF HER MAIESTIES MOST HONOURABLE PRIUIE COUNSELL.

Right Honorable, hauing newly finished a Treatise of the long Voyages of
our Nation made into the Leuant within the Streight of Gibraltar, and from
thence ouer-land to the South and Southeast parts of the world, all
circumstances considered, I found none to whom I thought it fitter to bee
presented then to your selfe: wherein hauing begun at the highest
Antiquities of this realme vnder the gouerment of the Romans; next vnder
the Saxons; and thirdly since the conquest vnder the Normans, I haue
continued the histories vnto these our dayes. The time of the Romans
affoordeth small matter. But after that they were called hence by forren
inuasions of their Empire, and the Saxons by degrees became lords in this
Iland, and shortly after receiued the Christian faith, they did not onely
trauell to Rome, but passed farther vnto Ierusalem, and therewith not
contented, Sigelmus bishop of Shireburne in Dorsetshire caried the almes of
king Alfred euen to the Sepulcher of S. Thomas in India, (which place at
this day is called Maliapor) and brought from thence most fragrant spices,
and rich iewels into England: Which iewels, as William of Malmesburie in
two sundry treatises writeth, were remaining in the aforsayd Cathedrall
Church to be seene euen in his time. And this most memorable voyage into
India is not onely mentioned by the aforesayd Malmesburie, but also by
Florentius Wigorniensis, a graue and woorthy Author which liued before him,
and by many others since, and euen by M. Foxe in his first volume of his
acts and Monuments in the life of king Alfred. To omit diuers other of the
Saxon nation, the trauels of Alured bishop of Worcester through Hungarie to
Constantinople, and so by Asia the lesse into Phoenicia and Syria, and the
like course of Ingulphus, not long afterward Abbot of Croiland, set downe
particularly by himselfe, are things in mine opinion right worthy of
memorie. After the comming in of the Normans, in the yeere 1096, in the
reigne of William Rufus, and so downward for the space of aboue 300 yeeres,
such was the ardent desire of our nation to visite the Holy land, and to
expell the Saracens and Mahumetans, that not only great numbers of Erles,
Bishops, Barons, and Knights, but euen Kings, Princes, and Peeres of the
blood Roiall, with incredible deuotion, courage and alacritie intruded
themselues into this glorious expedition. A sufficient proofe hereof are
the voiages of prince Edgar the nephew of Edmund Ironside, of Robert
Curtois brother of William Rufus, the great beneuolence of king Henry the
2. and his vowe to haue gone in person to the succour of Ierusalem, the
personall going into Palestina of his sonne king Richard the first, with
the chiualrie, wealth, and shipping of this realme; the large contribution
of king Iohn, and the trauels of Oliuer Fitz-Roy his sonne, as is supposed,
with Ranulph Glanuile Erle of Chester to the siege of Damiata in Egypt: the
prosperous voyage of Richard Erle of Cornwall, elected afterward king of
the Romans, and brother to Henry the 3, the famous expedition of Prince
Edward, the first king of the Norman race of that name; the iourney of
Henry Erle of Derbie, duke of Hereford, and afterward King of this realme,
by the name of Henry the 4 against the citie of Tunis in Africa, and his
preparation of ships and gallies to go himselfe into the Holy land, if he
had not on the sudden bene preuented by death; the trauel of Iohn of
Holland brother by the mothers side to king Richard the 2 into those parts.
All these, either Kings, Kings sonnes, or Kings brothers, exposed
themselues with inuincible courages to the manifest hazard of their
persons, liues, and liuings, leauing their ease, their countries, wiues and
children; induced with a Zelous deuotion and ardent desire to protect and
dilate the Christian faith. These memorable enterprises in part concealed,
in part scattered, and for the most part vnlooked after, I haue brought
together in the best Method and breuitie that I could deuise. Whereunto I
haue annexed the losse of Rhodes, which although it were originally written
in French, yet maketh it as honourable and often mention of the English
nation, as of any other Christians that serued in that most violent siege.
After which ensueth the princely promise of the bountiful aide of king
Henry the 8 to Ferdinando newly elected king of Hungarie, against Solyman
the mortall enemie of Christendome. These and the like Heroicall intents
and attempts of our Princes, our Nobilitie, our Clergie, and our Chiualry,
I haue in the first place exposed and set foorth to the view of this age,
with the same intention that the old Romans set vp in wax in their palaces
the Statuas or images of their worthy ancestors; whereof Salust in his
treatise of the warre of Iugurtha, writeth in this maner: Sæpe audiui ego
Quintum maximum, Publium Scipionem, præterea ciuitatis nostræ præclaros
viros solitos ita dicere, cum maiorum imagines intuerentur, vehementissimè
animum sibi ad virtutem accendi. Scilicet non ceram illam, neque figuram,
tantam vim in sese habere, sed memoria rerum gestarum flammam eam egregijs
viris in pectore crescere, neque prius sedari, quàm virtus eorum famam et
gloriam adæquauerit. I haue often heard (quoth he) how Quintus maximus,
Publius Scipio, and many other worthy men of our citie were woont to say,
when they beheld the images and portraitures of their ancestors, that they
were most vehemently inflamed vnto vertue. Not that the sayd wax or
portraiture had any such force at all in it selfe, but that by the
remembring of their woorthy actes, that flame was kindled in their noble
breasts, and could neuer be quenched, vntill such time as their owne valure
had equalled the fame and glory of their progenitors. So, though not in
wax, yet in record of writing haue I presented to the noble courages of
this English Monarchie, the like images of their famous predecessors, with
hope of like effect in their posteritie. And here by the way if any man
shall think, that an vniuersall peace with our Christian neighbours will
cut off the emploiment of the couragious increasing youth of this realme,
he is much deceiued. For there are other most conuenient emploiments for
all the superfluitie of euery profession in this realme. For, not to meddle
with the state of Ireland, nor that of Guiana, there is vnder our noses the
great and ample countrey of Virginia; the In-land whereof is found of late
to bee so sweete, and holesome a climate, so rich and abundant in siluer
mines, so apt and capable of all commodities, which Italy, Spaine, and
France can affoord, that the Spaniards themselues in their owne writings
printed in Madrid 1586, and within few moneths afterward reprinted by me in
Paris, [Footnote: This no doubt refers to the "History of the West Indies,"
which appears further on in this edition.] and in a secret mappe of those
partes made in Mexico the yeere before; for the king of Spaine, (which
originall with many others is in the custodie of the excellent
Mathematician M. Thomas Hariot) as also in their intercepted letters come
vnto my hand, bearing date 1595, they acknowledge the In-land to be a
better and richer countrey then Mexico and Nueua Spania itselfe. And on the
other side their chiefest writers, as Peter Martyr ab Angleria, and Francis
Lopez de Gomara, the most learned Venetian Iohn Baptista Ramusius, and the
French Geographers, as namely, Popiliniere and the rest, acknowledge with
one consent, that all that mightie tract of land from 67., degrees
Northward to the latitude almost of Florida was first discouered out of
England, by the commaundement of king Henry the seuenth, and the South part
thereof before any other Christian people of late hath bene planted with
diuers English colonies by the royal consent of her sacred Maiestie vnder
the broad seale of England, whereof one as yet remaineth, for ought we
know, aliue in the countrey. Which action, if vpon a good and godly peace
obtained, it shal please the Almighty to stirre vp her Maiesties heart to
continue with her fauourable countenance (as vpon the ceasing of the warres
of Granada, hee stirred vp the spirite of Isabella Queene of Castile, to
aduance the enterprise of Columbus) with transporting of one or two
thousand of her people, and such others as vpon mine owne knowledge will
most willingly at their owne charges become Aduenturers in good numbers
with their bodies and goods; she shall by Gods assistance, in short space,
worke many great and vnlooked for effects, increase her dominions, enrich
her cofers, and reduce many Pagans to the faith of Christ. The neglecting
hitherto of which last point our aduersaries daily in many of their bookes
full bitterly lay vnto the charge of the professors of the Gospell. No
sooner should we set footing in that pleasant and good land, and erect one
or two conuenient Fortes in the Continent, or in some Iland neere the
maine, but euery step we tread would yeeld vs new occasion of action, which
I wish the Gentrie of our nation rather to regard, then to follow those
soft vnprofitable pleasures wherein they now too much consume their time
and patrimonie, and hereafter will doe much more, when as our neighbour
warres being appeased, they are like to haue lesse emploiment then nowe
they haue, vnlesse they bee occupied in this or some other the like
expedition. And to this ende and purpose giue me leaue (I beseech you) to
impart this occurrent to your honourable and prouident consideration: that
in the yere one thousand fiue hundred eighty and seuen, when I had caused
the foure voyages of Ribault, Laudonniere, and Gourges to Florida, at mine
owne charges to bee printed in Paris, which by the malice of some too much
affectioned to the Spanish faction, had bene aboue twentie yeeres
suppressed, as soone as that booke came to the view of that reuerend and
prudent Counseller Monsieur Harlac the lord chiefe Iustice of France, and
certaine other of the wisest Iudges, in great choler they asked, who had
done such intolerable wrong to their whole kingdome, as to haue concealed
that woorthie worke so long? Protesting further, that if their Kings and
the Estate had throughly followed that action, France had bene freed of
their long ciuill warres, and the variable humours of all sortes of people
might haue had very ample and manifold occasions of good and honest
emploiment abroad in that large and fruitfull Continent of the West Indies.
The application of which sentence vnto our selues I here omit, hastening
vnto the summarie recapitulation of other matters contained in this worke.
It may please your Honour therefore to vnderstand, that the second part of
this first Treatise containeth our auncient trade and traffique with
English shipping to the Ilands of Sicilie, Candie, and Sio, which, by good
warrant herein alleaged, I find to haue bene begun in the yeere 1511. and
to haue continued vntill the yeere 1552. and somewhat longer. But shortly
after (as it seemeth) it was intermitted, or rather giuen ouer (as is noted
in master Gaspar Campions discreet letters to Master Michael Lock and
Master William Winter inserted in this booke) first by occasion of the
Turkes expelling of the foure and twentie Mauneses or gouernours of the
Genouois out of the Ile of Sio, and by taking of the sayd Iland wholie into
his owne hand in Aprill, 1566. sending thither Piali Basha with fourescore
gallies for that purpose; and afterward by his growing ouer mightie and
troublesome in those Seas, by the cruell inuasion of Nicosia and Famagusta,
and the whole Ile of Cyprus by his lieutenant Generall Mustapha Basha.
Which lamentable Tragedie I haue here againe reuiued, that the posteritie
may neuer forget what trust may bee giuen to the oath of a Mahometan, when
hee hath aduauntage and is in his choler.

Lastly, I haue here put downe at large the happie renuing and much
increasing of our interrupted trade in all the Leuant, accomplished by the
great charges and speciall Industrie of the worshipfull and worthy
Citizens, Sir Edward Osborne Knight, M. Richard Staper, and M. William
Hareborne, together with the league for traffike onely betweene her
Maiestie and the Grand Signior, with the great priuileges, immunities, and
fauours obteyned of his imperiall Highnesse in that behalfe, the admissions
and residencies of our Ambassadours in his stately Porch, and the great
good and Christian offices which her Sacred Maiestie by her extraordinary
fauour in that Court hath done for the king and kingdome of Poland, and
other Christian Princes: the traffike of our Nation in all the chiefe
Hauens of Africa and Egypt: the searching and haunting the very bottome of
the Mediterran Sea to the ports of Tripoli and Alexandretta, of the
Archipelagus, by the Turkes now called The white sea, euen to the walles of
Constantinople: the voyages ouer land, and by riuer through Aleppo, Birrha,
Babylon and Balsara, and downe the Persian gulfe to Ormuz, and thence by
the Ocean sea to Goa, and againe ouer-land to Bisnagar, Cambaia, Orixa,
Bengala, Aracan, Pegu, Malacca, Siam, the Iangomes, Quicheu, and euen to
the Frontiers of the Empire of China: the former performed diuerse times by
sundry of our nation, and the last great voyage by M. Ralph Fitch, who with
M. Iohn Newbery and two other consorts departed from London with her
Maiesties letters written effectually in their fauour to the kings of
Cambaia and China in the yere 1583, who in the yeere 1591. like another
Paulus Venetus returned home to the place of his departure, with ample
relation of his wonderfull trauailes, which he presented in writing to my
Lord your father of honourable memorie.

Now here if any man shall take exception against this our new trade with
Turkes and misbeleeuers, he shall shew himselfe a man of small experience
in old and new Histories, or wilfully lead with partialitie, or some worse
humour. [Marginal note: 1. King. cap. 5., 2. Chron. cap. 2.] For who
knoweth not, that king Solomon of old, entred into league vpon necessitie
with Hiram the king of Tyrus, a gentile? Or who is ignorant that the
French, the Genouois, Florentines, Raguseans, Venetians, and Polonians are
at this day in league with the Grand Signior, and haue beene these many
yeeres, and haue vsed trade and traffike in his dominions? Who can deny
that the Emperor of Christendome hath had league with the Turke, and payd
him a long while a pension for a part of Hungarie? And who doth not
acknowledge, that either hath traueiled the remote parts of the world, or
read the Histories of this latter age, that the Spaniards and Portugales in
Barbarie, in the Indies, and elsewhere, haue ordinarie confederacie and
traffike with the Moores, and many kindes of Gentiles and Pagans, and that
which is more, doe pay them pensions, and vse them in their seruice and
warres? Why then should that be blamed in vs, which is vsuall and common to
the most part of other Christian nations? Therefore let our neighbours,
which haue found most fault with this new league and traffike, thanke
themselues and their owne foolish pride, whereby we were vrged to seeke
further to prouide vent for our naturall commodities. And herein the old
Greeke prouerbe was most truely verified, That euill counsaille prooueth
worst to the author and deuiser of the same.

Hauing thus farre intreated of the chiefe contents of the first part of
this second Volume, it remayneth that I briefly acquaint your Honor with
the chiefe contents of the second part. It may therefore please you to
vnderstand, that herein I haue likewise preserued, disposed, and set in
order such Voyages, Nauigations, Traffikes, and Discoueries, as our Nation,
and especially the worthy inhabitants of this citie of London, haue
painefully performed to the South and Southeast parts of the world, without
the Streight of Gibraltar, vpon the coasts of Africa, about the Cape of
Buona Sperança, to and beyonde the East India. To come more neere vnto
particulars, I haue here set downe the very originals and infancie of our
trades to the Canarian Ilands, to the kingdomes of Barbarie, to the mightie
riuers of Senega and Gambia, to those of Madrabumba, and Sierra Leona, and
the Isles of Cape Verde, with twelue sundry voyages to the sultry kingdomes
of Guinea and Benin, to the Ile of San Thomé, with a late and true report
of the weake estate of the Portugales in Angola, as also the whole course
of the Portugale Caracks from Lisbon to the barre of Goa in India, with the
disposition and qualitie of the climate neere and vnder the Equinoctiall
line, the sundry infallible markes and tokens of approaching vnto, and
doubling of The Cape of good Hope, the great variation of the compasse for
three or foure pointes towards the East between the Meridian of S. Michael
one of the Islands of the Azores, and the aforesaid Cape, with the returne
of the needle againe due North at the Cape Das Agulias, and that place
being passed outward bound, the swaruing backe againe thereof towards the
West, proportionally as it did before, the two wayes, the one within and
the other without the Isle of S. Laurence, the dangers of priuie rockes and
quicksands, the running seas, and the perils thereof, with the certaine and
vndoubted signes of land. All these and other particularities are plainly
and truely here deliuered by one Thomas Steuens a learned Englishman, who
in the yeere 1579 going as a passenger in the Portugale Fleete from Lisbon
into India, wrote the same from Goa to his father in England: Whereunto I
haue added the memorable voyage of M. Iames Lancaster, who doth not onely
recount and confirme most of the things aboue mentioned, but also doth
acquaint vs with the state of the voyage beyond Cape Comori, and the Isle
of Ceilon, with the Isles of Nicubar and Gomes Polo lying within two
leagues of the rich Island Sumatra, and those of Pulo Pinaom, with the
maine land of Iunçalaon and the streight of Malacca. I haue likewise added
a late intercepted letter of a Portugall reuealing the secret and most
gainefull trade of Pegu, which is also confirmed by Cesar Fredericke a
Venetian, and M. Ralph Fitch now liuing here in London.

And because our chiefe desire is to find out ample vent of our wollen
cloth, the naturall commoditie of this our Realme, the fittest places,
which in al my readings and obseruations I find for that purpose, are the
manifold Islands of Iapan, and the Northern parts of China, and the regions
of the Tartars next adioyning (whereof I read, that the countrey in winter
is Assi fria como Flandes, that is to say, as cold as Flanders, and that
the riuers be strongly ouer frozen) and therefore I haue here inserted two
speciall Treatises of the sayd Countries, the last discourse I hold to be
the most exact of those parts that is yet come to light, which was printed
in Lantine in Macao a citie of China, in China paper, in the yeere a
thousand fiue hundred and ninetie, and was intercepted in the great Carack
called Madre de Dios two yeeres after, inclosed in a case of sweete Cedar
wood, and lapped vp almost an hundred fold in fine Calicut cloth, as though
it had bene some incomparable iewel.

But leauing abruptly this discourse, I thinke it not impertinent, before I
make an end, to deliuer some of the reasons, that moued me to present this
part of my trauailes vnto your Honour. The reuerend antiquitie in the
dedication of their workes made choyse of such patrons, as eyther with
their reputation and credits were able to countenance the same, or by their
wisedome and vnderstanding were able to censure and approue them, or with
their abilitie were likely to stand them or theirs in steade in the
ordinarie necessities and accidents of their life. Touching the first, your
descent from a father, that was accounted Pater patriæ, your owne place and
credite in execution of her Maiesties inward counsailes and publike
seruices, added to your well discharging your forren imployment (when the
greatest cause in Christendome was handled) haue not onely drawen mens eyes
vpon you, but also forcibly haue moued many, and my selfe among the rest to
haue our labours protected by your authoritie. For the second point, when
it pleased your Honour in sommer was two yeeres to haue some conference
with me, and to demaund mine opinion touching the state of the Country of
Guiana, and whether it were fit to be planted by the English: I then (to my
no small ioy) did admire the exact knowledge which you had gotten of those
matters of Indian Nauigations: and how carefull you were, not to be
ouertaken with any partiall affection to the Action, appeared also, by the
sound arguments which you made pro and contra, of the likelihood and reason
of good or ill successe of the same, before the State and common wealth
(wherein you haue an extraordinarie voyce) should be farther engaged. In
consideration whereof I thinke myselfe thrise happie to haue these my
trauailes censured by your Honours so well approued iudgement, Touching the
third and last motiue I cannot but acknowledge my selfe much indebted for
your fauourable letters heretofore written in my behalfe in mine, honest
causes. Whereunto I may adde, that when this worke was to passe vnto the
presse, your Honour did not onely intreate a worthy knight, a person of
speciall experience, as in many others so in marine causes, to ouersee and
peruse the same, but also vpon his good report with your most fauourable
letters did warrant, and with extraordinarie commendation did approue and
allow my labours, and desire to publish the same. Wherefore to conclude,
seeing they take their life and light from the most cheerefull and benigne
aspect of your fauour, I thinke it my bounden dutie in all humilitie and
with much bashfulnesse to recommend my selfe and them vnto your right
Honorable and fauourable protection, and your Honour to the merciful
tuition of the most High. From London this 24. of October. 1599.

Your Honours most humble to be commanded,

Richard Hakluyt preacher.



Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and

Discoueries

OF THE

ENGLISH NATION,

MADE TO

THE ILANDS OF MADERA AND OF THE CANARIES.


The voyage of Macham an English man, wherein he first of any man discouered
  the Iland of Madera, recorded verbatim in the Portugall history, written
  by Antonio Galuano.

[Sidenote: Madera first discouered by one Macham an Englishman.] In the
yeere 1344, King Peter the fourth of that name reigning in Aragon, the
Chronicles of his age write that about this time the Iland of Madera,
standing in 32 degrees, was discouered by an English man, which was named
Macham, who sailing out of England into Spaine, with a woman that he had
stollen, arriued by tempest in that Iland, and did cast anker in that hauen
or bay, which now is called Machico after the name of Macham. And because
his louer was sea sicke, he went on land with some of his company, and the
shippe with a good winde made saile away, and the woman died for thought.
[Sidenote: Macham made there a chapel, naming it Iesus chapell.] Macham,
which loued her dearely built a chapell, or hermitage, to bury her in,
calling it by the name of Iesus, and caused his name and hers to be written
or grauen vpon the stone of her tombe, and the occasion of their arriuall
there. And afterward he ordeined a boat made of one tree (for there be
trees of a great compasse about) and went to sea in it, with those men that
he had, and were left behinde with him, and came vpon the coast of Afrike,
without saile or oare. And the Moores which saw it tooke it to be a
maruellous thing, and presented him vnto the king of that countrey for a
woonder, and that king also sent him and his companions for a miracle vnto
the king of Castile.

In the yeere 1395. King Henry the third of that name reigning in Castile,
the information which Macham gaue of this Iland, and also the ship of his
company, mooued many of France and Castile to go and discouer it, and also
the great Canaria, &c.

In the yeere 1417, King Iohn the second reigning in Castile, and his mother
Lady Katherine being Regent, one Monsieur Ruben of Bracamont, which was
Admirall of France, demanding the conquest of the Ilands of the Canaries,
with the title of King, for a kinsman of his named Monsieur Iohn
Betancourt, after that the Queene hath giuen him them, and holpen him, he
departed from Siuil with a good army. And they affirme also, that the
principall cause which moued him to this, was to discouer the Iland of
Madera, which Macham had found, &c. ibidem pag. 2. of Anthonio Galuano.
[Footnote: The romantic story of Machin or Macham has been recently
confirmed by authentic documents discovered in Lisbon. The lady eloped with
him from near Bristol. The name of Madeira is derived from its thick woods,
the word being the same as the Latin Materies.]

       *       *       *       *       *

A briefe note concerning an ancient trade of the English Marchants to the
  Canarie-ilands, gathered out of an olde ligier booke of M. Nicolas Thorne
  the elder a worshipfull marchant of the city of Bristoll.

[Sidenote: The English had an ordinary trade to the Canaries 1526.] It
appeareth euidently out of a certaine note or letter of remembrance, in the
custody of me Richard Hakluyt, written by M. Nicolas Thorne the elder a
principall marchant of Bristoll, to his friend and factour Thomas Midnall
and his owne seruant William Ballard at that time resident at S. Lucar in
Andaluzia; that in the yeere of our Lord 1526 (and by all circumstances and
probabilities long before) certaine English marchants, and among the rest
himselfe with one Thomas Spacheford exercised vsuall and ordinary trade of
marchandise vnto the Canarie Ilands. For by the sayd letter notice was
giuen to Thomas Midnall and William Ballard aforesayd, that a certaine ship
called The Christopher of Cadiz bound for the West Indies had taken in
certaine fardels of cloth both course and fine, broad and narrow of diuers
sorts and colours, some arouas [Transcriber's note: sic.] of packthreed,
sixe cerons or bagges of sope with other goods of M. Nicolas Thorne, to be
deliuered at Santa Cruz the chiefe towne in Tenerifa one of the seuen
Canary-ilands. All which commodities the sayd Thomas and William were
authorised by the owner in the letter before mentioned to barter and sell
away at Santa Cruz. And in lieu of such mony as should arise of the sale of
those goods they were appointed to returne backe into England good store of
Orchell (which is a certaine kinde of mosse growing vpon high rocks, in
those dayes much vsed to die withall) some quantity of sugar, and certaine
hundreds, of kid skinnes. For the procuring of which and of other
commodities at the best and first hand the sayd Thomas and William were to
make their abode at Santa Cruz, and to remaine there as factours for the
abouesayd M. Nicolas Thorne.

And here also I thought good to signifie, that in the sayd letters mention
is made of one Thomas Tison an English man, who before the foresayd yere
1526 had found the way to the West Indies, and was there resident, vnto
whom the sayd M. Nicolas Thorne sent certaine armour and other commodities
specified in the letter aforesayd.

       *       *       *       *       *

A description of the fortunate Ilands, otherwise called the Ilands of
  Canaria, with their strange fruits and commodities: composed by Thomas
  Nicols English man, who remained there the space of seuen yeeres
  together.

Mine intent is particularly to speake of the Canaria Ilands, which are
seuen in number, wherein I dwelt the space of seuen yeres and more, because
I finde such variety in sundry writers, and especially great vntruths, in a
booke called The New found world Antarctike, set out by a French man called
Andrew Thenet, the which his booke he dedicated to the Cardinall of Sens,
keeper of the great seale of France.

It appeareth by the sayd booke that he had read the works of sundry
Phylosophers, Astronomers, and Cosmographers, whose opinions he gathered
together. But touching his owne trauell, which he affirmeth, I refer to the
iudgement of the expert in our dayes, and therefore for mine owne part I
write of these Canaria Ilands, as time hath taught me in many yeres.


The Iland of Canaria.

The Iland of Canaria is almost equal in length and bredth, containing 12
leagues in length, touching the which as principall and the residue, the
Spanyards holde opinion, that they discouered the same in their nauigation
toward America, but the Portugals say, that their nation first found the
sayd Ilands in their nauigation toward Aethiopia and the East Indies.

[Sidenote: English men at the first conquest of the Canaries.] But truth it
is that the Spanyards first conquered these Ilands, with diuers English
gentlemen in their company, whose posterity this present day inioyeth them.
Some write that this Iland was named Canaria by meane of the number of dogs
which there were found: as for example, Andrew Theuet sayth, that one Iuba
carried two dogs from thence: but that opinion could I neuer learne by any
of the naturall people of the countrey, although I haue talked with many in
my time and with many of their children. For trueth it is, that there were
dogs, but such as are in all the Northwest lands, and some part of the West
India, which serued the people in stead of sheepe for victual. But of some
of the conquerors of those Ilands I haue heard say that the reason why they
were called the Canaria Islands is, because there grow generally in them
all fouresquare canes in great multitude together, which being touched will
cast out a liquor as white as milke, which liquor is ranke poison, and at
the first entry into these Ilands some of the discouerers were therewith
poisoned: for many yeeres after that conquest the inhabitants began to
plant both wine and sugar, so that Canaria was not so called by sugar
canes.

The people which first inhabited this land were called Canaries by the
conquerors, they were clothed in goat skinnes made like vnto a loose
cassocke, they dwelt in caues in the rocks, [Footnote: Many thousand
persons, including a colony of free negroes, still reside in cave dwellings
in the hill side.] in great amity and brotherly loue. They spake all one
language: their chiefe feeding was gelt dogges, goates, and goates milke,
their bread was made of barley meale and goates milke, called Gofia, which
they vse at this day, and thereof I haue eaten diuers times, for it is
accounted exceeding holesome.

Touching the originall of these people some holde opinion, that the Romans
which dwelt in Africa exiled them thither, as well men as women, their
tongues being cut out of their heads, for blasphemy against the Romane
gods. But howsoeuer it were, their language was speciall, and not mixed
with Romane speech or Arabian.

This Iland is now the principallest of all the rest, not in fertility, but
by reason it is the seat of iustice and gouernment of all the residue. This
Iland hath a speciall Gouernour for the Iland onely, yet notwithstanding
there are three Iudges called Auditours, who are superiour Iudges, and all
in one ioyntly proceed as the Lord Chanceller of any realme.

To this city from all the other Ilands come all such by appeale, as haue
sustained any wrong, and these good Iudges do remedy the same. [Sidenote:
Ciuitas Palmarum.] The city is called Ciuitas Palmarum, it hath a
beautifull Cathedrall church, with all dignities thereunto pertaining. For
the publike weale of the Iland there are sundry Aldermen of great
authority, who haue a councell house by themselues. The city is not onely
beautifull, but the citizens curious and gallant in apparell. And after any
raine or foule weather a man may goe cleane in Veluet slippers, because the
ground is sandy, the aire very temperate, without extreame heat or colde.

They reape wheat in February, and againe in May, which is excellent good,
and maketh bread as white as snow. This Iland hath in it other three
townes, the one called Telde, the second Galder, and the third Guia. It
hath also twelue sugar houses called Ingenios, in which they make great
quantity of good sugar. [Sidenote: The planting and growth of sugar canes.]
The maner of the growth of sugar is in this sort, a good ground giueth
foorth fruit nine times in 18 yere: that is to say, the first is called
Planta which is layd along in a furrow, so that the water of a sluce may
come ouer euery roote being couered with earth: this root bringeth foorth
sundry canes, and so consequently all the rest. It groweth two yeeres
before the yeelding of profit, and not sixe moneths, as Andrew Theuet the
French man writeth.

[Sidenote: The making of sugar.] Then are they cut euen with the ground,
and the tops and leaues called Coholia cut off, and the canes bound into
bundels like faggots, and so are caried to the sugar house called Ingenio,
where they are ground in a mill, and the iuyce thereof conueyed by a
conduct to a great vessell made for the purpose, where it is boiled till it
waxe thicke, and then is it put into a fornace of earthen pots of the molde
of a sugar loafe, and then is it carried to another house, called a purging
house where it is placed to purge the blacknesse with a certaine clay that
is layd thereon. Of the remainder in the cauldron is made a second sort
called Escumas, and of the purging liquor that droppeth from the white
sugar is made a third sort, and the remainder is called Panela or Netas,
the refuse of all the purging is called Remiel or Malasses: and thereof is
made another sort called Refinado.

When this first fruit is in this sort gathered, called Planta, then the
Cane field where it grew is burned ouer with sugar straw to the stumps of
the first canes, and being husbanded, watred and trimmed, at the end of
other two yeeres it yeeldeth the second fruit called Zoca. The third fruit
is called Tertia Zoca, the fourth Quarta Zoca, and so orderly the rest, til
age causeth the olde Canes to be planted againe.

[Sidenote: Wine.] This Iland hath singular good wine, especially in the
towne of Telde, and sundry sorts of good fruits, as Batatas, Mellons,
Peares, Apples, Oranges, Limons, Pomgranats, Figs Peaches of diuers sorts,
and many other fruits; [Sidenote: Plantano.] but especially the Plantano
which groweth neere brooke sides, it is a tree that hath no timber in it,
but groweth directly vpward with the body, hauing maruelous thicke leaues,
and euery leafe at the toppe of two yards long and almost halfe a yard
broad. The tree neuer yeeldeth fruit but once, and then is cut downe; in
whose place springeth another, and so still continueth. The fruit groweth
on a branch, and euery tree yeeldeth two or three of those branches, which
beare some more and some lesse, as some forty and some thirty, the fruit is
like a Cucumber, and when it is ripe it is blacke, and in eating more
delicate then any conserue.

This Iland is sufficiently prouided of Oxen, Kine, Camels, Goats, Sheepe,
Capons, Hens, Ducks, and Pidgeons, and great Partridges. Wood is the thing
that most wanteth: and because I haue particularly to intreat of the other
sixe Ilands, I leaue further inlarging of Canaria, which standeth in 27
degrees distant from the Equator.


The Ile of Tenerif.

The Iland of Tenerif standeth in 27 degrees and a halfe from the equator,
and is distant from Canaria 12 leagues Northward. This Iland containeth 17
leagues in length, and the land lieth high in forme of a ridge of sowen
lande in some part of England, and in the midst of the sayd place standeth
a round hill called Pico Deteithe, situated in this sort. The top of this
pike conteineth of heigth directly vpward 15 leagues and more, which is 45
English miles, out of the which often times proceedeth fire and brimstone,
and it may be about halfe a mile in compasse: the sayd top is in forme or
likenesse of a caldron. [Footnote: The Peak of Teneriffe is 12,182 feet
high.] But within two miles of the top is nothing but ashes and pumish
stones: yet beneath that two miles is the colde region couered all the yere
with snow, and somewhat lower are mighty huge trees growing called
Vinatico, which are exceeding heauy and will not rot in any water although
they lie a thousand yeeres therein. Also there is a wood called Barbusano,
of like vertue, with many Sauine trees and Pine trees. And beneath these
sorts of trees are woods of Bay trees of ten and 12 miles long, which is a
pleasant thing to trauell thorow, among the which are great numbers of
small birds, which sing exceeding sweet, but especially one sort that are
very litle, and of colour in all respects like a Swallow, sauing that he
hath a little blacke spot on his breast as broad as a peny. He singeth more
sweetly than all the rest, but if he be taken and imprisoned in a cage, he
liueth but a small while. [Sidenote: Lime.] This Iland bringeth foorth all
sorts of fruits, as Canaria doth: and also all the other Ilands in generall
bring foorth shrubs or bushes, out of the which issueth a iuice as white as
milke, which after a while that it hath come out waxeth thicke, and is
exceeding good birdlime, the bush is called Taybayba. This Iland also
bringeth foorth another tree called Drago, which groweth on high among
rocks, and by incision at the foot of the tree issueth out a liquor like
blood, which is a common drug among Apothecaries. Of the wood of this tree
are made targets greatly esteemed, because if any sword or dagger hit
thereon, they sticke so fast that it is hard plucking them out.

This is the most fruitfull Iland of all the rest for corne, and in that
respect is a mother or nurse to all the others in time of need. [Sidenote:
Orchel good for dying.] There groweth also a certaine mosse vpon the high
rocks called Orchel, which is bought for Diars to die withall. There are 12
sugar houses called Ingenios, which make great quantity of sugar. There is
also one league of ground which standeth between two townes, the one called
Larotaua, and the other Rialeio, and it is thought that the like plot of
ground is not in all the world. The reason is, that this one league of
ground produceth sweet water out of the cliffes or rocky mountaines, come
of all sortes, fruites of all sortes, and excellent good silke, flaxe,
waxe, and hony, and very good wines in abundance, with great store of sugar
and fire wood. Out of this Iland is laden great quantities of wines for the
West India, and other countreys. The best groweth on a hill side called the
Ramble.

There is in that Iland a faire citie, standing three leagues from the sea,
nere vnto a lake called Laguna, wherein are two faire parish churches,
there dwelleth the gouernour who ruleth all that Iland, with iustice. There
are also aldermen for the publike weale, who buy their offices of the king:
the most of the whole inhabitants of this city are gentlemen, merchants,
and husband men.

[Sidenote: Santa Cruz.] There are foure other townes called Santa Cruz,
Larotaua, Rialeio, and Garachico. In this Iland before the conquest dwelt
seuen kings, who with all their people dwelt in caues, and were clothed in
goat skinnes, as the Canaria people were, and vsed such like order of diet
as they had. Their order of buriall was, that when any died, he was carried
naked to a great caue, where he was propped vp against the wall standing on
his feet. But if he were of any authority among them, then had he a staffe
in his hand, and a vessell of milke standing by him. I haue seene caues of
300 of these corpses together, the flesh being dried vp, the body remained
as light as parchment. These people were called Guanches, naturally they
spake another language cleane contrary to the Canarians, and so
consequently euery Iland spake a seuerall language.

Note (gentle reader) that the Iland of Canaria, the Ile of Tenerif, and the
Ile of Palma appertaine to the king of Spaine, vnto whom they pay fifty
thousand duckats yeerely for custome and other profits. All these Ilands
ioyntly are one bishopricke, which pay to the bishop twelue thousand
duckats yeerely. And thus I conclude of the Ile of Tenerif, which standeth
in 27 degrees and a halfe, as I haue before declared.


Gomera.

The Iland of Gomera standeth Westward from Tenerif in distance sixe
leagues: this is but a small Iland conteining eight leagues in length. It
is an Earledome, and the Lord thereof is called the earle of Gomera. But in
case of any controuersie the vassals may appeale to the kings superior
Iudges which reside in Canaria.

This Iland hath one proper towne called Gomera, which hath an excellent
good port or harbour for ships, where often times the Indian fleet takes
refreshing for their voyage.

There is also sufficient graine and fruit for the maintenance of
themselues.

There is one Ingenio or Sugar-house, with great plenty of wine and other
sorts of fruits, as Canaria and Tenerif hath.

This Iland yeeldeth no other commodity but onely orchell; it standeth in 27
degrees distant from the Equator toward the pole Arcticke.


The Ile of Palma.

The Ile of Palma standeth twelue leagues distant from the Ile of Gomera
Northwestward. This Iland is fruitfull of wine and sugar: it hath a proper
city called the city of Palma, where is great contraction for vines, which
are laden for the West India and other places. This city hath one faire
church, and a gouernour, and aldermen to maintaine and execute iustice. It
hath also another prety towne, called S. Andrewes. It hath also foure
Ingenios which make excellent sugar, two of the which are called Zauzes,
and the other two, Tassacort.

This Iland yeeldeth but little bread-corne; but rather is thereof prouided
from Tenerif and other places.

Their best wines grow in a soile called the Brenia, where yeerely is
gathered twelue thousand buts of wine like vnto Malmsies. This Iland
standeth round, and containeth in circuit neere fiue and twenty leagues. It
hath plenty of all sorts of fruits, as Canaria and Tenerif haue, it
standeth in twenty seuen degrees and a halfe.


The Iland of Yron, called Hierro.

This Iland standeth ten leagues distant from the Iland of Palma Westward:
it is but a little Iland, which containeth sixe leagues in circuit, and
hath but small extension. It appertaineth to the earle of Gomera. The
chiefest commodity of this Iland is goats flesh and orchell. [Sidenote: The
onely vineyard in Hierro planted by Ioh. Hill of Taunton.] There is no wine
in all that Iland, but onely one vineyard that an English man of Taunton in
the West countrey planted among rocks, his name was Iohn Hill.

This Iland hath no kind of fresh water, but onely in the middle of the
Iland groweth a great tree with leaues like an Oliue tree which hath a
great cisterne at the foot of the sayd tree. This tree continually is
couered with clouds, and by meanes thereof the leaues of the said tree
continually drop water, very sweet, into the sayd cisterne, which commeth
to the sayd tree from the clouds by attraction. And this water sufficeth
the Iland for all necessities, as well for the cattell, as for the
inhabitants. [Footnote: In connection with this fable, it is interesting to
see what is said by Le Maire, who visited these Islands in 1682. "As I had
been told of a wonderful tree in Ferro, whose long and narrow leaves were
always green, and furnished all the inhabitants with water, I wished to
find out if it were true. I asked if, as I had heard, such a heavy dew fell
on this tree that it dropped clear water into stone basins placed expressly
to receive it. There was enough of it for the islanders and their cattle,
Nature repairing by this miracle the defect of not providing pure water for
this isle. The inhabitants confirmed my belief that this was a pure fable.
There were some, however, who said that there might have been such a tree,
but it could never have furnished the quantity attributed to it." [See
VOYAGE TO THE CANARIES, etc, page 21, reprinted In _Bibliotheca Curiosa_.]]
It standeth in 27 degrees.


The Iland of Lanzarota

The Iland of Lanzarota standeth eighteene leagues distant from grand
Canaria Southeastward. The onely commodity of this Iland is goats flesh and
orchell. It is an earldome, and doth, appertaine to Don Augustine de
Herrerra, with title of earle of Fortauentura and Lanzarota. But the
vassals of these earledomes may in any cause of wrong appeale to the Kings
Iudges, which reside in Canaria, as I haue sayd before: because although
the king hath reserued to himselfe but onely the three fruitful Ilands,
called Canaria, Teneriff and Palma, yet he also reserued the rod of Iustice
to himselfe, because otherwise the vassals might be euil intreated of their
Lords.

From this Iland do weekly resort to Canaria, Tenerif, and Palma, boats
laden with dried goats flesh, called Tussmetta, which serueth in stead of
bacon, and is very good meat. This Iland standeth in 26 degrees, and is in
length twelue leagues.


The Ile of Forteuentura.

The Ile of Forteuentura standeth fifty leagues from the promontory of Cabo
de Guer, in the firme land of Africa, and foure and twenty leagues distant
from Canaria Eastward. This Iland doth appertaine to the lord of Lanzarota.
It is reasonable fruitfull of wheat and barley, and also of kine, goats,
and orchel: this Ile is fifteene leagues long and ten leagues broad. On the
North side it hath a little Iland about one league distant from the maine
Iland, betweene both of the which it is nauigable for any ships, and is
called Graciosa.

Both Forteuentura and Lanzarota haue very little wine of the growth of
those Ilands. It standeth in 27 degrees.

Thus much haue I written of these seuen Ilands by experience, because I was
a dweller there, as I haue sayd before, the space of seuen yeeres in the
affaires of master Thomas Locke, master Anthonie Hickman, and master Edward
Caselin, who in those dayes were worthy merchants, and of great credite in
the citie of London.


A description of the Iland of Madera.

The Iland of Madera standeth in 32 degrees distant from the equinoctinall
line, and seuentie leagues from the Ile of Tenerif Northeastward and
Southwest from Hercules pillars. This Iland was first discouered by one
Macham an Englishman, and was after conquered and inhabited by the
Portugall nation. It was first called the Iland of Madera, by reason of the
great wildernesse of sundry sortes of trees that there did growe, and yet
doe, as Cedars, Cypres, Vinatico, Barbuzano, Pine trees, and diuers others,
and therefore the sayd Iland continueth still with the same name. Howbeit
they hold opinion, that betweene the sayd Iland, and the Ile of Palma is an
Iland not yet discouered, which is the true Iland Madera called saint
Brandon. This Iland yeeldeth a great summe of money to the king of
Portugall yeerely: it hath one faire citie called Fouchall, which hath one
faire port or harbour for shippes, and a strong bulwarke, and a faire
Cathedrall church, with a bishop and other dignities thereunto
appertaining. There is also iustice and gouernment according to the
Portugall vse. But causes of appellation are remitted to the citie of
Lisbone in Portugall to the kings superior iudges there. This Iland hath
another towne called Machico, which hath likewise a good road for ships,
which towne and road were so called after the name of Macham the
Englishman, who first discouered the same. There are also sixteene sugar
houses called Ingenios, which make excellent good sugar.

There is besides the goodly timber before declared, great store of diuers
sortes of fruites, as Peares, Apples, Plummes, wild Dates, Peaches of
diuers sortes, Mellons, Batatas, Orenges, Lemmons, Pomgranates, Citrons,
Figges, and all maner of garden herbes. There are many Dragon trees, such
as grow in the Canarie Ilands, but chiefly this land produceth great
quantitie of singular good wines which are laden for many places. On the
North side of this land three leagues distant from the maine Iland standeth
another litle Iland called Porto santo: the people thereof liueth by
husbandrie, for the Iland of Madera yeeldeth but litle corne, but rather is
thereof prouided out of France and from the Iland of Tenerif. On the East
side of the Ile of Madera sixe leagues distant standeth another litle Iland
called the Desert, which produceth onely Orchell, and nourisheth a great
number of Goates, for the prouision of the maine Iland, which may be
thirtie leagues in circuit: and the land is of great heighth where the
foresayd trees growe. It is woonder to see the conueyance of the water to
the Ingenios by Mines through the mountaines.

In the mid way betweene Tenerif and the Iland of Madera standeth a litle
solitarie Iland called the Saluages, which may bee about one league in
compasse, which hath neither tree nor fruit, but is onely food for Goates.



THE

FARDLE OF FACIONS

CONTAINING

THE AUNCIENTE MANERS, CUSTOMES, AND LAWES,

OF THE

PEOPLES ENHABITING THE TWO PARTES OF

THE EARTH,

CALLED

AFFRICKE AND ASIE.

Printed at London:

BY IHON KINGSTONE, AND HENRY SUTTON.

1555.


[_This work was not included in the 1598-1600 edition of Hakluyt's Voyages.
It, however, formed part of the supplement issued in 1812._]



TO THE

RIGHTE HONOURABLE

THE ERLE OF ARUNDEL,

KNIGHT OF THE ORDRE,

AND

LORDE STEWARDE OF THE QUIENES MAIESTIES MOST HONOURABLE HOUSEHOLDE


Aftre what time the barrein traueiles of longe seruice, had driuen me to
thinke libertie the best rewarde of my simple life, right honorable Erle
and that I had determined to leaue wrastlyng with fortune, and to giue my
self wholie to liue vpon my studie, and the labours of my hand: I thought
it moste fitting with the dutie that I owe to God and manne, to bestowe my
time (if I could) as well to the profite of other, as of myself. Not
coueting to make of my floudde, a nother mannes ebbe (the Cancre of all
commune wealthes) but rather to sette other a flote, where I my self strake
on ground. Tourning me therefore, to the searche of wisedome and vertue,
for whose sake either we tosse, or oughte to tosse so many papers and
tongues: although I founde aboute my self, verie litle of that Threasure,
yet remembred I that a fewe yeres paste, at the instaunce of a good
Citezein, (who might at those daies, by aucthoritie commaunde me) I had
begonne to translate, a litle booke named in the Latine, Omnium gentium
mores, gathered longe sence by one Iohannes Boemus, a manne as it appereth,
of good iudgemente and diligence. But so corrupted in the Printing, that
after I had wrasteled a space, with sondrie Printes, I rather determined to
lose my labour of the quartre tanslacion, then to be shamed with the haulf.
And throwing it a side, entended no further to wearie my self therwithall,
at the leaste vntill I mighte finde a booke of a bettre impression. In
searching whereof at this my retourne to my studie, although I found not at
the full that, that I sought for: yet vndrestanding among the booke sellers
(as one talke bringes in another) that men of good learning and eloquence,
bothe in the Frenche and Italien tonge, had not thought skorne to bestowe
their time aboute the translacion therof, and that the Emperours Maiestie
that now is, vouched saulfe to receiue the presentacion therof, at the
Frenche translatours hande, as well appereth in his booke: it kindled me
againe, vpon regard of mine owne profite, and other mennes moe, to bring
that to some good pointe, that earst I had begonne. For (thought I) seing
the booke hath in it, much pleasant varietie of thinges, and yet more
profite in the pitthe: if it faile to bee otherwise rewarded, yet shal it
thankefully of the good be regarded. Wherefore setting vpon it a fresshe,
where the booke is deuided acording to thaunciente diuision of the earth
into thre partes, Affrique, Asie, and Europe: hauing brought to an ende the
two firste partes, I found no persons in mine opinion so fitte as your
honour, to present theim vnto. For seing the whole processe ronneth vpon
gouernaunce and Lawes, for thadministracion of commune wealthes, in peace
and in warre, of aunciente times tofore our greate graundfathers daies: to
whom mighte I bettre presente it, then to a Lorde of verie nobilitie and
wisedome, that hath bene highe Mareshalle in the field abrode, deputie of
the locke and keie of this realme, and a counsailour at home, of thre
worthie princes. Exercised so many waies in the waues of a fickle Commune
wealthe: troubled sometime, but neuer disapoincted of honourable successe.
To your good Lordeshippe then I yelde and committe, the firste fruictes of
my libertie, the firste croppe of my labours, this first daie of the Newe
yere: beseching the same in as good parte to receiue it, as I humblie offre
it, and at your pleasure to vnfolde the Fardle, and considre the stuffe.
Whiche euer the farder in, shall sieme I truste the more pleasaunte and
fruictefulle. And to conclude, if I shall vndrestande, that your honour
delighteth in this, it shal be a cause sufficiente, to make me go in hande
with Europe, that yet remaineth vntouched. Almightie God giue vnto your
Lordeshippe prosperous fortune, in sounde honour and healthe.

Your Lordshippes moste humblie at commaundemente,

WILLIAM WATREMAN.


The Preface of the Authour.

I haue sought out at times, as laisure hath serued me, Good reader, the
maners and facions the Lawes, Customes and Rites, of all suche peoples, as
semed notable, and worthy to be put in remembrance, together with the
situation and description of their habitations: which the father of Stories
Herodotus the Greke, Diodorus, the Siciliane, Berosus Strabo, Solinus,
Trogus Pompeius, Ptolomeus, Plinius, Cornelius the still, Dionysius the
Africane, Pomponius Mela, Cæsar, Iosephus, and certein of the later
writers, as Vincentius, and Aeneas Siluius (which aftreward made Pope, had
to name Pius the seconde) Anthonie Sabellicus, Ihon Nauclerus, Ambrose
Calepine, Nicholas Perotte, in his cornu copiæ, and many other famous
writers eche one for their parte, as it were skatered, and by piece meale,
set furthe to posteritie. Those I saie haue I sought out, gathered
together, and acordyng to the ordre of the storie and tyme, digested into
this litle packe. Not for the hongre of gaine, or the ticklyng desire of
the peoples vaine brute, and vnskilfulle commendacion: but partly moued
with the oportunitie of my laisure, and the wondrefull profits and
pleasure, that I conceiued in this kinde of studie my self, and partly that
other also delightyng in stories, might with litle labour, finde easely
when thei would, the somme of thynges compiled in one Booke, that thei ware
wonte with tediousnes to sieke in many. And I haue shocked theim vp
together, as well those of aunciente tyme, as of later yeres, the lewde, as
well as the vertuous indifferentlie, that vsing them as present examples,
and paternes of life, thou maiest with all thine endeuour folowe the
vertuous and godlie, and with asmuche warenes eschewe the vicious and
vngodly. Yea, that thou maiest further, my (reader) learne to discerne, how
men haue in these daies amended the rude simplicitie of the first worlde,
from Adam to the floud and many yeres after, when men liued skateryng on
the earthe, without knowlege of Money, or what coigne ment, or Merchauntes
trade: no maner of exchaunge, but one good tourne for another. When no man
claimed aught for his seueralle, but lande and water ware as commune to al,
as Ayer and Skie. When thei gaped not for honour, ne hunted after richesse,
but eche man contented with a litle, passed his daies in the wilde fielde,
vnder the open heauen, the couerte of some shadowie Tree, or slendre
houelle, with suche companion or companions as siemed them good, their
diere babes and children aboute them. Sounde without carcke and in rest
full quietnesse, eatyng the fruictes of the fielde, and the milke of the
cattle, and drinking the waters of the christalline springes. First clad
with the softe barcke of trees, or the faire broade leaues, and in processe
with rawe felle and hide full vnworkemanly patched together. Not then
enuironed with walles, ne pente vp with rampers, and diches of deapthe, but
walking at free scope emong the wanderyng beastes of the fielde, and where
the night came vpon theim, there takyng their lodgyng without feare of
murtherer or thief. Mery at the fulle, as without knowledge of the euilles
that aftre ensued as the worlde waxed elder, through diuers desires, and
contrarie endeuours of menne. Who in processe for the insufficience of the
fruictes of the earthe, (whiche she tho gaue vntilled) and for default of
other thynges, ganne falle at disquiete and debate emong themselues, and to
auoied the inuasion of beastes, and menne of straunge borders, (whom by
themselues thei could not repelle) gathered into companies, with commune
aide to withstande suche encursions and violence of wrong. And so ioyning
in confederacie, planted themselues together in a plotte, assigned their
boundes, framed vp cotages, one by anothers chieque, diked in themselues,
chose officers and gouernours and deuised lawes, that thei also emong
theimselues might liue in quiete. So beginning a rough paterne of tounes
and of Cities, that aftre ware laboured to more curious finesse.

And now ware thei not contented, with the commodities of the fieldes and
cattle alone, but by diuers inuencions of handecraftes and sciences, and by
sondrie labours of this life, thei sought how to winne. Now gan thei
tattempte the sease with many deuices, to transplante their progenie and
ofspring into places, vnenhabited, and to enioye the commodities of eche
others countrie, by mutuall traffique. Now came the Oxe to the yoke, the
Horse to the draught, the Metalle to the stampe, the Apparel to
handsomenes, the Speache to more finesse, the Behauiour of menne to a more
calmenesse, the Fare more deintie, the Buildyng more gorgeous,
thenhabitours ouer all became milder and wittier, shaking of (euen of their
owne accorde) the bruteshe outrages and stearne dealinges, that shamefully
mought be spoken of. Nowe refrained thei from sleayng one of a nother, from
eatyng of ech others flesh, from rape and open defiling of mother, sister,
and daughter indifferently, and fro many like abominacions to nature and
honestie. Thei now marieng reason, with strength: and pollicie, with might:
where the earthe was before forgrowen with bushes and wooddes, stuffed with
many noisome beastes, drouned with meares, and with marshe, vnfitte to be
enhabited, waast and vnhandsome in euery condition: by wittie diligence,
and labour, ridde it from encombraunce, planed the roughes, digged vp trees
by the rootes, dried away the superfluous waters, brought all into
leauelle, banished barreinesse, and vncouered the face of the earth, that
it might fully be sene, conuerted the champeine to tillage, the plaines to
pasture, the valley to meadow, the hilles thei shadowed with wooddes and
with Vines, Then thruste thei in cultre and share, and with wide woundes of
the earthe, wan wine and corne plenteously of the grounde, that afore
scarcely gaue them Akornes and Crabbes. Then enhabited thei more thicke,
and spred themselues ouer all, and buylte euery where. Of Tounes, thei made
cities, and of villages, Tounes, Castles vpon the rockes, and in the
valleis made thei the temples of the goddes. The golden graueled springes,
thei encurbed with Marblo, and with trees right pleasauntlie shadowed them
aboute. From them they deriued into cities and Tounes, the pure freshe
waters, a great distaunce of, by conduicte of pipes and troughes, and suche
other conueyance. Where nature had hidden the waters, out of sighte, thei
sancke welles of greate deapth, to supplie their lackes. Riuers, and maigne
floudes, whiche afore with vnbrideled violence, oftymes ouerflowed the
neighboured aboute, to the destruction of their cattle, their houses, and
themselues: thei restrained with bancques, and kept them in a course. And
to the ende thei might not onely be vadable, but passed also with drie
foote, thei deuised meanes with piles of Timbre, and arches of stone,
maulgre the rage of their violent streames, to grounde bridges vpon them.
Yea, the rockes of the sea whiche for the daungier of the accesse, thoughte
themselues exempte from the dinte of their hande, when thei perceiued by
experience, thei ware noyous to sailers, with vnspeakeable labour did thei
ouerthrowe and breake into gobettes. Hewed out hauens on euery strond,
enlarged crieques, opened rodes, and digged out herborowes, where their
shippes mighte ride saulfe fro the storme. Finally thei so laboured,
beautified, and perfeighted the earthe, that at this daie compared with the
former naturalle forgrowen wastenesse, it might well sieme not to be that,
but rather the Paradise of pleasure, out of the whiche, the first paternes
of mankinde (Adam and Eue) for the transgression of Goddes precept, ware
driuen.

Men also inuented and founde many wittie sciences, and artes, many
wondrefull workes whiche when by practice of lettres, thei had committed to
bookes, and laied vp for posteritie, their successours so woundered at
their wisedomes, and so reuerenced their loue and endeuours (whiche thei
spied to be meant toward them, and the wealth of those that shuld folow of
them) that thei thought them not blessed enough, with the estate of men
mortalle, but so aduaunced their fame, and wondered at their worthinesse,
that thei wan theim the honour and name of Goddes immortall.

Tho gan the Prince of the worlde, when men so gan to delight in thadournyng
of the worlde, to sowe vpon the good siede, the pestilente Dernell, that as
thei multiplied in nombre, so iniquitie might encrease, to disturbe and
confounde this blessed state.

First, therefore when he had with all kinde of wickedness belimed the
world, he put into their heades, a curious searche of the highest
knowledge, and suche as depended vpon destenie of thynges. And so practised
his pageauntes, by obscure and doubtfully attempted Responcions, and voices
of spirites, that after he had fettred the worlde in the trauers of his
toies, and launced into their hartes a blinde supersticion, and feare: he
trained it whole to a wicked worship of many goddes and Goddesses, that
when he ones had wiped cleane out of mynde the knowledge and honour of one
God euerlastyng, he might practise vpon manne, some notable mischief. Then
sette he vp pilgrimages to deuilles, foreshewers of thynges, that gaue
aduerisemente and answere to demaundes in sondrie wise. In the Isle of
Delphos one, in Euboea another, at Nasamone a thirde, and emong the
Dodonians, the famous okes, whose bowes by the blastes of the winde
resounded to the eare, a maner of aduertisemente of deuellishe delusion. To
the whiche Idolles and Images of deuelles he stirred vp men to do the
honour (Helas) due onely to God. As to Saturne in Italie, to Iupiter in
Candie, to Iuno in Samos, to Bacchus in India, and at Thebes: to Isis, and
Osiris in Egypte: in old Troie to Vesta: aboute Tritona in Aphrique, to
Pallas, in Germanie and Fraunce to Mercurie, vnder the name of Theuthe: to
Minerua at Athenes and Himetto, to Apollo in Delphos, Rhodes, Chio, Patara,
Troade and Tymbra. To Diane in Delos and in Scythia, to Venus in Paphos,
Ciprus, Gnydon, and Cithera. To Mars in Thracia, to Priapus in Lampsacho of
Hellespontus, to Vulcane in Lypara and Lennos, and in diuers other places
to sondrie other, whose remembraunce was then moste freshe in the memorie
of their people, for the benefaictes and merueilous inuencions bestowed
emong them.

Afterward, also when Iesus Christe the verie sonne of the almightie father,
shewyng hymself in the fleshe of our mortalitie, was conuersaunte in the
worlde, pointyng to the same, as with his fingre, the waie to immortalitie,
and endelesse blessednesse, and bothe with woorde and example, exhorted and
allured them to vprightnes of life, to the glorie of his father, sendyng
his disciples and scolers into the vniuersall worlde, to condemne
Superstition and all errour of wickednes, with the moste healthsome woorde:
to plante true Religion, and geue newe preceptes, and directions of the
life, and had now set the matier in suche forwardnesse and poincte, that
the Gospell beyng generally of all nacions receiued, there lacked but
continuaunce to perfeicte felicitie: The deuell eftesones retournyng to his
naturall malice, desirous to repossesse that, that constrainedly he
forsooke, betrappyng again the curious conceipte of man, some he reuersed
into their former abuses and errours, and some with newe Heresies he so
corrupted, snarled, and blynded, that it had bene muche bettre for them,
neuer almoste to haue knowen the waie of truthe, then after their
entraunce, so rashely and maliciously to haue forsaken it.

At this daie in Asia the lesse, the Armenianes, Arabians, Persians,
Sirians, Assirians and Meades: in Aphrique, the Egipcians, Numidians,
Libiens, and Moores. In Europe, the whole countrie of Grecia, Misia,
Thracia, and all Turquie throwyng awaie Christe, are become the folowers
and worshippers of Mahomet and his erronious doctrine. The people of
Scithia, whom we now cal Tartares (a greate people and wide spread) parte
of them worshippe the Idolle of their Emperour Kamme, parte the Sonne, the
Moone, and other Starres, and part according to the Apostles doctrine, one
onely God. The people of Inde, and Ethiope, vnder the gouernaunce of
Presbiter Ihon perseauer in Christiane godlinesse, howbeit after a sort,
muche different from ours.

The sincere and true faithe of Christ, wherewith in time it pleased God to
illumine the worlde, remaineth in Germanie, Italy, Fraunce, Spaine,
Englande, Scotland, Ireland, Denmarke, Liuon, Pruse, Pole, Hungarie, and
the Isles of Rhodes, Sicilie, Corsica, Sardinia, with a fewe other. This
bytter enemie of mankinde hauyng thus with his subtilties, inueiled our
mindes, and disseuered the christian vnion, by diuersitie of maners and
facions of belief, hath brought to passe thorough this damnable wyckednes
of Sacrifices, and Rites, that whilest euery people (vndoubtedly with
religious entent) endeuour theim selues to the worshippe of God, and
echeone taketh vpon him to be the true and best worshipper of him, and
whilest echone thinke theim selues to treade the streight pathe of
euerlastyng blessednes, and contendeth with eigre mode and bitter dispute,
that all other erre and be ledde farre a wrie: and whilest euery man
strugglethe and striueth to spread and enlarge his owne secte, and to
ouerthrowe others, thei doe so hate and enuie, so persecute and annoy
echone an other, that at this daie a man cannot safely trauaill from one
countrie to another: yea, thei that would aduenture saufely or vnsaufely,
be almost euery where holden out. Wherof me thinkes I see it is like to
come to passe, that whilest one people scant knoweth the name of another,
(and yet almost neighbours) all that shall this daie be written or reported
of theim, shalbe compted and refused as lyes. And yeat this maner of
knowledge and experience, is of it self so pleasant, so profitable and so
praise worthy, that sundrie (as it is well knowen) for the onely loue and
desire thereof, leauing their natiue countrie, their father, their mother,
their wiues and their children, yea, throwyng at their heles their sauftie
and welfare, haue with greate troubles, vexations, and turmoilynges taken
vpon theim for experience sake, to cutte through the wallowying seas, and
many thousande miles, to estraunge theimselues fro their home, yea, and
those men not in this age alone, but euen from the firste hatchyng of the
worlde haue been reputed and founde of moste wisedome, authoritie, and good
facion, sonest chosen with all mennes consent, bothe in peace and warre, to
administre the commune wealth as maisters and counsaillours, Iudges and
Capitaines. Suche ware thancient sages of Grece and of Italy, Socrates,
Plato, Aristotle, Antisthenes, Aristippus, Zeno, and Pythagoras, who
through their wisedomes and estimacion for trauailes wan them greate
nombres of folowers, and brought furthe in ordre the sectes named
Socratici, Academici, Peripateci, Cynici, Cyrenaici, Stoici, and
Pythagorici, echone chosyng name to glorie in his maister. Suche ware the
prudente lawemakers of famous memorie, Minois and Rhadamanthus emong the
Cretenses, Orpheus emong the Thraciens, Draco and Solon emong the
Athenienses, Licurgus emong the Lacedemonians, Moses emong the Iewes, and
Zamolxis emong the Scythians, and many other in other stedes whiche dreamed
not their knowledge in the benchehole at home, but learned of the men in
the worlde moste wise, the Chaldeies, the Brachmanni, the Gymnosophites and
the priestes of Egipte, with whom thei had for a space bene conuersant.
Like glorie, by like trauaill happened to the worthies of the worlde, as to
Iupiter of Crete (reported fiue times to haue surueied the whole worlde)
and to his twoo sonnes Dionisius (otherwise called Bacchus) and Hercules
the mightie. Likewise to Theseus and Iason, and the rest of that voiage. To
the vnlucky sailer Vlisses, and to the banished Eneas, to Cyrus, Xerxes,
and Alexander the Greate, to Hanniballe and Mithridate, kyng of Pontus,
reported able to speake fiftie sondrie languages, to Antiochus, the greate
and innumerable Princes of Roome, bothe of the Scipioes, Marii, and
Lentuli. To Pompeius the greate, to Iulius Cesar, Octauian, and Augustus,
to the Constantines, Charles, Conrades, Henrickes, and Frederickes. Whiche
all by their exploictes vpon straunge nacions, haue gotten their immortall
and euerlastyng renoume. Wherefore, seyng there is in the knowledge of
peoples, and of their maners and facions, so greate pleasure and profite,
and euery man cannot, yea, fewe men will, go traueile the countries
themselues: me thinkes gentill reader, thou oughtest with muche thanke to
receyue at my hande these bookes of the maners and facions of peoples most
notable and famous, togyther with the places whiche thei enhabite: And with
no lesse cherefulnes to embrase theim, then if beyng ledde on my hande from
countrey to countrey, I should poynct the at eye, how euery people liueth,
and where they haue dwelte, and at this daye doe. Let it not moue the, let
it not withdrawe the, if any cankered reprehendour of other mens doynges
shall saie vnto the: It is a thyng hath bene written of, many yeares agone,
and that by a thousand sondry menne, and yet he but borowyng their woordes,
bryngeth it foorthe for a mayden booke, and naimeth it his owne. For if
thou well considre my trade, thou shalt fynd, that I haue not only brought
thee other mennes olde store, but opened thee also the treasury of myne
owne witte and bokes, not euery where to be found, and like a liberall
feaster haue set before thee much of myne owne, and many thynges newe.
Farewell and thankefully take that, that with labour is brought thee.


The Fardle of Facions, conteining the aunciente maners, customes and lawes,
  of the peoples enhabiting the two partes of the earth, called Affricke
  and Asie.


Affrike.

¶ The first Chapiter.

¶ The true opinion of the deuine, concernyng the beginnyng of man.

When God had in V. daies made perfecte the heauens and the earth, and the
furniture of bothe: whiche the Latines for the goodlinesse and beautie
thereof, call Mundus, and we (I knowe not for what reason) haue named the
worlde: the sixth daie, to the entent there mighte be one to enioye, and be
Lorde ooer all, he made the moste notable creature Man. One that of all
earthly creatures alone, is endowed with a mynde, and spirit from aboue.
And he gaue him to name, Adam; accordyng to the colour of the molde he was
made of. Then drawing out of his side the woman, whilest he slept, to
thende he should not be alone, knitte her vnto hym, as an vnseparable
compaignion, and therwith placed them in the moste pleasaunt plot of the
earth, fostered to flourishe with the moisture of floudes on euery parte.
The place for the fresshe grienesse and merie shewe, the Greques name
Paradisos. There lyued they a whyle a moste blessed life without bleamishe
of wo, the earth of the own accorde bringing forth all thing. But when they
ones had transgressed the precepte, they ware banysshed that enhabitaunce
of pleasure and driuen to shift the world. And fro thenceforth the
graciousnes of the earth was also abated, and the francke fertilitie therof
so withdrawen, that labour and swette, now wan [Footnote: _Wan_ and won
were used indifferently. Thus in Drayton's _Polyolbion_, xi., p. 864 we
find--"These with the Saxons went, and fortunately _wan_,
     Whose Captain Hengist first a Kingdom here began."

And in the same page:
    "As mighty Hengist here, by force of arms had done,
    So Ella coming in, soon from the Romans won
    The counties neighb'ring Kent."]

lesse a great deale, then ydle lokyng on before tyme had done. Shortly
crepte in sickenes, and diseases, and the broyling heate and the nipping
cold began to assaile their bodyes. Their first sonne was Cayin, and the
seconde Abell, and then many other. And as the world grewe into yeares, and
the earth began to waxe thicke peopled, loke as the nombre did encreace, so
vices grew on, and their lyuing decaied euer into woors. For giltelesse
dealyng, wrong came in place, for deuoutnesse, contempte of the Goddes, and
so farre outraged their wickednes, that God skarcely fyndyng one iuste Noha
on the earth (whom he saued, with his housholde, to repayre the losse of
mankind and replenysshe the worlde) sente a floude vniuersall, which
couering all vnder water, killed all fleshe that bare lyfe vppon earth,
excepte a fewe beastes, birdes, and wormes that ware preserued in the
misticall arke. In the ende of fiue Monethes aftre the floude began, the
Arque touched on the mounteines of Armenia. And within foure Monethes
aftre, Noas and all his beyng restored to the earth, with Goddes
furtheraunce in shorte space repeopled the worlde. And to thende the same
myghte euery wheare again be enhabited, he dispersed his yssue and
kyndredes into sondrie coastes. After Berosus opynion he sent Cham
otherwyse, named Cameses and Chamesenuus with his ofspring, into Egipte.
Into Lybia and Cirene, Triton. And into the whole residewe of Affrike the
ancient Iapetus called Attalus Priscus, Ganges he sent into Easte Asia with
certeine of the sonnes of Comerus Gallus. And into Arabia the fertile, one
Sabus, sirnamed Thurifer. Ouer Arabia the Waste he made Arabus gouernour,
and Petreius ouer Petrea. He gaue vnto Canaan, all that lyeth from Damasco
to the outemost bordre of Palestine. In Europe he made Tuisco king of
Sarmatia, from the floude of Tanais vnto the Rhene. And there were ioyned
vnto him all the sonnes of Istrus, and Mesa, with their brethren, fro the
mounteyne of Adula to Mesemberia pontica. Archadius and Emathius gouerned
the Tirianes, Comerus Gallus, had Italie and Fraunce, Samothes, Briteigne
and Normandie, and Inbal, Spayne. That spiedie and vnripe puttyng forthe of
the children from their progenitours, before they had throughly learned and
enured them selues with their facions and maners, was the cause of all the
diuersitie that after ensued. For Cham, by the reason of his naughty
demeanour towarde his father, beyng constrayned to departe with his wyfe
and hys chyldren, planted him selfe in that parte of Arabia, that after was
called by his name. And lefte no trade of religion to his posteritie,
because he none had learned of his father. Whereof it came to passe, that
when in processe of tyme they ware encreased to to many for that londe:
beyng sent out as it ware, swarme aftre swarme into other habitations and
skatered at length into sondrie partes of the worlde (for this banysshed
progeny grewe aboue measure) some fel into errours wherout thei could neuer
vnsnarle [Footnote: _To snarle_, to entangle; hence, _to unsnarle_--to
disentangle. "And from her head ofte rente her snarled heare." _Spencer_,
_Faerie Queene_, iii., xii., 17. "You snarle yourself into so many and
heynouse absurdities, as you shall never be able to wynde yourself
oute."--_Cranmer's Answer to Bp. Gardiner_, p. 168. "Supposed to be formed
from _snare_." [Nares].] themselues. The tongue gan to altre and the
knowledge of the true God and all godlie worsshippe vanished out of mind.
Inso muche that some liued so wildely (as aftre thou shalt here) that it
ware harde to discerne a difference betwixte them and the beastes of the
felde. Thei that flieted into Egipt, wonderyng at the beautie and course of
the Sonne, and the Moone, as though there had been in them a power diuine,
began to worship them as Goddes: callyng the lesse, Isis and the bigger
Osiris. To Iupiter also thei Sacrificed, and did honour as to the
principall of life. To Vulcan for fire, to Pallas, as Lady of the skie, to
Ceres as gouerneresse of the arth, and to sondry other for other sondry
considerations. Neyther staied that darkenesse of iniquitie in Egipte
alone, but where so euer the progeny of Cham stepte in from the begynnyng,
there fell true godlines, all oute of minde and abondage to the deuell
entred his place. And there neuer was countrie, mother of moe swarmes of
people, then that part of Arabia, that he, and his, chase to be theirs. So
greate a mischief did the vntymely banishemente of one manne, bring to the
whole. Contrarily the progenie of Iapheth, and Sem, brought vp to full
yeres vndre their elders, and rightly enstructed: contentyng them selues
with a litle circuite, straied not so wide as this brother had doen.
Whereby it chaunced that the zeale of the truthe, (I meane of good liuyng
and true worshippe of one onely God) remained as hidden in one onely
people, vntill the tyme of Messias.


¶ The seconde Chapitre.

¶ The false opinion of the Philosophre concernyng the begynnyng of man.

But the aunciente Philosophers, whiche without knowledge of God, and his
truthe, many yeres ago, wrate vpon the natures of thinges, and thistories
of times had another opinion of the originall of man. For certain of them,
belieued the worlde euer to haue been, and that euer it should be, and man
together with it to haue had no beginnyng. Certaine did holde that it had a
beginnyng, and an ende it should haue, and a time to haue been, when man
was not. For saie thei, the begynner of thynges visible, wrapped vp bothe
heauen and earth at one instant, togither in one paterne, and so a
distinction growing on betwixte these meynte bodies, the worlde to haue
begon in suche ordre as we see. The aire by nature to be continually
mouyng, and the moste firie parte of thesame, for the lightenesse thereof,
moste highe to haue climbed. So that sonne and Moone, and the planetes all,
participatyng of the nature of that lighter substaunce: moue so muche the
faster, in how muche thei are of the more subtile parte. But that whiche
was mixed with waterie moisture, to haue rested in the place, for the
heauinesse thereof, and of the watery partes, the sea to haue comen: and
the matier more compacte to haue passed into a clamminesse firste, and so
into earth. This earth then brought by the heate of the sonne into a more
fastenesse. And after by the same power puffed and swollen in the
vppermoste parte, there gathered manye humours in sondry places, which
drawing to ripenesse enclosed them selues in slymes and in filmes, as in
the maresses of Egipt, and other stondynge waters we often se happen. And
seynge the heate of thaier sokynly warmeth the cold ground and heate meint
[Footnote: Mingled.--A word of Chaucer's time. "And in one vessel both
together meint." _Fletcher's Purple Island_, iv., st. 21.] with moisture is
apt to engendre: it came to passe by the gentle moisture of the night aire,
and the comforting heate of the daie sonne, that those humours so riped,
drawyng vp to the rinde of thearth, as though their tyme of childbirthe
ware come, brake out of their filmes, and deliuered vpon the earth all
maner of liuing thinges. Emong whiche those that had in them moste heate,
became foules into the aire: those that ware of nature more earthie, became
wormes and beastes of sondrie kindes: and where water surmounted, thei
drewe to the elemente of their kinde, and had to name fishes. But
afterwarde the earth beyng more parched by the heate of the Sonne, and the
drouthe of the windes, ceased to bring furthe any mo greate beastes: and
those that ware already brought furthe, (saie thei) mainteined, and
encreased by mutualle engendrure, the varietie, and nombre. And they are of
opinion that in the same wise, men ware engendred in the beginning. And as
nature putte them forth emong other beastes, so liued they at the first an
vnknowen lyfe wyldely emong them, vpon the fruictes, and the herbes of the
fieldes. But the beastes aftre a while waxing noysome vnto them, they ware
forced in commune for eche others sauftie to drawe into companies to
resiste their anoyaunce, one helping another, and to sieke places to make
their abiding in. And where at the firste their speache was confuse, by
litle and litle they sayed it drewe to a distinctenesse, and perfeigthe
difference: in sorte that they ware able to gyue name to all thinges. But
for that they ware diuersely sparckled in diuers partes of the worlde, they
holde also that their speache was as diuers and different. And herof to
haue aftreward risen the diuersitie of lettres. And as they firste
assembled into bandes, so euery bande to haue broughte forthe his nation.
But these men at the firste voide of all helpe and experience of liuyng,
ware bittrely pinched with hongre and colde, before thei could learne to
reserue the superfluous plenty of the Somer, to supply the lacke of Winters
barreinesse, whose bitter blastes, and hongrie pinynges, consumed many of
them. Whiche thing when by experience dere bought, thei had learned: thei
soughte bothe for Caues to defende them fro colde, and began to hourde
fruictes. Then happe found out fire, and reason gaue rule of profite, and
disprofite, and necessitie toke in hand to sette witte to schoole. Who
gatheryng knowledge, and perceiuyng hymself to haue a helpe of his sences,
more skilful then he thought, set hande a woorke, and practised connyng, to
supplie all defaultes, whiche tongue and lettres did enlarge and distribute
abrode.

Thei that had this opinion of the originall of manne, and ascribed not the
same to the prouidence of God, affirmed the Etopiens to haue bene the
firste of all menne. For thei coniectured that the ground of that countrie
lyng nierest the heates of the Sonne must needes first of all other waxe
warme. And the earth at that tyme beyng but clammie and softe, through the
attemperaunce of that moysture and heate, man there first to haue bene
fourmed, and there to haue gladlier enhabited (as natiue and naturall vnto
him) then in any other place, when all places ware as yet straunge, and
vnknowen, whiche aftre men soughte. Beginnyng therfore at them, after I
haue shewed how the worlde is deuided into thre partes (as also this
treatise of myne) and haue spoken a litle of Aphrique, I wyll shewe the
situacion of Aethiope, and the maners of that people, and so forthe of al
other regions and peoples, with suche diligence as we can.


¶ The thirde Chapitre.

¶ The deuision and limites of the Earthe.

Those that haue bene before our daies, (as Orosius writeth) are of opinion,
that the circuite of the earth, bordered about with the Occean Sea:
disroundyng hym self, shooteth out thre corner wise, and is also deuided
into thre seuerall partes, Afrike, Asie, and Europe. Afrike is parted from
Asie with the floude of Nilus, whiche comyng fro the Southe, ronneth
through Ethiope into Egipte, where gently sheadyng hymself ouer his
bancques, he leaueth in the countrie a marueilous fertilitie, and passeth
into the middle earth sea, with seuen armes. From Europe it is separate
with the middle earth sea, whiche beginnyng fro the Occean aforesaied: at
the Islande of Gades, and the pileurs of Hercules, passeth not tenne miles
ouer. But further entryng in, semeth to haue shooued of the maigne lande on
bothe sides, and so to haue won a more largenesse. Asie is deuided from
Europe, with Tanais the floude, whiche comyng fro the North, ronneth into
the marshe of Meotis almoste midwaie, and there sincking himself, leaueth
the marshe and Pontus Euxinus, for the rest of the bounde. And to retourne
to Afrike again, the same hauyng Nilus as I saied on the Easte, and on all
other partes, bounded with the sea, is shorter then Europe, but broader
towarde the Occean, where it riseth into mounteigne. And shoryng towarde
the Weste, by litle and litle waxeth more streighte, and cometh at thende
to a narowe poincte. Asmuche as is enhabited therof, is a plentuous soile,
but the great parte of it lieth waste, voide of enhabitauntes, either to
whote [Footnote: Too hot.] for menne to abide, or full of noisome and
venemous vermine, and beastes, or elles so whelmed in sande and grauell,
that there is nothing but mere barreinesse. The sea that lieth on the
Northe parte, is called Libicum, that on the Southe Aethiopicum, and the
other on the West Atlanticum.

At the first the whole was possest by fower sondrie peoples. Of the whiche,
twaine (as Herodotus writeth) ware founde there, tyme out of minde, and the
other twaine ware alienes and incommes. The two of continuance, ware the
Poeni, and Ethiopes, whiche dwelte, the one at the Northe of the lande, the
other at the South. The Alienes, the Phoenices, the Grekes, the old
Ethiopians, and the Aegipcienes, if it be true that thei report of
themselues. At the beginnyng thei were sterne, and vnruly, and bruteshely
liued, with herbes and with fleshe of wilde beastes, without lawe or rule,
or facion of life, roilyng and rowmyng vpon heade, heather and thether
without place of abode, where night came vpon them, there laiyng their
bodies to reste. Afterwarde (as thei saie) Hercules passyng the seas out of
Spaine, into Libie (a countrie on the Northe shore of Afrike) and bringyng
an ouerplus of people thence with hym, somewhat bettre facioned and manered
then thei, trained them to muche more humanitie. And of the troughes
[Footnote: Ships.] thei came ouer in, made themselues cotages, and began to
plante in plompes [Footnote: Clumps, bodies.] one by another. But of these
thinges we shall speake here aftre more at large.

Afrike is not euery place a like enhabited. For toward the Southe it lieth
for the moste part waste, and vnpeopled, for the broilyng heate of that
quatre. But the part that lieth ouer against Europe, is verie well
enhabited. The frutefulnesse of the soile is excedyng, and to muche
merueillous: as in some places bringyng the siede with a hundred folde
encrease. It is straunge to beleue, that is saied of the goodnesse of the
soile of the Moores. The stocke of their vines to be more then two menne
can fadome, and their clousters of Grapes to be a cubite long. The
coronettes of their Pasnepes, and Gardein Thistles (whiche we calle
Hortichokes) as also of their Fenelle, to be twelue Cubites compasse. Their
haue Cannes like vnto those of India, whiche may contein in the compasse of
the knot, or iointe, the measure of ij. bushelles. Ther be sene also
Sparagi, of no lesse notable bigguenesse. Toward the mounte Atlas trees bee
founde of a wondrefull heigth, smothe, and without knaggue or knotte, vp to
the hard toppe, hauyng leaues like the Cypres, but of all other the moste
noble Citrus, wherof the Romaines made great deintie. Affrike hath also
many sondrie beastes, and Dragones that lye in awaite for the beastes, and
when thei se time, so bewrappe and wreathe them aboute, that takyng fro
theim the vse of their ioynctes, thei wearie them and kille theim. There
are Elephantes, Lyons, Bugles, Pardales, Roes, and Apes, in some places
beyonde nombre. There are also Chamelopardales and Rhizes, like vnto
Bulles. Herodote writeth, that there be founde Asses with hornes, Hienas
Porpentines, wilde Rambes, a beast engendered of the Hiene and the Woulfe
named Thoas, Pantheres, Storckes, Oistruthes, and many kindes of serpentes,
as Cerastes, and Aspides, against whom nature hath matched the Ichneumon (a
verie little beast) as a mortall enemie.


¶ The. iiij. Chapitre.

¶ Of Ethiope, and the auncient maners of that nation.

Two countreies there ware of that name Ouerlanders, and Netherlanders. The
one pertaynyng to Aphrique, the other to Asie. The one whiche at this daie
is called Inde, hath on the east the redde sea, and the sea named
Barbaricum, on the northe it toucheth vpon Egypte, and vpon that Libie that
standeth on the vtter border of Afrike toward the sea. On the west it is
bounded with the other Libie that standeth more into the mayne londe. The
residue that runneth toward the south, ioyneth vpon the netherland Ethiope,
whiche lyeth more southerly, and is muche greater. It is thought that these
Ethiopes toke name of Ethiopus Vulcanes sonne, that (as Plinie saieth) was
gouernour there. Or els of the Greke wordes aythoo and ops, whereof the
former signifieth to broyle, or to bourne vp with heate, and the other, in
the eye or sight. Whiche sheweth in effecte, that the countreie lyeng in
the eye of the Sonne, it must nedes be of heate almost importable. As in
diede it lyeth in the full course of the sonne, and is in continuall heate.
Toward the weast it is hilly, in the middes grauell and sande, and on the
easte waste and deserte. There be in it dyuers peoples of sondry phisonomy
and shape, monstruous and of hugly shewe. They are thought (as I saied) to
haue bene the fyrst of all men, and those whiche of all other maye
truelyest be called an homeborne people. Neuer vnder the bondage of any:
but euer a free nacion. The first wae of worshippyng God (say thei) was
deuised and taught emonge theim: with the maners and ceremonies there to
appertinent. They had two kyndes of letters, one, whiche ware knowen onely
to their priestes for matters of Religion, whiche they called misticall,
and another for the vse of the people hidden from none. Yeat ware not their
Letters facioned to ioyne together in sillables like ours, but Ziphres, and
shapes of men and of beastes, of heades, and of armes, and artificers
tooles, which signified in sondrie wise echone accordyng to his propertie.
As by the picture of an hauke swiftenes and spiede, by the shape of a
crocodile [Transcriber's note: 'crocoiled' in original] displeasure or
misfortune, by the figure of an eye, good watche or regarde, and so forthe
of other. Emong their priestes, loke whome they sawe startle aboute as
haulfe wood, [Footnote: Mad, from the Saxon _wod_. See "Two Gentlemen of
Verona," ii., 3, and "Mids. N. Dr.," ii., 3.] him did iudge of all
othermooste holy, and making him their king, they fall downe and worship
him, as thoughe there ware in him a Godhead, or as thoughe at the least he
ware by goddes prouidence giuen them. This king for al that, must be
gouerned by the lawe, and is bounde to all thinges after thorde of the
contry. He his selfe maye neither punishe or guerdon any manne. But loke
vpon whome he wyl haue execution done, he sendeth the minister appoincted
for the purpose, to the person with a token of deathe: whiche when he hath
shewed, the officier retourneth, and the persone what soeuer he be,
incontinent fordoeth him self. So greatly ware they giuen to thee honour of
their kynges, suche a feruencie had they towarde them, that if it fortuned
the king through any mishap, to be maymed or hurte in any parte of his
bodye, as many as ware towarde him, namely of householde, voluntarily
woulde giue them selues the lyke hurt, thincking it an vnfitting
[Transcriber's note: original 'unsitting'] thing the kynge to lacke an eye
or the vse of a legge, and his frindes neither to halt, ne yet to lacke
parte of their sight. Thei say it is the manier also, that when the king
dieth, his friendes should wilfully dispatche theim selues and die with
hym, for this compte they glorious and a testimony of very friendship. The
moste part of them, for that they lye so vnder the Sonne, go naked:
couering their priuities with shiepes tayles. But a feawe of them are clad
with the rawe felles [Footnote: Skin. "To feed on bones, when flesh and
fell is gone." _Gasc. Steel Glass_ (Chalm. Poet.), ii., 556, etc.] of
beastes. Some make them brieches of the heares of their heades vp to the
waeste. They are comonly brieders and grasiers in commune together. Their
shepe be of very small body, and of a harde and roughe coate. Their dogges
also are neuer a whitte bigger, but thei are fierce and hardie. They haue
good store of gromel and barly, wherof they vse to make drincke. All other
graine and fruictes thei lacke, excepte it be dates whiche also are verye
skante. Some of them lyue with herbes and the tender rootes of cannes or
Riedes. Other eate flesshe, milke, and chese. Meroe, was in time past the
heade citie of the kyngdome, whiche stondeth in an Isle of the same name
facioned like a shielde, stretching it self thre thousand furlong alongest
by Nilus. Aboute that Islande do the cattle masters dwelle, and are muche
giuen to hunting, and those that be occupied with tilthe of the grounde
haue also mines of gold. Herodotus writeth that thethiopians named
Macrobij, do more estieme latten then thei do golde whiche thei put to
nothyng that thei compt of any price. In so muche that the Ambassadours of
Cambises, when thei came thether, found the prisoners in the gaole fettred
and tied with Chaines of golde. Some of theim sowe a kinde of graine called
Sesamus, and other the delicate Lothom. Thei haue greate plenty of Hebenum,
a woode muche like Guaiacum, and of Siliquastrum. Thei hunte Elephantes and
kyll them to eate. There be Lions, Rhinocerotes, Basiliskes, Pardales, and
Dragones, whiche I said enwrappe thelephauntes, and sucke them to death,
for their bloude. There be found the precious stones called the Iacinthe,
and the Prasne. There is also cinamome gathered. Thei occupie bowes of
woode seasoned in the fire, of foure cubites long. Women be trayned also to
the warres, and haue for the moste parte a ring of latton hanging throughe
their lippe. Certeine of theim worshippe the Sonne at his vprijste, and
curse him moste bitterly at his doune gate. Diuers of them throwe their
dead into Riuers, other cofer them vp in earthen cofres, some enclose them
in glasse, and kepe them in their houses a yeare, and in the meane season
worship them deuoutly, and offre vnto them the first of all their encreace.
In the naming of a newe king, they giue their voice chiefly to him that is
moste goodly of stature, moste conning in brieding of cattle, and of
strength and substance passing the reast. The lawe hath bene, that the
priestes of Memphis shoulde haue the aucthoritie to sende the Kinge the
token of deathe, and to set vp another in the place of the deade, whom they
thoughte good. They haue an opinion that ther are two Goddes, one
immortall, by whome all thinges haue their beginning and continuance vnder
his gouernement, and another mortall, and he is vncerteine. Their king, and
him that best deserueth of the city next vnto him, they honour as Goddes.
This was the state of Ethiope from the beginning, and many yeares sence.

But at this daye as myne Authour Sabellicus saieth that he learned of those
that are enhabitantes in that countrey: The King of Ethiope (whom we
commonly calle Pretoianes or Presbiter Ihon) is a man of suche power, that
he is reported to haue vndre him thre skore and two other kinges. If the
heade Bysshoppess of the Realme desire to do, or to haue aughte done, al is
referred vnto him. Of him be giuen al benefices, and spiritual promocions,
which prerogatiue the Pope hath giuen, to the maiestie of kinges. Yet is he
him selfe no priest, he hath any maner of ordres. There is of
Archebisshoppes (that is to say of superiour and head bisshoppes) a great
nombre, whiche haue euery one vndre them at the least twenty other. The
Princes, Dukes, Earles, and head Bishoppes, and suche other of like
dignitie, when they come abrode, haue a crosse, and a basine of golde
filled ful of earthe caried before them: that thone [Footnote: The one.]
maye put them in remembraunce that earth into earth must again be resolued,
and the other renewe the memory of Christes suffering. Their priestes to
haue yssue, mary one wyfe, but she ones beyng dead, it is vnlawfull to mary
another. The temples and churches ther, are muche larger, much richer, and
more gorgeous then ours, for the moste part voulted from the floore to the
toppe. They haue many ordres of deuout men, moche like to our ordres of
Religious: as the ordre of S. Anthony, Dominique, Calaguritani, Augustines,
and Machareanes, whiche are bound to no colour but weare some suche one as
Tharchebysshoppe shall allowe. Next vnto the supreame and souereigne GOD,
and Mary the virgin his mother, they haue moste in honour Thomas sirnamed
Didimus. This King, of all other the worthiest, whome they call Gias (a
name giuen him of his mightiness and power) is of the bloud of Dauid,
continued from one generation to another (as they are perswaded) by so many
yeres of succession. And he is not as the moste of the Ethiopians are,
blacke, but white. Gamma the chiefe citie, and as we terme it the chambre
of the king, stondeth not by building of masonrie, and carpentrie as ours,
but strieted with tentes and pauilions placed in good ordre, of veluet and
saten, embrauded with silkes and purples of many diuers sortes. By an
auncient ordre of the realme, the king liueth euer in presence and sighte
of his people, and neuer soiourneth within the walles aboue two daies.
Either for that they iudge it an vncomely thing, and a token of delicate
slouthfulnes, or elles for that some law doth forbid it. His army in the
warres is ten hundred thousande men, fiue hundred Elephantes, and horses,
and Cameles, a wonderfull nomber, and this is but a meane preparacion. Ther
are througheout the whole nacion certeine houses and stockes, that are
pencionaries at armes, whose issue is as it ware branded with the marcke of
the crosse, the skinne beyng pretely slitte. Thei vse in the warres, Bowe,
Pique, Habregeon, and helmette. Their highest dignitie is priesthode, the
next, thordre of the Sages, whiche thei cal Balsamates, and Tamquates. They
attribute moche also to the giltelesse and vprighte dealing man, whiche
vertue they estieme as the firste staier to climbe to the dignitie of the
sages. The nobilitie hath the thirde place of dignitie, and the
pencionaries aforesaid, the fourthe. When the iudges haue giuen sentence of
life, or of deathe, the sentence is brought to the headborough of the Citie
(whom we call the Mayour) and they Licomegia: he supplieth the place of the
King. Lawes written thei occupy none, but iudge accordyng to reason and
conscience. If any man be conuict of adulterie he forfeicteth the fourtieth
parte of his goodes, but thadulteresse is punished at home, accordyng to
the discretion of the partie offended. The men giue dowrie to those whom
thei mary withal, but not to those that thei purchase besides. Their womens
attire is of Golde, (whereof that country hathe plentie) of pearle, and of
Sarsenette. Bothe men and women are apparelled in long garmentes downe to
the foote, slieued, and close rounde aboute of al maner of colours, sauing
only blacke for that in that contry is proper for morning. They bewaile
their dead xl. daies space. In bancquettes of honour, in the place of our
fruicte (which the latine calleth the seconde boorde) they serue in rawe
flesshe very finely minced and spiced, whervpon the gestes fiede very
licouricely. [Footnote: Gluttonously, daintily. (N. Wiley's Dictionary,
1737).] They haue no maner of wollen webbe, but are eyther cladde in
sarsenettes, or in linnen. One maner of speache serueth not througheout the
whole contry, but sondry and diuerse, aswel in phrase as in naming of
thinges. Thei haue twise in the yere haruest, and twise in the yere somer.
These Ethiopians or Indianes excepted, al the reste of the people of Libia
Westward, are worshippers of Mahomet, and liue aftre the same sorte in
maner, that the Barbariens do in Egipte at this present, and are called
Maures, or Moores, as I thincke of their outleapes and wilde rowming. For
that people was no lesse noysome to Lybie in those cursed tymes (when so
greate mutacion of thinges happened, when peoples ware so chaunged, suche
alteration of seruice, and religion broughte in, and so many newe names
giuen vnto contries) then the Sarasens ware.


¶ The v. Chapiter

¶ Of Aegipte, and the auncient maners of that people.

Aegipte is a Countrie lying in Affrike, or as some hold opinion, borderyng
thervpon, so named of Aegiptus, Danaus brother, where afore it was called
Aeria. This Aegipte (as Plinie recordeth in his fiueth boke) toucheth on
the East, vppon the redde Sea, and the land of Palestine; On the West
fronteth vpon Cirene, and the residue of Afrike. On the South it stretcheth
to Aethiope: And on the Northe is ended with the sea, to whom it giueth
name. The notable Cities of that Countrie, were in tyme past, Thebes,
Abydos, Alexandrie, Babilon, and Memphis, at this daie called Damiate,
alias Chairas or Alkair, and the seate of the Soldan, a citie of notable
largenesse. In Aegipt as Plato affirmeth, it was neuer sene rain. But Nilus
suppliyng that defaulte, yerely about saincte Barnabies tide, with his
ouerflowynges maketh the soile fertile. It is nombred of the moste parte of
writers, emong the Islandes: For that Nilus so parteth hymself aboute it,
that he facioneth it triangle wise.

The Aegiptians firste of all other, deuised the names of the twelue Goddes,
builte vp Altares, and Images, erected Chappelles and Temples, and graued
in stone the similitude of many sondrie beastes. All whiche their doynges,
dooe manifestly make, that thei came of the Aethiopes, who (as Diodore the
Sicilian saieth) ware the firste inuentours of all these. Their women in
old tyme, had all the trade of occupiyng, and brokage [Footnote: To _broke_
i.e. to deal, or transact business particularly of an amorous character.
(See Fansh. Lusiad, ix., 44; and Daniel, Queen's Arcadia, iii., 3.)]
abrode, and reuelled at the Tauerne, and kepte lustie chiere: And the men
satte at home spinnyng, and woorkyng of Lace, and suche other thynges as
women are wonte. The men bare their burdeins on the heade, the women on the
shulder. In the easemente of vrine, the men rowked [Footnote: To bend.]
doune, the women stoode vprighte. The easemente of ordure thei vsed at
home, but commonly feasted abrode in the stretes. No woman tooke ordres,
either of God or Goddesse. Their maner of ordres, is not to make seuerally
for euery Goddesse and God, a seuerall priest, but al at a shuffe, in
generall for all. Emong the whiche, one is an heade, whose sonne enheriteth
his roume by succession. The men children, euen of a custome of that
people, did with good wil kepe their fathers and mothers, but the women
children (yf they refused it) ware compelled. The moste part of men in
solempne burialles, shaue their heades, and let theyr beardes growe, but
Thegiptians shaued their beardes and let their heades grow. They wrought
their doughe with their fiete, and their claye with their handes. As the
Grecians do beleue, this people, and their ofspring, are they that vsed
circumcision. Thei ordre their writyng from their right hande towarde their
left, contrary to vs. It was the maner emong them, that the menne should
weare two garmentes at ones, the women but one. As the Aethiopes had, so
learned they of them, two maner of lettres; the one seuerall to the
priestes thother vsed in commune. Their priestes, euery thirde daye shaued
their bodies, that there might be none occasion of filthinesse when they
shold ministre or sacrifie. Thei did were garmentes of linnen, euer cleane
wasshed, and white: and shoes of a certeine kinde of russhes, named
Papyrus, whiche aftre became stuffe, to geue name to our paper. They
neither sette beane their selues, ne eate them where soeuer they grewe: ne
the priest may not loke vpon a beane, for that it is iudged an vncleane
puls. They are wasshed euery daye in colde water thrise, and euery nighte
twise. The heades of their sacrifices (for that they vsed to curse them
with many terrible woordes) did they not eate, but either the priestes
solde them to such strangiers as had trade emonge them, or if there ware no
suche ready in time, they threwe them in to Nilus.

All the Egiptians offer in sacrifice, neither cowe, ne cowe calfe, because
they are hallowed to Isis their goddesse, but bulles and bulle calues, or
oxen, and stieres. For their meate they vse, moche a kynde of pancake, made
of rye meale. For lacke of grapes they vse wyne made of Barly. They liue
also with fisshe, either dried in the Sonne and so eaten rawe, or elles
kept in pikle. They fiede also vpon birdes, and foules, firste salted, and
then eaten rawe. Quaile, and mallard, are not but for the richer sorte. At
all solempne suppers, when a number is gathered, and the tables withdrawen,
some one of the company carieth aboute in an open case, the image of death,
caruen out of woode, or drawen with the pencille as niere to the vine as is
possible, of a cubite, or two cubites long at the moste. Who shewyng it
aboute to euery of the gestes, saieth, loke here: drinke and be mery, for
aftre thy death, suche shall thou be. The yonger yf they miete their
auncient, or bettre vpon the way, giue them lace, going somewhat aside: or
yf the aunciente fortune to come in place where they are sitting, they
arise out of their seate, wherein they agre with the Lacedemoniens. When
they miete in the waye, they do reuerence to eche other, bowing their
bodies, and letting fall their handes on their knees. They weare long
garments of lynnen, hemmed about the skirtes beneth, which the call
Casiliras: ouer the which they throwe on another white garment also. Wollen
apparelle thei neither weare to the churche, ne bewry any man in.

Nowe for asmoche as they afore time that euer excelled in anye kinde of
learning, or durste take vppon them, to prescribe lawe, and rule of life
vnto to other, as Orpheus, Homeire, Museus, Melampode, Dedalus, Licurgus,
Solon, Plato, Pithagoras, Samolxis, Eudoxus, Democritus, Inopides, and
Moses the Hebrue, with manye other, whose names the Egiptians glorie to be
cronicled with theim: trauelled first to the Egiptians, to learne emongest
them bothe wisedome, and politique ordre (wherein at those daies they
passed all other) me thinketh it pleasaunte and necessarie also, to stande
somewhat vpon their maners, ceremonies and Lawes, that it may be knowen
what they, and sondry more haue borowed of them, and translated vnto other.
For (as Philip Beroalde writeth in his commentary vpon Apuleius booke,
entituled the Golden Asse) the moste parte of the deuices that we vse in
our Christian religion, ware borowed out of the maner of Thegiptians. As
surpluis and rochet, and suche linnen garmentes: shauen crownes, tourninges
at the altare, our masse solempnities, our organes, our knielinges,
crouchinges, praiers, and other of that kinde. The kinges of Egipte (saieth
Diodore the Sicilian in his seconde booke) liued not at rouers [Footnote:
From the expression _to shoot at rovers_, i.e., at a mark, but with an
elevation, not point blank.] as other kinges doe, as thoughe me lusteth
ware lawe, but bothe in their monie collections, and daily fare and
apparell, folowed the bridle of the lawe. They had neither slaue that was
homeborne, ne slaue that was forein bought, appointed to attende or awaite
vpon them. But the sonnes of those that ware priestes of honour, bothe
aboue thage of twenty yeres, and also singulerly learned. That the king
hauing these attendant for the body both by daie and by night, restrained
by the reuerence of the company about hym might commit nothing that was
vicious, or dishonourable. For men of power are seldome euil, where they
lacke ministres for their vnlawfull lustes. There ware appoincted houres,
both of the daie and the night, in the whiche the kinge mighte lawfully
doe, what the Lawe did permit. In the morning, assone as he was ready, it
behoued him to peruse al lettres, supplicacions, and billes: that knowing
what was to be done, he might giue aunswer in tyme: that all thinges might
rightlie, and ordrely be done. These being dispatched, when he had washed
his bodie emong the Pieres of the Realme, he put on some robe of estate,
and Sacrificed to the goddes. The maner was, that the Primate, or head of
the spiritualty (the beastes appoincted for the sacrifices being brought
harde to the altare, and the Kyng standing by) should with a loude voyce,
in the hearing of the people, wysshe to the king (that bare him selfe
iustely towarde his subiectes) prosperous healthe, and good fortune in all.
And should further particulerly recite the vertues of the king, his
deuoutnes and reuerence towarde God, and clemency towarde men. Commende him
as chaste, iuste, and vpright: of noble and great coinage, sothfaste,
liberal, and one that well brideled al his desires. Punisshing thoffendour
vnder his desertes, and rewarding the well doer aboue his merites. Making a
processe of these, and such other like: in the ende with the rehersalle of
the contrary vices, he cursed the wicked and euil. Then absoluing the King
of his offences, he laied all the faulte vpon the ministres, and
attendauntes, that should at any time moue the king to any thing vnright,
or vnlawfull. These thinges beinge done, he preached vnto the King the
blessednes of the life, led accordyng to the pleasure of the goddes, and
exhorted him thervnto: as also to frame his maners and doinges vnto vertue,
and not to giue eare to that, that leude men should counsaile him, but to
followe those thynges that led vnto honour and vertue. In thende, whan the
King had sacrificed a bulle, the priest declared certain preceptes and
examples of excellente, and moste worthy men: written in their holy
scripture. To thende that the Kynge admonisshed by the example of theim,
might ordre his gouernaunce iustlye, and godly, and not geue hym selfe to
couetous cloinyng, [Footnote: Probably from the old French, _encloyer_, to
glut, or surfeit.] and hourdyng of tresure. He neither satte to iudge, ne
toke his vocacion, ne walked abrode, ne washed at home, ne laye with his
Quiene, ne finally did any maner of thing, but vpon the prescripte of the
lawe.

Their fare was but simple, nothing but veale, and goose, and their wine by
measure appoincted. So that thone should nether ouerlade the bealy, ne the
other the heade. To conclude, their whole life so bounde vpon temperaunce,
that it might be thoughte raither to haue bene prescribed them by a
discrete Phisicen to preserue helthe, then by a politique Lawyer. It
siemeth wondrefull that the Egiptians mighte not rule their owne priuate
life, but by the Lawes. But it semeth more wonderfull that their King had
no liberty of him selfe, either to sitte in iudgement, to make collections
of money, or topunishe any man, vpon wilfulnes, stoute stomacke, angre,
displeasure, or anye vniuste cause: But to be holden vnder lawe as a
commune subiecte, and yet not to be agreued therwith, but to thincke them
selues moste blessed in obeyeng and folowyng the lawe, and other in
folowing their lustes most vnhappy, as being led by them into many
daungiers, and damages. For suche oftentimes, euen when they know them
selues to do euill, either ouercome with malice, and hatred, or some other
mischiefe of the minde, are not able to witholde theim selues from the
euille. But they which by wisedome and discretion, gouerne their liues,
offende in fewe thinges. The kinges vsing suche an equitie, and vprightnes
towarde their subdites, are so tendred againe of them, that not onely the
priestes, but all the Egiptians in generall, haue more care for the health
and the welfare of the King, then for their wiues, their children, or any
other princes.

He that to his death continueth in this goodnesse, him being dead, do they
in general lamente. They teare their clothes, they shut vp the churche
dores, they haunte no place of wonte commune concourse, they omytte all
solempne holy daies: and girding them selues vnder the pappes with brode
Ribbond of Sarsenet, two or thre hundred on a company, men and women
together, renewe euery daye twise, thre skore and xii. daies together, the
buriall bewailing, casting dirte on their heades, and singing in rithme the
vertue of the Kinge. They absteine from al flesshe of beastes, all meates
that touche fire, all wine and all preparation of seruice at the table.
They bathe not, thei smel of no swietes, they go to no beddes, they
pleasure not in women: but as folkes that had buried their beste beloued
childe, all that continuance of time they lamente. During these seuenty and
two daies (hauyng prepared all thinges necessarie for the funerall pompe):
the laste daye of all, the bodie beyng enbaulmed and cofred, is sette
before the entrie of the Toombe. Thereaftre the custome, one redeth an
abridgemente of all the thinges done by the king in his life. And if there
be any man disposed to accuse the deade, libertie is giuen him. The
priestes are present, and euer giue praise to his well doings, as they be
recited. There stondeth also rounde about the Toombe a multitude of the
communes, which with their voices allowe asmuche as is trew, and crie out
vpon that, that is false, with vehement gainsaienges. Wherby it hath
happened, that sondry kynges by the repugnynges of the people haue lien
vntoombed: and haue lacked the honoure of bewrialle, that the good are
wonte to haue. That feare, hath driuen the kynges of Aegipte, to liue
iustly, and vprightly, lesse the people aftre their deathes, might shewe
them suche dishonour, and beare them perpetuall hatred. This was the maner
specially, of the aunciente kynges there.

The whole realme of Egipte was diuided into Shieres: and to euery Shiere
was appoincted a Presidente, whiche had the gouernaunce of the whole
Shiere. The reuenewes of the realme ware diuided into iii. partes: whereof
the companie of the priestes had the first parte, which ware in greate
estimacion emong them, both for the administration of Goddes Seruice, and
also for the good learnyng, wherin thei brought vp many. And this porcion
was giuen theim, partely for the administracion of the Sacrifices, and
partely for the vse and commoditie of their priuate life. For thei neither
thincke it mete, that any parte of the honour of the Goddes should bee
omitted, or that thei, whiche are Ministres of the commune counsaill and
profecte, should be destitute of necessary commodities of the life. For
these menne are alwaie in matters of weighte, called vpon by the nobles,
for their wisedome and counsaille: And to shewe (as thei can by their
connyng in the Planettes, and Starres, and by the maner of their
Sacrifices) the happe of thinges to come. Thei also declare vnto them, the
stories of men of olde tyme, regested in their holy Scripture, to the ende
that accordyng to them the kynges maie learne what shall profighte, or
disprofighte. For the maner is not emong them, as it is emong the Grecians,
that one manne, or one woman, shoulde attende vpon the sacrifices and
Ceremonies alone: but thei are many at ones aboute the honour of their
Goddes, and teache the same ordre to their children. This sorte of menne is
priuileged, and exempte from all maner of charges, and hath next vnto the
kyng, the second place of dignitie and honour.

The second portion cometh to the king to maintein his owne state, and the
charges of the warres: and to shewe liberalitie to men of prowesse
according to their worthinesse. So that the Communes are neither burdoned
with taxes nor tributes.

The thirde parte do the pencionaries of the warres receiue, and suche other
as vpon occasions are moustered to the warres: that vpon the regard of the
stipende, thei maie haue the better good wille and courage, to hasarde
their bodies in battaile. Their communaltie is deuided into thre sortes of
people. Husbande men, Brieders of cattle, and men of occupacion. The
Husband-men buyeng for a litle money a piece of grounde of the Priestes,
the king, or the warriour: al the daies of their life, euen from their
childhode, continually applie that care. Whereby it cometh to passe, that
bothe for the skoolyng that thei haue therin at their fathers handes, and
the continuall practisyng fro their youthe, that thei passe all other in
Husbandrie.

The Brieders, aftre like maner, learnyng the trade of their fathers,
occupie their whole life therabout. We see also that al maner of Sciences
haue bene much bettred, yea, brought to the toppe of perfection, emong the
Egiptians. For the craftes men there, not medlyng with any commune matiers
that mighte hindre theim, emploie them selues onely to suche sciences as
the lawe doeth permit them, or their father hath taught them. So that thei
neither disdaine to be taughte, nor the hatred of eche other, ne any thing
elles withdraweth them from their crafte.

Their Iudgementes and Sentences of lawe, are not there at giuen aduenture,
but vpon reason: for thei surely thought that all thinges well done, muste
niedes be profitable to mannes life. To punishe the offendours, and to
helpe the oppressed, thoughte thei the best waie to auoide mischiefes. But
to buye of the punishmente for money or fauour, that thought thei to be the
very confusion of the commune welfare. Wherefore thei chase out of the
chief cities (as Heliopole, Memphis, and Thebes) the worthiest men, to be
as Lordes chief Iustice, or Presidentes of Iudgementes, so that their
Iustice benche did sieme to giue place, neither to the Areopagites of the
Athenienses, ne yet to the Senate of the Lacedemonians that many a daie
after theim ware instituted. Aftre what tyme these chief Iustices ware
assembled (thirtie in nombre) thei chase out one that was Chauncellour of
the whole: and when he failed, the citie appoincted another in his place.
All these had their liuynges of the kyng: but the Chauncellour more
honorably then the rest. He bare alwaie about his necke a tablette, hangyng
on a chaine of golde, and sette full of sundrie precious stones, whiche
thei called Veritie and Truthe. The courte beyng set and begunne, and the
tablet of Truthe by the Chauncellour laied furthe, and theight bookes of
their lawes (for so many had thei) brought furth into the middes emong
them: it was the maner for the plaintife to putte into writyng the whole
circumstance of his case, and the maner of the wrong doone vnto him, or how
muche he estemed himself to be endamaged thereby. And a time was giuen to
the defendant to write answere again to euery poinct, and either to deny
that he did it, or elles to alledge that he rightfully did it, or elles to
abate the estimate of the damage or wrong. Then had thei another daie
appointed, to saie finally for them selues. At the whiche daie when the
parties on bothe sides ware herd, and the iudges had conferred their
opinions, the Chauncellour of the Iudges gaue sentence by pointyng with the
tablet of Veritie, toward the parte that semed to be true. This was the
maner of their iudgementes.

And forasmuche as we are fallen into mencion of their iudgementes, it shall
not be vnfyttyng with myne enterprise, to write also the aunciente Lawes of
the Egiptians, that it maie be knowen how muche they passe, bothe in ordre
of thynges, and profite.

Fyrst to be periured was headyng: for they thought it a double offence. One
in regarde of conscience not kept toward God, and an other in gyuynge
occasion to destroy credite among men, whiche is the chiefest bonde of
their felowship. If any wayfarying man shuld espy a man sette vppon with
thieues, or otherwyse to be wronged, and dyd not to his power succour and
ayde hym, he was gyltie of death. If he ware not able to succour and to
reskewe hym, then was he bounde to vtter the thieues, and to prosecute the
matter to enditement. And he that so dyd not, was punyshed with a certayne
nombre of stripes, and was kept thre days without meate. He that shuld
accuse any man wrongfully, if he fortuned afterward to be broughte into
iudgement, he suffered the punishement ordeyned for false accusers. All the
Egyptians ware compelled to brynge euery man their names to the chiefe
Iustices, and the facultie or science wherby they liued. In the which
behalfe if any man lyed, or lyued with vnlaufull meanes, he felle into
penalitie of death. If any man willyngly had slaine any man free or bond,
the lawes condemned hym to die, not regardynge the state of the man, but
the malicious pourpose of the diede. Wherby they made men afrayd to doe
mischief, and death beynge executed for the death of a bondman, the free
myght goe in more sauftie. For the fathers that slewe their chyldren, there
was no punyshement of death appoynted, but an iniunction that they shoulde
stande thre daies and thre nyghtes togither at the graue of the deade,
accompanied with a common warde of the people to see the thyng done.
Neyther dyd it sieme them iuste, that he that gaue life to the childe,
should lose his life for the childes death, but rather be put to continual
sorowe, and to be pyned with the repentance of the diede, that other myght
ther by the withdrawen from the like wyckednes. But for the chyld that
kylled either father or mother, they deuised this kynd of synguler torment.
They thruste hym through with riedes sharpned for the nones, in euery ioynt
all ouer his body, and caused hym quicke to be throwen vpon a heape of
Thornes, and so to bee burned. Iudgyng that there could not be a greater
wickednes emong men, then to take awaie the life, from one that had giuen
life vnto hym. If any woman with child ware condempned to dye, thei abode
the tyme of her deliueraunce nowithstandyng: for that thei iudged it farre
from all equitie, that the gilteles should dye together with the giltie. Or
that ii. should be punished, where but one had offended. Who so had in
battaille or warre, withdrawen hymself from his bande, forsaken his place
in the arraie, or not obeied his capitaigne: was not condempned to dye, but
suffred for his punishemente a notable reproche, of all punishementes the
woorste, and more greuous then death. Who so had disclosed any secret to
the ennemie, the Lawe commaunded his tongue to be cutte out of his heade.
And who so clipped the coigne or countrefacted it, or chaunged the stampe
or diminisshed the weighte: or in lettres and writinges, shoulde adde any
thing, by entrelinyng, or otherwise: or should guelde out any thyng, or
bryng a forged euidence, Obligacion or Bille, bothe his handes ware cutte
of. That suche parte of the bodie as had offended, mighte for euer beare
the punishemente therof: and the residue takyng warnyng by his ensample,
might shonne the like.

There ware also sharpe punishementes constitute, in offences concernyng
women. For he that had defloured a free woman, had his membres cutte of,
because in one offence, he had committed thre no small wickednesses. That
is to saie, wrong, made the woman an whore, and broughte in a doubte the
laufulnes of her issue. But thei that ware taken in adulterie, bothe partes
byeng agreed, the man was whipped with a thousand stripes by tale: and the
woman had her nose cut of, wherwith beside the shame she had, the whole
beautie of her face was disgraced, and disfigured.

The Lawes that apperteigned to the trade and occupieng of men, one with
another: ware made (as thei saie) by one Bocchorides. It is commaunded in
them, that if money haue bene lent any manne without writyng, vppon credite
of his woorde: if the borrower deny it, he should be put to his othe, to
the whiche the creditour muste stande. For thei so muche estiemed an othe,
that thei thoughte no man so wicked, as wilfully to abuse it. And again,
because he that was noted to sweare very often, lost vtterly his credite,
and name: many menne affirme, that for the regard of their honesties, it
happened very seldome, that any man came to his othe. Their Lawe maker
also, iudging that vertue was the engendrer of credite, thought it good by
good ordres to accustome men to good liuyng and honestie, vpon feare to
sieme vnworthie of all reputacion. He thought it also to be against
conscience, that he that without an othe had borowed, should not nowe for
his own, be beleued with an othe. The forfect for non paiment of the lone,
mought not bee aboue the double of the somme that was borowed. And paiement
was made onely of the goodes of the borower, the body was not arrestable.
For the Lawemaker thought it conueniente, that onely the gooddes should bee
subdite to the debte, and the bodies (whose seruice was required bothe in
peace and in warre) subiecte to the citie. It was not thoughte to bee
Iustice, that the manne of warre, whiche hasardeth his bodie for the
sauftie of his countrie, should for an enterest of lone, bee throwen into
prisone. The whiche lawe, Solon siemeth to haue translated to the
Athenienses, vndre the name of the lawe Sisarea, decreyng that the body of
no citezein, should for any maner of enterest be emprisoned.

[Footnote: It may interest readers to see how much the knowledge of Africa
had extended in 150 years. Cluverius, in his "Introductio in Geographiam."
1659, says:--

_Summa Africa descriptio_.

Asiæ exiguo Isthmo annectitur maxima Orbis terrarum peninsula Africa, tria
millia et triginta circiter mill German. ambitu complectens. Isthmi
intercapedo est mill. xxv. Pleraque Africæ inculta, et aut arenis
sterilibus obducta, aut ob sitim coeli terrarumque deserta sunt, aut
infestantur multo ac malefico genere animalium; in universum vasta est
magis quam frequens. Quædam tamen partes eximie fertiles. Græcis Libya
dicitur, à Libya Epaphi filii Iovis filia: Africam autem ab Afro Libys
Herculis filio dictam volunt. Maria eam cingunt, qua Sol oritur Rubrum, qua
medius dies Æthiopicum, qua occidit Sol Atlanticum; ab Septemtrionibus
Internum, Africum seu Libycum dictum, qua eam alluit. Longitudo summa
computatur ab Herculis freto ad promontorium Bonæ Spei mill. DCC. Latitudo
inter duo promontoria, Hesperium, vulgo _C. Verde_, et Aromata, quod est
juxta fauces Arabici sinus, vulgo nunc _Coarda fui_, mill. DL. Terra ipsa,
nisi qua interno mari accedit, obscure veteribus nota. Vltra autem Nili
fontes ac montes Lunæ prorsus incognita.

Regiones atque gentes in quas divisa fuit quondam, sunt, Ægyptus,
Cyrenaïca, Africa Minor, seu proprie dicta, Troglodytæ, Garamantes,
Numidia, Mauritania, Gaetulia, Libya interior, Arabia Troglodytica et
Æthiopia.


CAP. II.

_Ægyptus_.

Prima Africæ Asiæque proxima est Ægyptus, quam veteres Geographi in Asiæ
regionibus computarunt. At posteriores, Arabico sinu, vt ante dictum, inter
Asiam Africamque termino constituto, Africæ eam contribuerunt.

Nomen traxit ab Ægypto Danai fratre; ante Aëria dicta. Terminatur à
Septemtrione suo mari, id est, Ægyptio, ab Ortu Arabia Petræa et dicto
sinu; a Meridie Æthiopia, ab Occasu Cyrenaïca. Longa est a Pelusíaco Nilí
ostio ad Catabathmum opidum milliar. CL. Lata à Nili ostiis, ad opidum
Metacompsum Nilo adpositum, nunc _Conzo_, mill. c.

Divisa fuit generatim in Superiorem, quæ in Meridiem vergit, et Inferiorem,
quæ mari interno alluitur. Superiorem rursus Nilus dividebat in Libycam,
qua Occidentem, et Arabicam, qua Orientem spectat. Hinc populi Arabægyptii,
illinc Libyægyptii, dicti. Inferioris pars est Marcotis, sive Marmarica,
vltima versus Occidentem Cyrenaïcæ contermina. Speciatim vero universa
Ægyptus in complures præfecturas descripta erat, quas Græco vocabulo Nomos
vocarunt.

_De urbibus Ægypti_.

Ægyptus super ceteram antiquitatis gloriam, viginti millia urbium sibi
Amase regnante habitata quondam prætulit; postea quoque sub Romano imperio
multis, etiamsi ignobilibus, frequens.

Clarissima omnium fuit Alexandria, caput Ægypti totiusque Africæ, post
deletam Carthaginem prima; ab Alexandro Magno condita; postea in tantam
aucta multitudinem atque frequentiam, uti uni tantum Romæ cederet. Secunda
ab hac Diospolis, sive Thebae cognomine Ægyptiæ; quas centum portas
habuisse ferunt; sive, at alii ajunt, centum aulas, totidem olim Principum
domos; solitasque singulas, ubi negotium exegerat, ducenos armatos milites
effundere. Deinde Memphis, regia quondam: juxta quam pyramides, regum
sepulchra. Turres sunt fastigiatæ, ultra celsitudinem omnnem, quæ fieri
manu possit; itaque mensuram umbrarum egressæ, nullas habent umbras, regum
pecuniæ otiosa ac stulta ostentatio. Reliquæ urbes sunt, Syene, Sais,
Bubastis, Elephantis, Tentyris, Arsinoe et Abydus, Memnonis olim regia;
postea Osiris fano inclyta: et Arabiæ contermina, claritatis magnæ
Heliopolis, id est, Solis urbs. In Marmarica vicus fuit Apis, nobilis
religione Ægypti locus. Fuit et Labyrinthus nullo addito ligno
exædificatus, domos mille et regias duodecim perpetuo parietis ambitu
amplexus, marmore exstructus et tectus, unum in se descensum habens, intus
pene innumerabiles vias, multis ambagibus huc et illuc remeantibus.


CAP. III.

_De incolis Ægypti ac Nilo flumine; item de Libya exteriore_.

Ipsi Ægyptii, hominum vetustissimos se prædicantes, cum Scythis de gentis
antiquitate olim contenderunt. Antiquissimos esse post Syros, vel ipsa
sacra Scriptura attestatur. Disciplinarum complurium inventores rerumque
divinarum ac siderum peritissimi dicti sunt, quare ad eos Dædalus,
Melampus, Pythagoras, Homerus et alii complures eruditionis causa profecti.

Sub regibus esse jam inde ab initio rerum consueverunt, modo suis, modo
Æthiopibus; dein Persis ac Macedonibus; moxque iterum suis, donec Romani,
Augusto debellante, in provinciam redegerunt Ægyptum. Post hoc Saraceni eam
occuparunt: quibus successit Sultanorum inclytum nomen, ex Circassis
Tartarorum gente ortum. Postremi Turcæ ann. M DXVI invaserunt, qui etiam
nunc tenent.

_Nilus_.

Sed de Nilo hoc loco pauca quædam retulisse haud abs re fuerit. Terra ipsa
Ægyptus expers imbrium mire tamen fertilis, et hominum aliorumque
perfoecunda generatrix. Nilus id efficit, amnium in internum mare
permeantium maximus. Hic in Africæ desertis, montibus Lunæ ortus, haud
statim Nilus est, et primum ingentem lacum Nilidem, qui nunc _Zaire_ et
_Zembre_ dicitur, CXX. milliar. German. permeans, cum diu simplex sævusque
receptis dextera magnis aquis descendit, Astapus cognominatus, quod
Æthiopum lingua significat aquam è tenebris profluentem, circa Meroen,
Insularum, quas innumeras lateque patentes spargit, clarissimam, lævo alveo
Astabores dictus est, hoc est, ramus aquæ venientis è tenebris; dextero
veto Astusapes, quod latentis significationem adjicit, nec ante, quam ubi
rursum coit, Nilua dictus est. Inde partim asper, partimnavigia patiens;
mox præcipiti cursu progressus, inter occursantes scopulos non fluere
immenso fragore creditur, sed ruere. Postea lenis, et fractis aquis
domitaque violentia, et spatio fessus, tandem ad [Greek: Delta] opidum per
omnem Ægyptum vagus et dispersus, septem ingentibus ostiis in mare Ægytium
se evomit. Bis in anno, certis diebus auctu magno per totam spatiatus
Ægyptum, foecundus innatat terris. Causas hujus incrementi varias
prodidere; sed maxime probabiles duas: Etefiarum eo tempore ex adverso
flantium repercussum, ultro in ora acto mari: aut imbres Æthiopiæ æstivos,
iisdem Etesiis nubila illò ferentibus ex reliquo orbe. Idem amnis unus
omnium nullas expirat auras.

_Libya exterior_.

Cæterum à tergo Ægypti versus Meridiem, juxta sinistram Nili ripam, Libya
est exterior ad Æthiopiam extensa: nunc est _Elfocat_ desertum et _Gaoga_.


CAP. IV.

_Cyrenaïca, Africa Minor, Libyæ deserta, Troglodytæ et Garmantes_.

Ægypto annexa est Cyrenaïca regio, Ammonis oraculo maxime clara, nuunc
Barchanæ provinciæ dimidia pars Orientalis, eadem Pentapolitana dicta, à
quinque insignium urbium numero, quæ Berænice, Arsinoe, Ptolemais,
Apollonia, et ipsa Cyrene, unde regioni nomen. Græci hanc condiderunt, ex
Thera insula. Ægæi maris profecti. Ipsi Cyrenenses privata sorte inter
Ægyptios ac Poenos diu egerunt; dein cum Carthaginiensibus de agrorum
finibus magnum ac diuturnum bellum gesserunt. Mox Carthagine deleta, et
ipsi cum reliqua Africa Romano Imperio cesserunt. Posthinc solum eorum
Sultanis, tandem Turcis.

_Africa Minor_.

Sequitur Africa Minor sive proprie dicta. Terminatur à Septemtrione Africo
pelago, ab Ortu sinu magnæ Syrtis, à Meridie montium perpetuis jugis;
quibus à Libyæ desertis et Gætulis discernitur; ab Occasu Tusca amne.
Continet hodie Tunetanum regnum.

Fluvii in ea clari Cinyphus, Triton, Tritonidem paludem trahens: Catada, ad
Carthaginem se devolvens, et Bagradas omnium maximas ad Vticam, ac
Tuscaterminus Africæ Minoris.

Populorum varia nomina. Clarissimi Nasamones, extra Africam propriam etiam
Cyrenaïcæ et Marmaricæ contermini; quos antea Mesammones Græci
adpellaverunt, ab argumento loci, medios inter arenas sitos, et ab his
sublati Psylli, quorum corpori ingenitum fuit virus exitiale serpentibus,
ut cujus odore vel fugarent vel sopirent eas: et supra Carthaginem
Libyphoenices, iidem et Poeni à Phoenice Tyro profecti, Duce Eliza sive
Didone, quæ Carthaginem condidit.

Vrbium celeberrimæ Lepris magna, quæ et Neapolis, Abrotonum, Taphræ, Capsa,
Thysdrus, Thapsus, Leptis parva, Rhuspina, Adrumetum, Clupea, Turres,
Vthina et Carthago, Romæ æmula, terrarum cupida, opulentissima quondam
totius Africæ, antequam Romani tribus bellis devictam deleverunt. Vtica
Catonis, qui inde Vticensis, morte nobilis.

_Libya deserta, Troglodytæ et Garamantes_.

Ab Africæ minoris tergo versus Austrum Libyæ deserta fuerunt; ultraque
Troglodytæ, nunc _Berdoa_ desertum. Hos tegit ab Austro Ater mons, et trans
eum Garamantes populi clari, nunc _Borno_ regnum. Caput gentis fuit Garama,
quam hodieque eodem nomine exstare tradunt. Debris inclyta affuso fonte,
cujus aquæ ex coelesti quidem vertigine mutant qualitatem, at controversa
siderum disciplina; quidpe qui friget calore, calet frigore; à medio
scilicet die ad noctem mediam aquis ferventibus, totidemque horis ad medium
diem rigentíbus.

Cæterum et Troglodytas et Garmantas olim Romanorum arma superaverunt.


CAP. V.

_Numidia et Mauritania_.

_Numidia_.

A Tusca amne usque ad Ampsagam fluvium litori Africo praetenditur Numidia,
Masinissæ Regis nomine maxime clara, nunc Tremisenum regnum eodem
porrigitur situ. Gens ipsa Numidae, ante Nomades à Græcis adpellati, à
permutandis pabulis, mapalia sua plaustris circumferentes, ut nunc
Tattarorum fert mos.

Fluviorum celeberrimus est Rubricatus. Vrbes quam plurimæ, nobilesque; sed
Cirtha eminens; Sittianorum, postquam Romani tenuere, colonia dicta:
quondam Iubæ et Syphacis domus, cum foret opulentissima. Dein sequuntur
Cullu, Ruscicade, Bulla regia, Tacatua, Hippo regius, Sicca, Tabrachæ: Hanc
quoque regionem debellatam in provinciæ formam redegerunt Romani.

_Mauritania_.

Vltima ad Occasum est Mauritania; in qua praecipua gens Maurorum, unde
nomen regioni. Hos Graeci Maurusios dixerunt. Terminantur à Meridie Atlante
minori, quo submoventur à Gaetulis: qui et ipsi postea oppressis et
exstinctis Maurusiis Mauritaniae majorem partem occuparunt: ab Occasu est
Oceanus Atlanticus, à Septemtrione fretum Herculis et mare internum; Ab
Ortu primo Mulucham habuit flumen, quod Mauros à Numidis discernebat; at
quum ea Numidiae pars, quae est inter Ampsagam et Mulucham, Mauritaniae
adjiceretur, finis huic constitutus est Ampsaga. Continet hodie tria regna:
Darense, Fezense et Maurocitanum. Dividebatur autem olim Malva flumine in
Caesariensem quae Numidiam contingit, et Tingitanam quae Oceano
perfunditur. Regna fuere ad C. Caesarem usque Imperatorem, qui in duas
divisit provincias.

_Cæsariensis_.

Caesariensis provincia, quam nunc totam _Dara_ regnum obsidet, antea Bocchi
regnum adpellata fuit. Partem tamen inter Malvam et Mulucham Massaesylornm
gens tenuit. Caput provinciae Iulia Caesarea, aliquando ignobilis, cum Iol
esset; postea quia Iubae regia, illustris facta. Reliqua opida sunt
Cartenna, Saldae, Opidum novum, Rusazus, Ruscurium, Rusconia, Tipasa,
Tubusuptus et Tucca, impositum mari ac flumini Ampsagae.

_Tingitana_.

Tingitana provincia, quam nunc duo regna _Fez_ et _Morocco_ occupant, ab
urbe Tingi, quae nunc vulgo _Tanger_, cognomen accepit, ante Bogudiana
dicta à Rege Bogud. Opida in ea, Tingi modo dictum, caput provinciae, ab
Anteeo conditum; Iulia Constantia, Zilis, Volubilia et Lixus, vel
fabulosissime ab antiquis narrata. Ibi quidpe regia Antaei, certamenque cum
Hercule, et Hesperidum horti.


CAP. VI.

_Gætuli, Atlas mons, Libya interior et Æthiopia_.

_Gætuli_.

A tergo Mauritaniarum Africaeque Minoris Gaetulorum gens, et ipsa quoque
Romanorum armis debellata, longe lateque incoluit, quidpe quae hodie
occupat quicquid terrarum à _Lempta_ opido ad Oceanum usque, spatio mill.
Germanicorum CCCL protenditur. Hoc spatio nunc est _Biledulgerit_
provinciae major pars, ubi _Targa_ regnum, et quatuor deserta, _Lempta,
Zuenziga, Zanhaga, Hair_.

_Atlas Mons_.

Gaetulos à Meridie claudit mons Atlas, totius Africae vel fabulosissimus. E
mediis hunc arenis in coelum usque attolli prodiderunt celebrati auctores,
asperum, squalentem, qua vergat ad litora Oceani, cui cognomen imposuit:
eundem opacum nemorosumque, et scatebris fontium riguum; qua spectat
Africam, fructibus omnium generum sponte ita subnascentibus, ut nunqnam
satietas voluptatibus desit. Incolarum neminem interdiu cerni: silere omnia
haud alio quam solitudinum horrore. Eundemque noctibus micare crebris
ignibus, Ægipanum Satyrorumque lascivia impleri, tibiarum ac fistulae cantu
tympanorumque et cymbalorum sonitu strepere.

_Libya interior_.

Vltra Atlantem Libya est interior ad Nigrum usque flumen, vastarum
solitudinum, nunc desertum _Sarra_ dicta.

_Æthiopia et Troglodytica_.

Iam vero quicquid ultra Nigrum flumen est et Ægyptum, versus utrumque mare
Atlanticum Rubrumque, Æthiopes tenuerunt, gens omnium Africae terrae
amplissima, extra Africam à vetustissimis Geographorum posita. Ab Æthiope
Vulcani filio cognominati; vel, ut alii, ab nigro vultus corporisque
colore; [Greek: aithops] quidpe significat nigrum.

Divisa fuit Æthiopia in varia Æthiopum genera; quorum Ptolemaeus innumera
tradit nomina. At clarissimi omnium fuere Nigritae; à Nigro flumine dicti;
et Nubiorum gens magna, unde hodieque vastissima regio dicitur _Nubia_. Ea
autem Æthiopiae pars quae Nilo utrimque adjacet, Æthiopia dicitur sub
Ægypto; atque in ea ad Nili paludes seu lacus Cinnamomifera regio. At totum
sinus Arabici laevum larus Arabes tenuere Troglodytae, unde regio ipsa
Troglodytica.


CAP. VII.

_De incolis universæ Africæ novaque ejus descriptione; ac primum de Ægypto_

Qvinam mortales Ægyptum antiquitus incoluerint, ante dictum set. Reliqua
Africae versus Occasum mari adjacentia tenuerunt populi commemorati.
Advenae autem primi fuere Phoenicum coloni aliique ex Asia atque Ægypto
profecti. Postea paruit Romanis; mox Græcis Imperatoribus totum hoc
terrarum spatium. Deinde Vandalis, Saracenis, Arabibus. Nunc partem tenet
Turca, partem Serifus, quem vocant; partem reges alii, partem denique
Hispaniarum Rex.

At Æthiopes à suo solo neque recesserunt, neque in id alios colonos
receperunt; id longinquitas effecit regionis immensaeque intercedentium
desertorum vastitates.

Sed enarrata Africae antiquitate, res postulat, uti novam etiam ejus
descriptionem subjiciamus.

Dividitur nunc universa in septem potissimum partes sive regiones, quarum
nomina sunt haec: Ægyptus, _Barbaria, Biledulgerid, Sarra_ desertum,
Nigritæ, Æthiopia Interior, sive Superior, quod Abissinorum imperium, et
Æthiopia Exterior sive Inferior.

_Ægyptus_.

Ægypti (quam Turca obtinet) caput nunc est Cairum, vulgo _Alcair_,
Chaldaeis Alchabyr, urbs magnitudine stupenda, Emporium celeberrimum,
Circassiorum Ægypti Sultanoram quondam regia. Prope est _Materea_ hortus
balsami fructibus consitus, quod uni terrae Iudaeae quondam concessum,
hodie nisi in hoc loco, nusquam colitur.

Vltra Nilum pyramides visuntur stupendae altitudinis, ut ante memoravimus.

Secunda claritate à Cairo est Alexandria, splendida quondam atque
opulentissima civitas, nunc crebris bellis destructa atque concisa,
celeberrimum Christianis mercatoribus praebet emporium. Nobile exinde est
cum arce opidum _Raschitt_, quod Europaei _Rosettam_ vocant. _Damiata_,
olim Pelusium, Ptolemaei Geographi incunabulis insigne est.


CAP. VIII.

_Barbaria_.

Ægypto continuatur nobilissima totius Africae regio Barbaria; in sex partes
divisa, quarum una est provincia Barcana, quinque reliquae sunt regna,
Tunetanum, Tremisenum, Fessanum, Maurocanum et Darense.

_Barcana regio_.

Inter Ægyptum et Tunetanum regnum litori praetenditor Barcana regio, à
Barce antiqua urbe cognominata, soli asperitate pariter ac siccitate
sterilis.

_Regnum Tunetanum_.

Tunetanum regnum veterem Africam minorem ferme totam occupat. Caput est
Tunetum, sive Tunisa, vulgo _Tunisi_; insignis, vetus ac satis ampla urbs,
quae ex Carthaginis ruinis crevit; emporium Venetis et Genuensibus aliisque
mercatoribus celebre. Secunda est Tripolis nova, quae Tripolis Barbariae
dicitur, ad differentiam Tripolis Syriae: emporium est Europæis
mercatoribus celeberrimum. _Bona_ etiam, quae olim Hippo, D. Augustina
Episcopatu nota, nunc emporium haud postremum. Intus vero est Constantina
Romanarum antiquitatum reliquiis conspicua.

_Regnum Tremisenum_.

Caput regni est _Tremisen_, amplissima quondam, bellis gravissimis postea
tenuata. In litore est _Algier_, emporium satis nobile, at piratica infame,
Christianis mancipiis refertissimum; urbs ipsa moenibus, arcibus ac
tormentis bellicis adeo munita, ut inexpugnabilis credatur.

_Regnum Fessanum_.

Ad ipsum fretum Herculis Hispaniae objacet Fessanum regnum, cujus caput
_Fez_, urbs totius Barbariae princeps, ingens, opulenta, frequens,
splendida ac magnificis superbisque aedificiis miranda.

_Tanger, Sebta, Arxilla_, amplae ad fretum urbes, Hispanicae sunt ditionis.

_Regnum Maurocanum_.

Caput est Maurocum, vulgo _Maroc_, amplissima ac celeberrima olim, inter
maximas universi orbis memorata: at postea ab Arabibus divexata, nunc
maligne colitur. Secunda est _Taradante_.

_Darense Regnum_.

Intus Maurocano, Fessano ac Tremiseno regnis confine est regnum Darense
amplissimum, olim Caesariensis Mauritania dictum. Caput est _Dara_, unde
regioni nomen, tenuibus, ut totum regnum, atque egenis incolis habitata.
_Melilla_ ad mare internum conspicua urbs Hispano paret.


CAP. IX.

_Biledulgerit, Sarra desertum, Nigritæ, Abissini_.

A Tergo dictarum regionum est _Biledulgerit_ regio, longissimo tractu ab
Ægypti confinibus ad Oceanum Atlanticum porrecta. Nomen ei à dactyloram
proventu inditum. Deserta in ea sunt, _Lempta, Hair, Zuenziga, Zanhaga_ à
singulis opidis cognominibus, adpellata. Regna _Targa, Bardoa_ et _Gaoga_,
itidem ab opidis dicta.

_Sarra desertum_.

Continuatur huic regioni versus Meridiem _Sarra_, cujus longitudo à regno
_Gaoga_ ad regnum _Gualata_ extenditur.

_Nigritæ_.

Inde Nigritarum ampla est regio, ad utramque Nigri amnis ripam: longitudo
ejus porrigitur à Nilo et Meroe insula, usque ad Nigri ostia et Oceanum.
Regna in ea sunt haec, ab urbibus denominata: _Gualata, Hoden, Genocha,
Senega, Tombuti, Melli, Bitonin, Gurnea, Temian, Dauma, Cano, Cassena,
Benin, Zanfara, Guangara, Borno, Nubia, Biafra, Medra_.

_Æthiopia Interior quæ est Abissinorum_.

Interiori Æthiopiae imperat Abissinorum Rex, qui Presbyter sive Pretiosus
Ioannes, vulgo _Prete Gianni_, vocatur; magno, recepto tamen errore; cum is
quondam in Asiae, ut relatum est, regno _Tenduc_ regnaverit. Abasenos
populos recenset Stephanus in Arabia; unde verisimile est, eos in Africam
trajecto sinu Arabico commigrasse. Aut sane in ipsa Africa fuerunt ad
sinistrum Arabici sinus latus, ubi Arabiam Troglodyticam supra memoravimus.
Haec quidpe nunc sub Abissinorum imperio est. Alii tamen ab Arabico
vocabulo _Elhabaschi_ (sic enim Mauri Principem Abissinorum adpellant)
vulgo factum opinantur Abassi, ac deinde Abasseni; quod denique
commutatione vocalium in Abissinorum nomen evasit.

Clauditur regnum ab Ortu Arabico sinu et regionibus _Ajana_ ac _Zangebara_;
à Meridie _Monomotapa_; ab Occasu _Congo_ et _Medar_ regnis; à Septemtrione
_Nubia_ et Ægypto. Longum est ab Ægypto ad _Monomotapa_ usque mill. DLXXX.
Latum inter fauces Arabici sinus et Nigrum fluvium mill. CCCCL.

Dividitur in compluria regna sive provincias: quarum nomina sunt, _Dasila,
Barnagasso, Dangali, Dobas, Trigemahon, Ambiancantiva, Vangue, Bagamidri,
Beleguanze, Angote, Balli, Fatigar, Olabi, Baru, Gemen, Fungi, Tirut,
Esabela, Malemba_. Vrbes in universo imperio paucae sunt: vicis plurimum
habitatur, domibus ex creta et stramine constructis. Rex ipse (qui albo
esse colore fertur) sub tentoriis degit, quorum sex millia eum sequuntur.
_Amara_ arx est munitissima, in monte _Amara_ condita; in qua regis filii
sub validissimo præsidio educantur, donec patre defuncto heres producatur.


CAP. X.

_Æthiopia Exterior sive Inferior; item Insulæ Africæ adjacentes._

Reliquum Africæ Æthiopia perhibetur exterior sive inferior; ab Oriente,
Meridie et Occidente Oceano perfusa; à Septemtrione quasi duobus brachiis
Abissinorum imperium hinc inde complectitur.

Regiones, in quas dividitur, sunt _Congi, Monomotapa, Zangibar_, et _Ajan_.
Pleraque maritimorum à Portugalensibus tenentur firmissimis munimentis ac
praesidiis.

_Congi Regnum._

_Congi_ regnum (quod alliis _Manicongo_) Oceano Æthiopico perfusum, nomen
habet à capite suo urbe _Congi_. Incolae sunt Christiani. Terra ipsa
fluminum aquis maxime rigua. Dividitur in provincias sex; quas illi _Mani_,
id est, Praefecturas, vocant. Sunt autem _Bamba, Songo, Sundi, Pango,
Batta_ et _Pemba_. Regia est, civitas S. Salvatoris, quae ante _Banza_.

_Monomotapa Regnum._

_Monomotapa_ vocabulum significat Imperatorem; unde ipsi terrae, cui hic
imperat, nomen inditum. Solum est fertile atque amoenum; amnes aurum,
silvae elephantos magna copia producunt:

Clauditur regnum ab Ortu, Meridie et Occasu Oceano; à Septemtrione regno
_Congi_, Abissinorum imperio et regione _Zangibar_. Longitudo ejus est
inter duo maria Rubrum Æthiopicumque juxta Lunae montes milliar. German,
CCCC. Latitudo inter Nili fontes et promontorium Bonæ Spei mill. CCC.

Caput regni ac sedes regum est _Monomotapa_, ad flumen S. Spiritus. Hinc
versus Septemtrionem mill. circiter L. distat nobile aedificium, amplum
atque antiquum, quadra forma ex ingentibus saxis constructum.

_Zangibar et Ajan_.

Monomotapae, qua Rubro mari perfunditur, continuatur _Zangibar_ regio;
cujus partes, _Cafares_ populi, Monomotapae proximi, et regna _Mozambike,
Kiloa, Mombaza_ ac _Melinde_, ab urbibus singulis denominata; quarum
_Mozambike_ in insula condita, celeberrimum est Europaeis mercatoribus
emporium. Sequitur versus Septemtrionem juxta litus maris Rubri _Ajan_
regio, cujus partes duo regna _Del_ et _Adea Magaduzzo_.

_Insulæ ad Africam_.

Insularum ad Africam terram maxima est in Rubro mari Menuthias Cerne Plinio
dicta; nunc vulgo insula Divi Laurentii, et incolis _Madagascar_ id est,
Lunae insula, felici aromatum proventu dives, longitudine mill. German,
CCL, lat. LXXX occupans.

At in Atlantico Oceano contra Hesperium promontorium, quod nunc est _Cabo
Verde_, Hesperides sunt insulae duae; ultraque Gorgades, Gorgonum quondam
domus: nunc in universam _Islas de C. Verde_ Hispanis dicuntur, hoc est
insulae promontorii Viridis. Contra Mauritanium sunt Fortunatae, VII
numero, quarum una Canaria vocitata, à multitudine canum ingentis
magnitudinis, ut auctor est Plinius. Vnde universae Fortunatae, nunc
Canariae dicuntur, Hispaniarum Regi subjectae. Vltra versus Septemtrionem
est Cerne, nunc _Madera_ dicta.

Atque haec est totius Africae brevis descriptio.]

Thegiptians also for thieues, had this lawe alone, and no people els. The
lawe commaunded that as many as would steale, should entre their names with
the chief Prieste: and what so euer was stollen, incontinente to cary the
same vnto hym. Likewise, he that was robbed was bounde to entre with the
saied Chiefe Priest, the daie, time and houre, when he was robbed. By this
meanes the thefte being easely founde out, he that was robbed, loste the
fourths parte and receiued the residue, the whiche fourthe was giuen to the
thiefe. For the Lawe maker (seeing it was impossible vtterly to be withoute
thieues) thought it moche bettre by this meanes that men bare the losse of
a piece then to be spoiled of the whole.

The ordre of Mariage emong the Egiptians is not vniforme, for the priest
might marry but one onely wife. All other haue as many as they wille,
acordyng to their substaunce. Ther is no child emong them, though it be
borne of a bought woman slaue, that is compted illegitimate. For they onely
compte the father to be the authour of his kynde, and the mother onely but
to geue place and nourishement to the childe. When their children be borne
they bring them vp with so lytle coste, as a man would skantly belieue.
They fiede them with the rootes of mererushes, and other rootes, rosted in
the embries, and with marshe Caubois, and colewortes which partly they
seathe, and partly they roste, and parte giue them rawe. They go for the
moste parte withoute hosen or shoes, all naked, the contry is so temperate.
All the coste that the Parentes bestowe on their children til they be of
age to shift for themselues, surmounteth not the somme of a noble.
[Footnote: Equal to six shillings and eight pence.]

The priestes bring vp the children, both in the doctrine of their holye
scriptures, and also in the other kindes of learning necessary for the
commune life, and chiefly in Geometry and Arithmetique. As for the roughe
exercises of wrasteling, ronning, daunsing, playeng at weapons, throwyng
the barre or suche like, they train not their youth in, supposyng that the
daily exercise of suche, shoulde be to roughe, and daungerous for them, and
that they should be an empeiryng of strength. Musique they doe not onely
compte vnprofitable, but also hurteful: as making mens courages altogether
womanlyke. When they are sicke, they heale themselues, eyther with fasting
or vomiting: and that either euery eche other daye, or euery third daye, or
fourthe. For they are of opinion that all diseases growe of superfluite of
meate, and that kinde of cure therfore to be beste, that riddeth the
grounde of the griefe. Men goyng to the warres, or traueillyng the
countrie, are healed of free cost. For the Phisicens and Chirurgiens, haue
a stipende allowed them of ordenary at the charge of the communes.

In curing, they are bounde to folowe the preceptes of the auncient and
allowed writers, regestred in their holy scripture. Yf a man folowing the
prescripte of the scriptures can not so heale the sicke, he is not blamed
for that: But yf he fortune to heale him by any other meanes then is in the
scripture appoincted, he dieth for it. For the lawe giuer thoughte that it
was harde to finde a bettre waye of curyng, then that the which of suche
antiquitie was by longe practise founde oute and allowed, and deliuered
vnto them by suche a continuaunce. The Egiptians do worship aboue measure
certeine beastes, not onely whilest they be onliue, [Footnote: I have never
met with this form of the word.] but also when they are dead. As the Catte,
the Icneumon the dogge, the hauke, the woulfe, the Cocodrille, and many
other like. They are not onely not ashamed to professe the worship of these
openly, but setting them selues out in the honouring of them to the
vttermoste: they compte it asmuch praise and glory to them selues, as yf
they bestowed the like on the Goddes. And they go about on procession with
the propre Images of them, from citie, to citie, and from place, to place;
holding them vp and shewing them a farre of vnto other, which fall on their
knees, and euery one worship them. When any one of them dieth, they couer
it with Sarcenet, and houling, and crieng, and beating of their breastes
they all to bestrawe the carckesse with salte. And after they haue embalmed
it with the licour of the Cedre and other fragraunt oyntmentes, and oyles,
to preserue it the longer: thei bewrye it in holy sepulture. If a man haue
slayne any of these beastes willingly: he is codempned to death. But yf he
haue slaine an catte or a snyte, [Footnote: A snipe, from the Saxon snyta.
"Greene-plover, snyte, / Partridge, larke, cocke, and phessant." _Heyw.
Engl. Trav_., Act i., Scene ii.] willingly or vnwillingly: the people
ronneth vpon him vppon heapes, and withoute all ordre of Iustice or lawe,
in moste miserable wise torment him to death. Vpon feare of the which
daungier who soeuer espieth one of those lyeng dead: standing a farre, he
howleth and crieth professing that he is not giltie of the death. These
beastes with great attendaunce and chardge are kept vp aboute the cloistres
of the Temple, by men of no meane reputation: whiche fiede them with floure
and otemeale, and diuers deinties, sopped and stieped in milke. And they
set euery daie before them goose, bothe sodden and rosted. And before those
that delight al in raw meate they sette birdes and rawe foules. Finally as
I said they kiepe them all with great diligence and coste. They lament
their death asmoche as the death of their owne children, and bury them more
sumptuously then their substance doth stretch. In so moche that Ptolomeus
Lagus reigning in Egipt, when there chaunced a cowe to die in Memphis for
very age: he that had taken charge of the kepyng of her, bestowed vpon the
buriall of her (beside a greate some of mony that was giuen him for the
keping) fiftie talentes of siluer, that he borowed of Ptolome. Peraduenture
these thynges will seme vnto some men to wondreful: but he wil wondre
asmoche yf he considre what communely is done emonge euery of the Egiptians
in the funeralle of their deade.

When any man is departed his lyfe, all his niere friendes and kindesfolke,
throwing dirte vpon their heades, go wieping and wailing rounde about the
citie vntle the Corps be buried. And in the meane season they neyther
bathe, ne drincke wine, or eate any meate, but that that is most base and
vile, ne weare any apparell that is gorgeous or faire. They haue thre
sortes of Sepulchres, Sumptuous, meane, and basse. In the firste sorte they
bestowe a talente of siluer. Aboute the seconde, twenty Markes, and aboute
the thirde litle or nothing. There be certaine Pheretrers, [Footnote:
Query, _ferretrers_, carriers.] whose facultie it is to sette forthe
burialles, whiche learne it of their fathers and teache it their children.
These when a funeral happeneth, make vnto him that is doer for the deade,
an estimate of the exequies in writing, whiche the doer may at his pleasure
enlarge or make lesse. When thei are ones fallen at appoyncte, the bodye is
deliuered to the Pheretrer to bee enterred accordyng to the rate that they
agreed vpon. Then the bodie beyng laied foorthe, commeth the Phereters
chiefe cutter, and he appoincteth his vndrecutter a place on the side
haulfe of the paunche, wher to make incision, and how large. Then he with a
sharpe stone (whiche of the country fro whence it commeth, they call
Ethiopicus) openeth the left side as farre as the lawe permitteth. And
streight with all spiede ronneth his way from the company standing by,
which curse him and reuile him and throwe many stones aftre him. For they
thincke there yet remaineth a certeine hatred due vnto him that woundeth
the body of their frinde. Those that are the seasoners and embalmers of the
body (whome they calle poulderers) they haue in greate honour and
estimacion, for that they haue familiarite with the priestes, and entre the
temples together with them. The bodye nowe commen to their handes, one
emong all (the reste standing by) vnlaceth the entrailes, and draweth them
out at the foresaid incision, all sauing the kidneis, and the harte. These
entrailes are taken by another at his hande, and wasshed in wine of the
country Phenicea, wherin are enfused many soote [Footnote: Sweet. "They
dauncen deftly, and singen soote, / In their merriment." _Spenser's
Hobbinol's Dittie_, _Sheph. Kal._, Apr. iii.] odours and drugges. Then
enoincte they the whole bodye ouer, firste with Cedre and then with other
oynctementes, xxx. daies and aboue. Then do thei ceare it ouer with Mirrhe
and Cinamome and suche other thinges as wil not onely preserue it to
continuaunce, but also make it soote smelling. The Corps thus being
trimmed, is deliuered to the kindesfolke of the deade, euery parte of it
kepte so whole (not an heare of his browes or eye liddes being hurte) that
it raither lieth like one being in sliepe then like a dead corpse. Before
the body be enterred, the kindesfolke of the deade signifie to the iudges,
and the friendes of this passed, the day of the burial. Whiche (according
to the maner then vsed) thei terme the deades passaige ouer the mere. The
maner wherof is this.

The iudges, aboue xl. in nomber, sittinge on the farther side of the mere,
on a compassed benche wheling haulfe rounds and the people standing about
them: The bodie is put into a litle boate made for the nones, and drawen
ouer to the iudges by a chorde. The body then standing before the iudges in
the sight of the people, before it be cofred, if ther be any manne that
haue aught to saye against the dead, he is permitted by the lawe. Yf any be
proued to haue liued euyll, the iudges geue sentence that the bodye shall
not be buried. And who so is founde vniustelye to haue accused, suffreth
greate punyshemente therfore. When no manne wyll accuse, or he that accused
is knowen to haue slaunderously done it, the kinsfolke endyng their
mournyng: tourne them selues now to the prayse of the dead, nothing aftre
the maner of the Grecians, for that the Egiptians thinke themselues all to
be gentlemen alike. But beginnyng at his childehode, in the whiche thei
reherse his bringing vp, nourtering and scholyng, thei passe to his mannes
age, their commending his godlines, his iustice, his temperaunce, and the
residewe of his vertues. And calling vpon the vndre earthe, goddes, they
beseche them to place him emonge the godlye and good. To the which wordes
all the whole multitude crieth Amen: showtyng oute, and magnifieng the
glorye of the deade, as thoughe they shoulde be with the vnder earth
goddes, among the blessed for euer. This done euery man burieth his dead,
some in Sepulchres made for the purpose, and other that haue no suche
preparacion, in their strongest wall at home in their house, setting vp the
cofre ther tabernacle wyse. But they that for some offence, or debte of
enterest, or suche like, are denied their bewriall, are sette vp at home
without any cofre, vntle their successours growyng to abilite canne
dischardge their debtes and offences, and honourably bewrie them.

There is a maner emong them, sometyme to borowe money vpon their parentes
corpses, deliueryng the bodies to the creditours in pledge. And who so
redemeth theim not, ronneth into vtter infamie, and is at his death, denied
his bewriall. A manne (not altogether causeles) mighte merueile, that thei
could not be contente to constitute lawes for the framyng of the maners of
those that are onliue, but also put ordre for the exequies, and Hearses of
the deade. But the cause why thei bent them selues so much hervnto, was for
that thei thought ther was no better waie possible, to driue men to
honestie of life. The Grekes, which haue set furthe so many thynges in
fained tales, and fables of Poetes (farre aboue credite) concernyng the
rewarde of the good, and punishment of the euill: could not with all their
deuices, drawe men to vertue, and withdrawe them from vices. But rather
contrariwise, haue with them that be leudely disposed: broughte all
together in contempte and derision. But emong the Egiptians, the
punishemente due vnto the wicked and lewed, and the praise of the godlie
and good, not heard by tales of a tubbe, [Footnote: Swift took the title of
his well-known book from this old expression. It appears in Bale's "Comedye
Concerning Three Laws," compiled in 1538: "Ye say they follow your law, /
And vary not a shaw, / Which is a tale of a tub."] but sene daiely at the
eye: putteth both partes in remembraunce what behoueth in this life, and
what fame and opinion thei shall leaue of them selues, to their posteritie.
And hervppon it riseth, that euery man gladly emong them, ensueth good
ordre of life. And to make an ende of Thegiptians, me siemeth those Lawes
are of very righte to be compted the beste, whiche regarde not so muche to
make the people riche, as to aduance them to honestie and wisedome, where
riches of necessitie must folowe.


¶ The vj. Chapitre.

¶ Of the Poeni, and thother peoples of Aphrique.

Of the Penois there are many and sondrie nacions. Adrimachidæ lieng toward
Egipte, are like of maners to Thegiptians, but their apparell is like to
the other Penois. Their wiues haue vpon eche legge, a houpe of Latton
[Transcriber's note: "Lat houpe ofton" in original]. Thei delight in long
heare, and looke what lyce it fortuneth any of them to take aboute them:
thei bite theim, and throwe them awaie, the whiche propretie, thei onely of
all the Poeni haue. As also to present their maidens that are vpon mariage,
to the kyng, whiche choosyng emong them the maiden that liketh hym beste,
sieketh in her lappe, that aftre can neuer bee founde.  The Nasamones (a
greate and a terrible nacion, spoilers of suche Shippes as fortune to be
throwen vpon the Sandes in the streightes) towarde Sommer, leauyng their
cattle vpon the Sea coaste, goe doune into the plaine countrie to gather
Dates, whiche are there very faire, and in greate plentie. Thei gather the
boughes with the fruicte, not yet perfectely ripe, and laie them a Sonnyng
to ripe. Afterward thei stiepe theim in Milke, and make soupinges and
potages of theim. It is the maner emong theim, for euery man to haue many
wiues: and the felowship of their wiues, that other vse in secrete: thei
vse in open sights, in maner aftre the facion that the Massagetes vse. It
is also the maner of the Nasamones, when any man marieth his first wife, to
sende her about to euery one of the ghestes, to offer hym her body. And
asmany as receiue her into armes, and shewe her the curtesie she comes for,
must giue her some gifte, whiche she hath borne with her, home to her
house. Their maner of takyng an othe, and foreshewyng of thinges to come,
is thus.

Thei sweare by the menne that ware (by reporte) the best and moste iuste
men emong them, layeng their handes on their Graues, or Tumbes. But for the
fore knowledge of thynges, thei come to the Graues of their kyndreade, and
there when thei haue praied their stinte, laye them doune vpon them to
slepe: and loke what thei dreame, that, doe thei folowe. Where in
confirmyng of our promise, we vse to strike handes (as we calle it) thei
vse to drincke one to another: or elles if thei lacke liquour, to take
duste fro the earth, and one to licke part of that to another. The
Garamantes shonne the felowship and the sighte of all other peoples, and
neither vse any kinde of weapon, or armour, ne yet dare defende them selues
against other that vsed them. They dwell somwhat aboue the Nasamones, more
vp londe. Aboute the sea coaste towarde the weste, ther bordereth vpon them
the Maces: whiche shaue their heades in the crowne, and clyppe them rounde
by the sides. The Gnidanes (nexte neighbours to the Maces) when they giue
battaylle to the ostruthes, their brieding vnder the grounde, are armed
with rawe felles of beastes. Their women ware prety wealtes of leather,
euery one a greate manye whiche (as it is sayde) they begge of suche menne
as haue lien with them. So that the moe she hath, the more she is estemed,
as a deinty derling beloued of many. The Machlies dwelling aboute the
mershe of Tritonides, vse to shaue their fore parte of their heade, and the
Anses their hindre parte. The maydens of the Anses, at the yerely feastes
of Minerua, in the honoure of the goddesse their country woman: deuiding
them selues into two companies, vse to giue battaile, one parte to another
with staues, and with stones: sayeng that thei obserue the maner of their
country in the honour of her that we calle Minerua. And the maiden that
departeth the battayle without wounde, thei holde her for no maide. But
before ther battayle be fought, they determine that what mayden so euer
beareth her selfe mooste valeaunte in the fielde, all the other maydens
with commune consente shall garnishe her, and arme her, both with the
armour of Grecia, and the helmet of Corinthe. And shal sette her in a
chariot, and carye her rounde about the mershe. The same menne vsen their
women as indifferently commune, as kyen to the bulle. The children remaine
with the women vntil they be of some strengthe. Ones in a quartre the men
do assemble wholy together, and then looke with whome the childe fantasieth
mooste to abide, him do they compte for his father.

There is a people named Atlantes, of the mounte Athlas, by the whiche they
dwell. These giue no names one to another as other peoples do, but echeman
is namelesse. When the sonne passeth ouer their heades, they curse him, and
reuyle him with all woordes of mischiefe: for that he is so broiling hote,
that he destroieth bothe them and ther countrye.

They eate of no kinde of beaste, neither dreame in their sliepe. The Aphres
(whice are all brieders of catteile) liue with flesshe and milke, and yet
absteine they fro cowes milke, and all cowe fleshe, according to the maner
of the Egiptians, and therefore kepe they none vp. The women of Cyrene
thincke it not lawfull to strike a cowe, for Isis sake that is honoured in
Egipt, to whome also they appoincte fasting, and feastefull daies, and
obserue them solempnly. But the women of Barcea absteine bothe from cowe
fleshe and sowe flesh. When their children are iiii. yeare olde they vse to
cauterise them on the coron [Footnote: Query, frontal.] vaine (and some on
the temple also) with a medecine for that purpose, made of woolle as it is
plucked fro the shiepe: because thie should not at any time be troubled
with rheumes or poses, [Footnote: A local name for a cold in the head. (See
N. Bailey's Dict., vol. i.)] and by that meanes they say they liue in very
good health. Thei sacrifie after this maner. When in the name of their
firste frutes they haue cutte of the eare of the beaste, they throwe it
ouer the house. That done, they wring the necke on the one side. Of all the
goddes they offre sacrifice to no more but Sonne and Mone. All the Aphres
burye their deade as the Grecians doe, sauing the Nasamones, which bury
them as thoughe they ware sitting: wayting well when any man lieth in
drawing on, to set him on his taile, leaste he should giue vp the ghoste
lieng vpright. Their houses are made of wickers, and withes, wrought aboute
trees, moch like vnto those that we calle frankencence trees, and in suche
sorte that they may tourne them rounde euery waye. The Maries, shaue the
lefte side of their heade, and lette the heare growe on the right. They die
their bodie in redde, and vaunte that they come of the Troianes. The women
of the Zabiques (which are the next neighbours to the Maries) driue the
cartes in the warres, in the which the men fight. Ther are a people called
Zigantes, wher beside the great plentye of hony that they gather fro the
Bies, they haue also certeine men that are makers of honye. They all die
them selues with red, and eate apes fleshe, wherof thei that dwel in the
mounteines haue great plentye. These al being of the part called Libye,
liue for the moste parte a wilde lyfe abrode in the fieldes like beastes,
making no household prouision of meate, ne wearing any maner of appareil
but gotes felles. The gentlemen, and men of honour emong them, haue neither
cities nor townes, but Turrettes builte vpon the waters side, in the which
they laye vp the ouerplus of that that they occupy. They sweare their
people euery yere to obeye their Prince, and that they that obey in diede,
shoulde loue together as felowes and companions: but that the disobediente
shoulde be pursued like felons and traitours. Their armour and weapon, are
bothe acording to the nature of the country and contrimen: for wher thei of
themselues are very quicke, and deliure [Footnote: Nimble. "All of them
being tall, quicke, and deliver persons." _Hollinshed_, vol. ii., ccc. 5.]
of bodye, and the country champaigne, and playne, they neither vse swearde,
dagger, ne harneis, but onely cary thre Iauelines in their hande, and a
nombre of piked and chosen stones, in a case of stiffe leather hanging
aboute them. With these they vse bothe to fight and to skirmishe. In his
coming towarde the ennemy, he throweth his stone, fetching his ronne, and
maketh lightlye a narowe mysse, thoughe it be a good waye of: suche
continuall practise they haue of it. They kiepe neither lawe ne faithe.

The Troglodites (whiche are also named of the Grecians pastours, for their
fieding and brieding of catteille) a people of Ethiope, do lyue in
companies, and haue their heade ouer them, whome they call Tiraunte. But
not meaninge in him so much tirany in diede, as some time some of our
gouernours vnder a fayrer name do execute. None of them hathe any seuerall
wife, and therfore no seueral children, but bothe those in commune, the
tiraunte excepted: Who hathe but one wyfe onely. To the which yf any manne
do but approach or drawe nighe: he is condempned in a certeine nombre of
cattaile to be paied to the Tiraunte. From the beginning of Iuly vntle
about middle August (at the which time thei haue great plenty of raine)
thei nourishe them selues with milke, and bloude, sodden a litle together.
The pasture vplond being, dried away with the heate of the Sonne: They
sieke downe to the marshe, and lowe groundes, for the whiche onely they be
often at debate. When their catteil waxeth olde or sicke, they kyll them,
and eate them, and altogether liue vpon such. They do not giue the childe
the name of the father, but name him aftre a bull, a rambe or an eawe. And
those call thei father (the beastes I meane of the masle kinde) and thother
of the femel kynde, they call mother, because their daily fode is giuen by
them. The people called Idiote, vse for their drincke the iuyce of a whinne
named Paliurus. But the men of worshyp and gentlemen vse the iuce of a
certeine floure they haue emonge them, whiche maketh drincke moche like the
worste of the Renishe muste. And because thei cary great droues of catteile
with them, they chaunge their soile often. Their bodies are all naked,
sauing their priuities, whiche they hide with felles of beastes. All the
Troglodites are circumcised aftre the maner of the Egiptians, sauing only
the Claudians: whiche they so terme of claudicacion or limping. They onely,
dwellinge from their childe hode within the country of the Hesternes, are
not touched with rasour or knife. The Troglodites that are called
Magaueres, carye for theyr armour and weapon, a rounde buckler of a rawe
oxe hide, and a clubbe shodde with yron. Other haue bowes, and Iauelines.
As for graues or places of buriall, they passe not. For they binde the
heade, and the fiete of the dead together with witthes of Paliurus, and
then setting it vp vpon some hilly place, haue a good sporte to all to
bethwacke it with stones, vntle they lie heaped ouer the corps. Then laye
they a goates horne on the toppe and departe, biddinge sorrowe go plaie
him. They warre one with another, not as the Griekes vpon rancour and
Ambicion, but onely for foode sake. In their skirmishes, firste they go to
it with stones, as afore ye haue hearde, vntle it fortune some nombre to be
hurte. Then occupieng the bowe (wherin they are very sure handed) thei
kille one another vpon hepes. Those battayles are attoned by the women of
mooste auncient age. For when they be ones comen into the middle emong them
(as they maye do withoute harme, for that is compted abhominacion in any
wise to hurte one of them) the battaille sodenly ceaseth. They that are
nowe so fiebled with age, that they can no longer followe the heard:
winding the tayle of an oxe aboute their throte choke vp and die. But he
that differreth to rydde him selfe in this sorte: It is laweful for another
(aftre a warninge) to doe it. And it is there compted a friendly
benefaicte. Men also diseased of feures, oranye other incurable malady,
they doe in lyke maner dispatche: iudginge it of all griefes the woorste,
for that manne to liue, that canne nowe nothinge doe, why he shoulde desyre
to lyue. Herodote writeth, that the Troglodites myne them selues caues in
the grounde, wherin to dwell. Men not troubled with anye desire of riches,
but raither giuing them selues to wilfull pouertie. They glory in nothing
but in one litle stone, wherin appere thre skore sondry colours: which we
therfore calle Exaconthalitus. They eate sondry kindes of venemous vermyne.
And speake any distincte worde they cannot, but sieme rather to busse or
thurre betwene thetiethe, then to speake.

There is another people dwelling in that Ethiope that lyeth aboue Egipte,
called Ryzophagi, whiche bestowe muche time in digging vp of the rootes of
Riedes growing niere aboute them, and in wasshing and clensing of the same,
whiche afterward they bruse betwixt stones till thei become clammie, and so
makes wiete cakes of them, muche facioned like a brick a hande broade.
Those bake thei by the Sonne, and so eate them. And this kinde of meate
onely, serueth them all they life tyme plentifully and enough, and neuer
waxeth fulsome vnto theim. Thei neuer haue warre one with another, but with
Lions, whiche comyng out of the deserte there, partly for shadowe, and
partly for to praie vpon smaller beastes, doe oftymes wourie diuers of the
Æthiopes, comyng out of the Fennes. In so muche that that nation had long
sences bene vttrely destroyed by the Lions, excepte nature of purpose, had
shewed them her aide. For toward the dogge daies, there come into that
coaste, infinite swarmes of Gnattes, without any drifte of winde to enforce
them. The men then flieng to the fennes, are not harmed by them. But thei
driue the Lions with their stingyng and terrible buszyng, cleane out of
that quartre. Next vpon these, bordre the Ilophagi and Spermatophagi, the
one liuynge by suche fruicte as falleth from the trees, in Sommer, and the
residew of the yere by suche herbes as thei picke vp in the shadowed
groundes. The other, the Ilophagi, siekynge to the plaines with their wiues
and their children, climbe trees, and gather, eate, and cary home: the
tendre croppes and buddes of the boughes. And thei haue by continualle
practise, suche a nimblenes in climbyng, that (a wondrefull thynge to be
spoken) thei wille leape from boughe to boughe, and tree to tree like
Cattes or Squirelles, and by reason of their slendrenes and lightenes,
wille mounte vp on braunches and twigges, without daunger or hurte. For
thoughe their fiete slippe, yet hange thei feste by the handes: and if thei
bothe faile theim, yet falle thei so light, that thei be harmelesse.

These folkes go naked, and hold their wiues and children in commune. Emong
them selues they fighte for their places without weapon: but against
foreiners with staues. And wheare thei ouercome, there chalenge thei
Lordeshippe. Thei communely dye for hongre, when their sight faileth them:
whiche was their onely instrumente to finde their foode. The residewe of
the countrie there aboute, do those Æthiopians holde, which are named
Cynecy, not very many in nombre, but muche differing in life from the rest.
For their Countrie beyng wooddie, and wilde, fulle of thicquettes, and
skante of watre, thei are forced by night, for feare of wilde beastes, to
slepe in trees: and toward the mornyng, all weaponed together, to drawe
doune to the waters, wher thei shroude them selues into couert, and so
abide close till the heate of the daie. At the whiche tyme the Bugles,
Pardales, and other greate beastes, what for the heate, and what for
thriste, flocke toguether to the watres. Assone as thei haue druncken, and
haue well laden their beallies with watre, the Ethiopes startynge out vpon
them with stakes, sharpened and hardened in the fire, and with stones, and
with arrowes, and suche like weapon, at this aduauntage, slea them vpon
heapes, and deuide the carkesses by compaignies to be eaten. And sometyme
it happeneth that thei theim selues are slaine by some beast of force,
howbeit very seldome. For thei euer by their pollicies and traines, doe
more damage to the beastes, then the beastes can doe vnto them. If at any
time thei lacke the bodies of the beastes, then take thei the rawe hides of
suche as thei lateliest before had slaine, and clensyng them cleane fro the
heare, thei sokynglie laie them to a softe fire; and when thei be throughly
hette, deuide them emong the compaignie, whiche very griedely fille
themselues of them.

They exercise their children whilest thei be boies, to throw the darte at a
sette marke, and he that hitteth not the marke receiueth no meate. By the
whiche maner of trainyng, hongre so worketh in the boies that thei become
excellente darters.

The Acridophagie (a people borderyng vpon the deaserte) are somewhat lower
of stature then the residewe, leane, and exceding blacke. In the Spring
time, the Weste, and Southwest winde, bringeth vnto them out of the
Deaserte, an houge nombre of Locustes, whiche are of verie greate bodie,
and of wynge very filthily coloured. The Ethiopians well accustomed with
their maner of flighte and trade, gather together into a long slade
betwixte two hilles, a great deale of rubbeshe and mullocke, from places
nighe hande, apte for fingry, and the grasse and all wiedes there aboute.
And laieng it ready in heapes aforehande, a long the slade, when thei see
the Locustes come with the winde like cloudes in the aire, thei set al on
fire, and so swelte theim in the passing ouer, that thei bee skante full
out of the slade, but thei fall to the grounde in suche plentie, that thei
be to all the Acridophagi, a sufficient victuallyng. For thei poudre them
with salte (wherof the countrie hath plentie) and so continually from yere
to yere, liue by none other foode. For thei neither haue any kinde of
catteille, ne fisshe can haue, beyng so farre fro the sea. And this maner
of meate siemeth to theim, verie pleasaunte and fine.

Of bodie thei are very lighte, swifte of foote, and shorte liued as not
passyng xl. yeres, he that liueth longest. Their ende is not more
incredible, then it is miserable. For when their drawe into age, their
briedeth a kinde of winghed lice in their bodies, of diuers colours, and
very horrible, and filthie to beholde: whiche firste eate out their
bealies, and then their brest, and so the whole body in a litle space. He
that hath this disease, first as thoughe he had on hym some tickelyng
ytche, all to beskratcheth his bodie with suche pleasure, as is also
mingled with some smart, And within a litle while aftre, when the lyce
beginne to craule, and the bodie beginneth to mattre, enraged with the
bittrenes and grief of the disease, he teareth and mangleth his whole bodie
with his nailes, putting furth in the mean while many a greuous grone. Then
gussheth there out of hym, suche aboundaunce of lice, that a manne would
thinke they had bene barelled in his body: and that the barel now broken,
the swarme plomped out. And by this meanes, whether throughe the enfectious
aire, or the corrupcion of their fieding, thei make a miserable ende.

Vpon the Southe border of Affrike, dwell there menne called of the Grekes
Cynnamie, and of their neighbours Sauluages: Bearded, and that with
aboundaunce of heare. Thei kiepe for the saufegarde of their liues, greate
compaignies of wilde Mastiues: for that from midde Iune, till midde Winter,
there entreth into their countrie, an innumerable sorte of Kine of Inde.
Whether thei flie thether to saue them selues from other beastes, or come
to sieke pasture, or by some instincte of nature vnknowen to manne, it is
vncertaine. Against these, when the menne of their owne force, are not able
to resist: thei defende themselues by the helpe of their dogges, and take
many of them. Whereof thei eate parte whilest thei are freshe, and parte
reserue thei in pouldre, for their aftre niede. Thei eate also many other
kindes of beastes, whiche thei hunt with their dogges.

The laste of all the Affriens Southewarde, are the Ichthiophagi. A people
borderyng vpon the Troglodities, in the Goulfe called Sinus Arabicus:
whiche vnder the shape of man, liue the life of beastes. Thei goe naked all
their life time, and make compte of their wiues and their children in
commune. Thei knowe none other kindes of pleasure or displeasure, but like
vnto beastes, suche as thei fiele: neither haue thei any respecte to
vertue, or vice, or any discernyng betwixte goode or badde. Thei haue litle
Cabanes not farre from the Sea, vpon the clieues sides: where nature hath
made greate carfes, diepe into the grounde, and hollowe Guttres, and
Criekes into the maigne lande, bowting and compayng in and out, to and fro,
many sondrie waies. Whose entringes thenhabitauntes vse to stoppe vp with
great heapes of calion and stones, whereby the criekes serue them now in
the steade of nettes. For when the sea floweth (which happeneth there twise
in the daye, aboute the houres of thre, and of nyne) the water swelleth so
highe, that it ouerfloweth into the maigne shore, and filleth those
crieques with the sea. And the fisshe folowing the tide, and dispersinge
them selues abrode in the maigne londe to seeke their foode: at the ebbe
when the water withdraweth, retiring together with it alway to the dieper
places, and at laste remaining in these gutters and crieques, they are
stopped in with the stone heapes, and at the lowe water lye drie. Then come
the enhabitauntes with wyfe and children, take them, and laye them oute
vpon the rocques against the midday sonne, wher, with the broiling heate of
the same, they be within a while skorched and parched. Then do they remoue
them, and with a litle beating separate the fysshe fro the bones. Then put
they the fisshe into the hollowes of the rocques, and beat it to pomois,
minglinge therewith the side of the whynne Paliurus. And so facion it into
lumpes muche like a bricke, but somewhat longer. And when they haue taken
them againe a litle by the sonne, they sitte them downe together, and eate
by the bealy.

Of this haue thei alway in store, accordinge to the plenty that Neptune
gyueth them. But when by the reason of tempest the sea ouerfloweth these
places aboue his naturall course, and tarieth longer then his wonte, so
that they can not haue this benefight of fisshing, and their store is all
spent: they gather a kynde of great shelle fysshe, whose shelles they grate
open with stones, and eate the fisshe rawe, in taste muche like to an
oyster. If it fortune this ouerflowing by the reason of the winde, to
continue longe, and their shellefysshe to fayle them: then haue they
recours to the fysshebones (which they do of purpose reserue together in
heapes) and when thei haue gnabeled of the softest and gristely partes with
their tiethe, of those that are newest and beste, they beate the harder
with stones into pieces, and eate them. Thei eate as I haue said in the
wilde field together abrode, reioicing with a semblaunte of merinesse, and
a maner of singyng full vntuned. That done they falle vppon their women,
euen as they come to hande withoute any choyse: vtterly voide of care, by
reason they are alwaye sure of meate in good plentye.

Thus foure daies euer continual, busied with this bealy bownsing chiere,
the v. daie thei flocke together to go drincke, al on a droue, not vnlike
to a heard of kiene to the waters, shouting as they go with an Yrishe
whobub. And when they haue dronke till their bealies stonde a strutte, so
that they are skant able to retourne: euerye bodie layes him downe
dronckardelike to reste his water bolne bealy, and that daye eateth
nothing. The next daye agayne they fall to their fyshing: And so passe they
their lyfe continually.

Thei seldome falle into any diseases, for that they are alway of so
vniforme diete. Neuerthelesse they are shorter lyued then we are. Theyr
nature not corrupted by any perswasion taken of other, compteth the
satisfieng of hongre, the greatest pleasure in the world. As for other
extraordenary pleasures, they seke them not. This is the maner of liuing
propre vnto them that lye within the bosome of the sayde Arabique sea. But
the maner of them that dwell without the bosome, is moche more merueilous.
For thei neuer drinke ne neuer are moued with any passion of the mynde.
These beynge as it ware by fortune throwen oute into the desertes, farre
from the partes miete to be enhabited, giue them selues altogether to
fyshing, which they eate haulfe rawe. Not for to auoyde thirste (for they
desire no moyste thynges) but rather of a nature sauluage and wilde,
contented with such victualle as commeth to hande. They compte it a
principall blessednes to be withoute those thinges what so euer they be,
that bringe sorowe or griefe to their hauers. Thei are reported to be of
such patience, that though a manne strike them with a naked sweard, thei
will not shonne him, or flye from him. Beate them, or do theim wronge, and
they onely wil looke vppon you, neither shewinge token of wrathe, nor
countenaunce of pitie. Thei haue no maner of speache emong them: But onely
shewe by signes of the hande, and nodding with the heade, what they lacke,
and what they would haue. These people with a whole consent, are
mayntayners of peace towarde all men, straunger and other. The whiche maner
althoughe it be wondrefull, they haue kept time oute of mynde. Whether
throughe longe continuance of custome, or driuen by necessitie, or elles of
nature: I cannot saye. They dwell not as the other Icthiophagi doe, all in
one maner of cabanes, but sondry in diuers. Some haue their dennes, and
their cabanes in them opening to the North: to the ende they might by that
meanes be the bettre shadowed fro the sonne, and haue the colder ayre. For
those that are open toward the Southe, by the reason of the greate heate of
the sonne, caste forthe such a breathe, fornais like, that a manne can not
come niere them. They that open towarde the Northe, builde them preaty
Cabanes of the ribbes of whales (whiche in those seas they plentuously
find) compassing them aboute by the sides, accordynge to their naturall
bendinge, and fasteninge them together at bothe endes with some maner of
tyenge. Those do they couer with the woose and the wiedes of the sea
tempered together. And in these they shroude them selues fro the sonne:
nature by necessitie diuising a way how to helpe and defende her selfe.

Thus haue ye hearde the lyfe of the Icthiophagi, and now remaineth there
for Aphrique onely the Amazones to be spoken of, which menne saye in the
olde tyme dwelte in Libye. A kinde of warlike women, of greate force, and
hardinesse, nothing lyke in lyfe vnto our women. The maner amonge them was
to appointe to their maidens a certein space of yeres to be trayned, and
exercysed in the feictes of warre. Those beynge expired, they ware ioyned
to menne for yssues sake. The women bare all the rule of the commune
wealthe. The women ware princes, lordes, and officiers, capiteines, and
chiefteines of the warres. The menne had noughte to doe, but the drudgery
at home, and as the women woulde appoincte them. The children assone as
thei ware borne, were deliuered to the men to nouryshe vp with milke, and
suche other thinges as their tendrenes required. If it ware a boye, they
eyther brake the right arme assone as it was borne, that it mighte neuer be
fytte for the warres, or slue it, or sente it oute of the country. If a
wenche, they streighte ceared the pappes, that thei might not growe to
hindre them in the warres. Therefore the Grecians called theim Amazones, as
ye woulde saie, pappelesse. The opinion is, that thei dwelt in the Ilonde
named Hespera, which lieth in the marsshe, named (of a riuer that runneth
into it) Tritonis, ioyning vpon Ethiope, and the mounte Atlas, the greatest
of all that lande. This Ilonde is very large and greate, hauyng plentie of
diuers sortes of fruictes, whereby the enhabitauntes liue. Thei haue many
flockes of shiepe, and goates, and other small catteile, whose milke and
flesshe they eate. They haue no maner of graine, ne knowe what to doe
therwith.


OF ASIE.

THE SECONDE PARTE.

¶ The first Chapitre.

¶ Of Asie and the peoples moste famous therin.

Asie, the seconde part of the thre wherin to we haue said that the whole
erth is diuided: tooke name as some hold opinion, of the doughter of
Oceanus, and Tethis, named Asia, the wife of Iaphetus, and the mother of
Prometheus. Or as other affirme, of Asius, the sonne of Maneye the Lidian.
And it stretcheth it self from the South, bowtyng [Footnote: Bending] by
the Easte into the Northe: hauyng on the West parte the two flouddes, Nilus
and Tanais, and the whole Sea Euxinum, and parte of the middle earth sea.
Vpon the other thre quarters, it is lysted in with the Occean, whiche where
he cometh by Easte Asie, is called Eous (as ye would saie toward the
dawnyng) by the South, Indicus (of the countrie named India) and aftre the
name of the stoure Scithiane, vpon the northe Scythicus. The greate
mounteine Taurus ronnyng East and West, and in a maner equally partyng the
lande in twaine: leaueth one parte on the Northe side, called by the Grekes
the outer Asie: and another on the South, named the inner Asie. This
mounteine in many places is founde thre hundred lxxv. miles broade: and of
length equalle with the whole countrie. About a fiue hundred thre skore and
thre miles. From the coast of the Rhodes, vnto the farthest part of Inde,
and Scythia Eastwarde. And it is deuided into many sondrie partes, in
sondrie wise named, whereof some are larger, some lesse. This Asie is of
suche a sise, as aucthorus holde opinion, that Affrike and Europe ioyned
together: are scante able to matche it in greatnes. It is of a temperate
heate and a fertile soile, and therefore full of all kindes of beaste,
foule, and worme, and it hath in it many countries and Seignouries.

On the other side of the redde Sea, ouer against Egipte in Affrike: lieth
the tripartite region, named Arabia, whose partes are, Petrea: boundyng
West and Northe vpon Siria: and right at fronte before hym Eastwarde,
Deserta: and Arabia Felix by Southe. Certein writers also adioyne to
Arabia: Pancheia, and Sabea. It is iudged to haue the name of Arabus, the
sonne of Apollo and Babilone.

The Arabiens beyng a greate people, and dwellyng very wide and brode: are
in their liuyng very diuers, and as sondrie in religion. Thei vse to go
with long heare vnrounded and forked cappes, somewhat mitre like, all aftre
one sorte, and their beardes partie shauen. Thei vse not as we doe, to
learne faculties and sciences one of another by apprenticehode, but looke
what trade the father occupied, the same doeth the sonne generally applie
himself to, and continue in. The mooste aunciente and eldest father that
can be founde in the whole Countrie, is made their Lorde and Kyng. Looke
what possessions any one kindrede hath, the same be commune to all those of
that bloude: Yea one wife serueth theim all. Wherefore he that cometh
firste into the house, laieth doune his falchion before the dore, as a
token that the place is occupied. The seniour of the stocke enioieth her
alnight Thus be thei all brethren and sistren one to another, throughout
the whole people. Thei absteine fro the embrasinges neither of sister ne
mother, but all degrees are in that poinct as indifferent to than, as to
beastes of the fieldes. Yet is adulterie death emong them. And this is
adulterie there: to abandon the bodie to one of another kindred. And who so
is by suche an ouerthwarte begotten: is iudged a bastard, and otherwise
not. Thei bancquet not lightly together, vndre the nombre of thirtie
persones. Alwaie foresene that, two of the same nombre at the leaste, be
Musicens. Waiters haue thei none, but one kinsman to minister to another,
and one to helpe another. Their tounes and cities are wallesse, for thei
liue quietly and in peace one with another. Thei haue no kinde of oyle, but
that whiche is made of Sesama, but for all other thynges, thei are most
blessed with plentie. They haue Shiepe greater than Kien, and verie white
of woulle. Horses haue thei none, ne none desire, for that their Chamelles
in al niedes serue them as well. Thei haue siluer and golde plentie, and
diuerse kindes of spices, whiche other countries haue not. Laton, Brasse,
Iron, Purple, Safron, the precious rote costus, and all coruen woorkes, are
brought into theim by other. Thei bewrie their kyng in a donghille, for
other thei wille skante take so muche laboure. There is no people that
better kiepeth their promise and couenaunt, then thei doe, and thus thei
behight it.

When thei wille make any solempne promise, couenaunte, or league, the two
parties commyng together, bryng with them a thirde, who standyng in the
middes betwixte theim bothe, draweth bloude of eche of them, in the palme
of the hande, along vndre the rote of the fingres, with a sharpe stone: and
then pluckyng from eche of their garmentes a little iaggue, [A small
piece.] he ennoyncteth with that bloude seuen other stones, lyeng ready
betwixte theim, for that purpose. And whilest he so doeth, he calleth vpon
the name of Dionisius and Vrania, whom thei accompte emong the nombre of
goddes, reuengers of faithelesse faithes. This done, he that was the
sequestrer of the couenaunte become thsuretie for the parties. And this
maner of contracte, he that standeth moste at libertie, thinketh miete to
be kepte.

Thei haue no firynge but broken endes and chippes of Myrrhe, whose smoke is
so vnwholsome, that excepte thei withstode the malice therof with the
perfume of Styrax, it would briede in them vncurable diseases. The Cinamome
whiche groweth emong theim, none gather but the priestes. And not thei
neither, before thei haue sacrificed vnto the goddes. And yet further thei
obserue, that the gatheryng neither beginne before the Sonne risyng, ne
continue aftre the goyng doune. He that is lorde and gouernour emong them,
when the whole gather is brought together, deuideth out vnto euery man his
heape with a Iauelines ende, whiche thei haue ordinarily consecrate for
that purpose. And emongest other, the Sonne also hath a heape deuided out
for hym, whiche (if the deuision be iuste) he kindeleth immediatly with his
owne beames, and brenneth into asshes. Some of the Arabiens that are
pinched with penurie, without all regard of body, life, or helth, doe eate
Snakes, and Addres, and suche like vermine, and therefore are called of the
Grekes Ophyophagi.

The Arabiens named Nomades, occupie much Chamelles, bothe in warre and
burden, and all maner cariage, farre and nighe. The floude that ronneth
alonge their bordes, hathe in it as it ware limall of golde in great
plentie. Whiche they neuertheles for lacke of knowledge do neuer fine into
masse.

Another people of Arabia named Deboe, are for the great parte shepemasters,
and brieders. Parte of them notwithstanding, occupie husbandrie, and
tilthe. These haue suche plentie of gold, that oftetimes emong the cloddes
in the fieldes thei finde litle peables of golde as bigge as akecornes,
whiche thei vse to set finely with stones, and weare for owches aboute
their necke and armes, with a very good grace. They sell their golde vnto
their borderers for the thirde parte of Laton, or for the halfe parte of
siluer. Partly for that they nothing estieme it, and specially for the
desire of the thinges that foreiners haue. Nexte vnto them lie the Sabeis,
whose riches chiefely consisteth in encence, Myrrhe and Cinamome, howbeit
some holde opinion also that Baulme groweth in some places of their
borders. Thei haue also many date trees very redolente of smelle, and the
roote called Calamus.

There is in that contry a kinde of serpentes lurking in the rootes of
trees, of haulfe a foote lengthe, whose bitinge is for the moste parte
death. The plenty of swiete odours, and sauours in those quarters, doeth
verely stuffe the smelling. And to avoyde that incommoditie, they
oftentimes vse the fume of astincking gomme, and gotes heare chopped
together. Ther is no man that hath to do to giue sentence vpon any case but
the king. The mooste parte of the Sabeis apply husbandrie. The residewe
gatheringe of spices and drugges. They sayle into Ethiope for trade of
marchaundise, in barkes couered with leather. The refuse of their cinamome
and Cassian they occupy for firing. Their chiefe citie is called Saba, and
stondeth vpon a hyll. Their kynges succed by discente of bloude, not any
one of the kindred certeine, but suche as the people haue in moste honour,
be he good or be he badde. The king neuer dare be sene oute of his Palace,
for that there goeth an olde prophecie emong them of a king that shoulde be
stoned to deathe of the people. And euery one feareth it shoulde lighte on
him selfe. They that are about the king of the Sabeis: haue plate bothe of
siluer and golde of all sortest curiously wrought and entallied. Tables,
fourmes, trestles of siluer, and all furniture of household sumptuous aboue
measure. They haue also Galeries buylte vppon great pillours, whose
coronettes are of golde and of siluer. Cielinges voultinges, dores and
gates couered with siluer and golde, and set with precious stones:
garnisshinges of yuorye, and other rare thinges whiche emong men are of
price. And in this bounteous magnificence haue thei continued many yeres.
For why the gredy compasse how to atteyne honoure with the vniuste rapine
of other mennes goodes, that hath tombled downe headeling so many commune
wealthes, neuer had place emong them. In richesse equal vnto them, are the
Garrei, whose implementes of household are all of golde and siluer, and of
those and yuorie together, are their portalles, their cielinges, and
rophes, made. The Nabatheens of all other Arabiens are the beste husbandes,
and thriftiest sparers. Their caste is wittye in winning of substaunce, but
greater in kepinge it. He that appaireth the substaunce that was lefte him,
is by a commune lawe punished: and contrariwise that encreaseth it, muche
praysed and honoured.

The Arabiens vse in their warres swerde, bowe, launce, slinge, and battle
ax. The rable of helhoundes (whom we calle Sarasines) that pestilent
murreine of mankinde, came of this people. And as it is to be thoughte, at
this daye the great parte of Arabia is degenerate into that name. But thei
that dwell towarde Egipte, kepe yet their olde name, and lyue by butin,
[Footnote: Booty, from the French "Butin."] like prickers of the bordre,
wherin, the swiftenes of their camelles doeth them good seruice.


¶ The seconde Chapitre.

¶ Of Panchaia, and the maners of the Panqueis.

Panchaia (a countrie of Arabia) is iudged of Diodore the Sicilian to be an
islonde of xxv. miles brode. It hath in it thre noble cities Dalida,
Hyracida, and Oceanida. The whole contrie (excepte a litle vaine of sandie
grauelle) is fertile and plenteous: chiefely of wine and encence. Whiche
groweth ther in suche aboundaunces that it sufficeth the whole worlde for
the francke fume offeringe. There groweth also good store of Myrrhe, and
diuers other redolente thinges, whiche the Panqueis gather, and selle to
the merchauntes of Arabia. At whose hande other buienge them againe,
transports them into Egipte, and Sirie. And fro thence they are spred
abrode to all other peoples. The Panqueis in their warres vse wagons aftre
the maner of menne in olde time.

Their commune wealth is deuided into thre sundry degrees. The firste place
haue the priestes, to whome are ioyned the artificers. The seconde the
houseband men. And the thirde the menne of warre: with whom the catteile
maisters or brieders be coupled. The priestes are the heades, and chiefe of
all the residewe, and haue aucthoritie aswell in sentence of lawe, as to
put ordre in al ciuile affaires: the sentence of deaths onely excepted.

The housebandemen, tille the grounde, and attende vpon the fruictes, and
bring all into the commune store. And thei that shalbe founde moste
diligente in that laboure and occupation: are chosen by the priestes (but
not aboue the nombre of ten at one time) to be iudges ouer the distribution
of the fruictes. Vpon consideracion that other by their aduancement might
be stirred to like diligence. The catteile maisters, yf ther be any thing
either apperteining to the sacrifices, or commune affaires, touching
nombre, or weight, do it with all diligence,

No man amonge the Panchais hath any thinge that he can call proprely his
owne: his house, and his gardein excepted. For bothe the customes, and
reuenewes, and all other profectes, are deliuered in to the priestes
handes. Who acordinge as they finde necessarie and expediente, iustely
distribute them. But they themselues are graunted double share. Their
garmentes by the reason of the finesse of the wolle of their shiepe,
especially aboue other, are verye softe and gentle clothe. Bothe menne and
women vse ther, to sette oute them selues with Iuelles of golde, as
cheines, braselettes, eareringes, tablettes, owches, ringes, Annuletes,
buttons, broches, and shoes embraudered, and spangled with golde, of diuers
colours. The menne of warre serue onely for the defence of their countrey.

The priestes aboue all other, giue them selues vnto pleasaunte life, fine,
nette and sumptuous. Their garmentes are rochettes of fine linnen, and
sometime of the deintiest wollen. Vpon their heades thei weare mitres
embraudred, and garnisshed with golde. They vse a kinde of voided shoes
(whiche aftrewarde the Grieques toke vp, and called sandalium) very finely
made, and of sondry colours. And as the women weare, so do they, all maner
of Iuelles sauing earinges. Their chiefe occupation is to attende vpon
goddes seruice, settinge forthe the worthie diedes of the goddes, with
himpnes, [Footnote: Hymns.] and many kindes of commendacion. Yf thei be
founde withoute the halowed grounde, it is lawfull for any manne to slea
them. They saye that they came of the bloude of Iupiter Manasses, at suche
time as he came firste into Panchaia, hauinge the whole worlde vndre his
dominion. This countrie is full of golde, siluer, latton, tinne, and yron,
of the whiche it is not laweful to cary any one out of the realme. The
giftes both of siluer and golde, whiche in greate nombre of longe time,
have bene offred to their goddes, are kepte in the temple: whose dores are
by excellent workemanship garnished with golde, siluer and yuorie. The
couche of their God is vi. cubites longe, and foure cubites brode, all of
golde, gorgeous of worcke, and goodly to beholde. And by that, is there
sette a table of like sorte in euery poincte: for sise, stuffe, and
gorgeousnes. They haue but one temple, all of white stone, builte vpon
pilours, grauen, and embossed, thre hundred and xxxviii. taylours yardes
square, that is to saye, euen of lengthe and bredthe, euery waye so muche.
And somewhat acordinge to the syse of the temple, it is sette full of highe
ymages very precious: coruen and grauen. Rounde about the temple haue the
priestes their habitacion. And all the grounde aboute them xxv. myle
compasse: is halowed to their goddes. The yerely rente of that grounde is
bestowed vpon sacrifice.


¶ The iii. Chapitre.

¶ Of Assiria and Babilonia, and the maners of those peoples.

As saieth sainct Augustine, the countrie called Assiria, was so named of
Assur, the sonne of Sem. And at this daie, to the ende that time might be
founde an appairer, of al thinges, with the losse of a sillabe is becomen
Siria: Hauyng for his bounde, on the East, the countrie called Inde, and
part of Media. On the West the floude Tygris, on the Southe Susiana, and on
the Northe the maigne mounteigne Caucasus. It is a deintie to haue in
Assiria a showre of raine: and therefore are thei constreined for the due
moistyng of their lande, to tolle in the riuers by pollicie of trenching
and damming: wherwith thei so plentifie their grounde, that thei communely
receiue two hundred busshelles for a busshell, and in some speciall veine,
three hundred for one. Their blades of their Wheate and Barlie are fowre
fingers brode. Their Sesamum, and Milium (Somer cornes) are in groweth like
vnto trees. All the whiche thinges Herodotus the historien, thoughe he
knoweth them (as he writeth) to be vndoubtedly true, yet would he that men
toke aduisemente in the reportyng of theim: for that thei mighte sieme vnto
suche as neuer sawe the like, incredible. Thei haue a tree called Palma,
that beareth a kinde of small Dates. This fruicte thei fiede muche vppon,
and out of the bodie of the tree, thei draw at one time of the yere a
liquor or sappe, wherof thei make bothe wine and hony. In their fresh
waters thei vse boates facioned round like a buckler, which the Armenians
that dwelle aboue them, do make of salowe wikers wrought one within an
other, and couered with rawe leather. The appareile of the Assyrians is a
shirte downe to the foote, and ouer that a short garment of wollen, and
last of al a faire white pleicted cassaque doun to the foote agayne. Their
shoes are not fastened on with lachettes, but lyke a poumpe close about the
foote. Which also the Thebans dydde vse, and but they twayne, no moe. They
suffre theyr heares to growe and couer them with prety forked cappes
somwhat mytrelyke. And when they goe abroade, they besprinkle them selues
with fragraunt oyles, to be swete at the smelle. They haue euery man a
rynge with a signet, and also a sceptre finely wrought: vppon whose toppe
thei vse to sticke either an apple, or a rose, or a lillye, or some lyke
thynge. For it is a dishonour to beare it bare.

Emongest all the lawes of that people I note this chiefly as worthie
memorie. When their maidens came to be mariageable, thei ware from yere to
yere, brought foorthe into the Marquette, for suche as would buye them to
be their wiues. And because there ware some so hard fauoured, that menne
would not onely be loth to giue money for them, but some menne also for a
litle money to take theim: the fairest ware first solde, and with the
prices of theim brought into the commune Treasourie, ware the fowler
bestowed. Herodote writeth that he heard by reaporte, that the Heneti (a
people on the bordre of Italie towarde Illiria) ware wonte to vse this
maner. Whervpon Sabellicus takyng an occasion, writeth in this maner.
Whether there ware suche a maner vsed emong that people (saieth he) or not,
I haue litle more certaintie to laie for my self then Herodote had. But
thus muche am I able to saie: that in Venice (a citie of famous worthines,
and whose power is well knowen at this date, to be greate, bothe by Sea and
by lande) suche maner as I shall saie, was sometyme vsed. There was in the
Citie of Venice, a place dedicate, as ye would saie to our Ladie of Pietie.
Before whose doores it happened a child or twaine, begotten by a skape
(whiche either for shame or necessitie could finde no mother, or for the
nombre of parteners, no one propre father) to bee laide. And when by the
good Citezeins suche tendrenes had been shewed to two or thre, as the
mothers loked for, and manhode (to saie the truthe) doth require: the dore
of pitie became so fruictfull a mother, that she had not now one or twoo in
a yere, but three or fower in a quarter. Whiche thyng when the gouernours
of the citie perceiued, thei toke ordre by commune consente, that from
thens foorthe suche women children onely, as should fortune so to bee
offred to Pietie, should bee nourisshed at the commune charge of the citie,
and none other. And for those accordyngly, thei ordained a place wher thei
ware brought vp, hardly kepte in, and diuersely enstructed accordyng to
their giftes of witte and capacitie, vntill thei ware mariage able. At the
whiche tyme, she that had beautie and good qualities bothe, found those a
sufficient dowrie to purchase her choyse of husbandes. And she that hadde
but beautie alone, thoughe her qualities ware not so excellente, yet for
her honestie that beside forth was singuler in theim all, founde that
beautie and honestie could not be vnmaried. These therefore ware not
permitted to euery mannes choise, but graunted to suche as ware thoughte
menne worthie of suche women. If there ware any that lacked the grace of
beautie, yet if she ware wittie, and endewed with qualities (together with
her honestie) a small dowrie purchased her a husband in good time. But if
there ware any in whom there happened neither commendacion of beautie nor
wit, but onely bare honestie: for her bestowyng was there a meane found, by
waie of deuocion, as we terme it when we signifie a respecte of holines in
the diede.

Menne vnmarried beyng in daungier vpon Sea or on Lande, or beyng sore
distressed with sickenes, makyng a vowe for the recouerie of healthe, where
vnto thei holde them selues bounden in conscience (if it fortuned theim at
that tyme to be deliuered) for satisfaction of their vowe in that case not
vprightly perfourmed, vsed to take for their wiues, suche of the simplest
as other had left. So that in processe they alwaie founde husbandes, and
the commune wealthe a diminishyng of charge.

Another Lawe of the Babilonians there was, more worthie of memorie a greate
deale, for that it imported more weight. And that was this. Thei had from
their beginnyng no Phisicens emong theim, but it was enacted by the
consente of the Realme, that who so was diseased of any malady, should
comon with other that had bene healed of the like afore. And acordyng to
their counsaile, practise vpon himself. But he that vsed or attempted any
other waie, to be punished for it. Other write that the sicke ware brought
out into the Marquet place, where suche as had bene deliuered of the like
grief afore: ware bounde by the lawe, to go fro persone to persone, and
shewe theim by what meanes thei had bene remedied.

Thei bewrie their dead in Honie, and obserue the same maner of mournyng
that the Egiptians do. If any man haue medled with his wife in the nighte,
neither of theim bothe toucheth any thyng the next mornyng, before thei be
washed:

There was in Babilon a Temple dedicate to Venus, and it hath bene the maner
in tyme paste, that when their came any straunger to visite this Temple,
all the women of Babilon should come vnto him or them, with greate
solempnitie and fresshely appareiled, euery one hauing a garlande on her
heade, with some seueralle knowledge of distinction one from another, and
offre their seruice to the straungier. And looke whom he liked, he must
laie doune in her lappe, suche somme of money as pleased him. That done
thei bothe withdrew themselues fro the temple a greate distaunce, and laie
together. That money was consecrate to Venus.

There were certein kindredes emong theim, that liued with none other thyng
but fisshe dried against the Sonne, and brused in a Mortare, and so laied
vp till niede ware. And then did thei mingle it, and kneade it with water
into a maner of paaste, and so baked it, and eate it. There ware thre
sortes of menne that bare rule and office emong them. The king, the nobles
with the Seniours, and those that had serued in the warres and ware now
exempte. Thei had also menne skilfull in the secretes of nature, whiche
thei calle Magi, and Chaldei, suche as ware the priestes of Egipte,
institute to attende vpon the seruice of their Goddes. These men all their
life daies, liued in the loue of wisedome, and were connyng in the cours of
the Sterres. And sometyme by foretokenyng of birdes flight and somtyme by
power of holy verses and nombres tourned awaie the euilles fro menne, and
benefited them with thinges that ware good. Thei could expounde Dreames,
and declare the significacions of vncouth wondres. So that men ware certein
of suche successe, as thei had foreshewed. Thei wente not into straunge
scholes to learne their knowledge, as the Grecians doe, but learned the
science of these thynges at their fathers handes, as heirtage from one
generation to another, euen from their childhode at home in their houses.
Whereby it came to passe that beyng sokingly learned, it was bothe the more
groundedly learned, and also without tediousnes. Thei had one vniforme and
constaunt waie of teaching, and one constantnes of doctrine, not waueryng
and almoste contrary to it self, as the doctrine of the Greekes: where eche
Philosopher almoste had his waie, and iudgemente, of the principles and
causes of thynges. But these menne agre al in one, that the worlde is
eternall and euerlastyng, with out begynnyng and without ende. And that the
ordre of the whole, was disposed by the prouidence of the highest. The
bodies aboue to haue their course, not at all aduentures and without rule,
but by an inuiolable lawe of God, acordyng to his ordenaunce and will moste
certein. Thei haue learned by long markyng and notyng of thynges tyme out
of mynde, one aftre another: how by the course of the Starres, to
prognostique, that is to foreshewe vnto men, many thynges to come. Thei
holde that of all other Sterres, the planetes are strongest of Influence,
namely Saturnus. To the sonne thei attribute brightnes and vertue of life.
Mars, Iupiter, Mercurie, and Venus, thei obserue moste,(for that thei haue
a course propre by themselues) as interpretours of the mindes of the goddes
to foresignifie thinges vnto men. Which opinion is so grounded in them,
that they haue called all those foure planetes, by the one name of
Mercurius, as ye woulde saye commune currours or messengers. Thei also do
warne menne of many thinges, bothe hurtefull and availeable: by the
marking, and knowledge of winde and weather, of raine and droughte, of
blasing sterres, of the eclipses of the Sonne and Mone, of earthquakes, and
manye suche like.

Furthermore thei ymagine in the firmament other sterres, subiecte in
influence vnto these former, wherof some are in the haulfe heauen
continually in our sighte, and some in the other haulfe continually oute of
our sight And as the Egiptiens haue feigned them selues xii. goddes, so
likewyse haue thei. To euerie of the whiche they referre one moneth, and
one signe of the Zodiaque. Thei haue prophecied vnto kinges, many
aduentures. As vnto Alexandre victory, when he made his exploicte towarde
Darius. Likewise to Hirchanour and Seleucus, and other the successours of
Alexandre, prophecied thei many thinges: As also to the Romaines, which had
most sure successe. Thei make compte also of xxiiij. other starres:
without, and beside the waie of the zodiaque, xii. towarde the Northe, and
the residewe towarde the Southe. Of the whiche, so many as appiere in
sight, they iudge to apperteigne to the quicke, and the other to the dead.
These troublesome mases haue thei broughte into the worlde more then
enoughe, beside the accompte that thei make of their obseruacions and
deuinacions from their beginninge to Alexandras time: nombringe them thre
thousande and fourty yeres (a shamefull lie) excepte thei will entreprete
their yeres by the Mone, as the Egiptians doe, comptinge euery monethe for
a yere.


¶ The iiii. Chapiter.

¶ Of Iewry, and of the life, maners, and Lawes of the Iewes.

Palestina, whiche also is named Iudea, beinge a seueralle prouince of
Siria; lieth betwixte Arabia Petrea, and the countrie Coelosiria. So
bordering vpon the Egiptian sea on the West, and vpon the floude Iordon on
the Easte, that the one with his waues wassheth his clieues, and the other
sometime with his streame ouerfloweth his banckes.

The Bible, and Iosephus by ensample therof called this londe Cananea: a
countrie renowned for manifolde substaunce. Fertile of soyle, well watered
with riuers, and springes, and rich with precious balme. Lienge in the
nauelle of the world, that it neither might be broyled with heate, ne
frosen with colde. By the reason of the which mildenes of aier, it was
iudged by the Israelites or Hebrues, (and rightlye so iudged) to be the
country that God promised vnto Abraham, Isaac, and Iacob, flowinge in
aboundaunce of milke and honie. Vpon the hope of enioyinge of this londe,
folowed they Moses oute of Egipte fortye yeres wandering in Campe. And
before thei ware broughte into Cananea by Iosua, his substitute, ouercame
with strong hande, one and thirty kinges.

This is the people that onely of all other may chalenge the honour of
auncientie. This is the people alone the mighte haue glorified in the
wisedome, and vnmedled puritie of Language, as beinge of all other the
firste. This is the people that was mother of lettres, and sciences. Amonge
these remained the knowledge of the onely and euerliuinge God, and the
certeintie of the religion that was pleasaunte in his eies. Among these was
the knowledge, and foreknowledge of al, sauinge that Helas, they knewe not
the visitour of their wealthe and the ende of their wo, Iesus the sauioure
of all that woulde knowe him, and sieke life in his deathe. But him whome
thei knew not, when by reason thei should: him shal thei yet ones knowe in
time when the father woulde.

The Israelites, the Hebrues or the Iewes (for all in effecte soundeth one
people) liue aftre the rule of the lawes, whiche Moses their worthy duke,
and deuine chiefteine, declared vnto theim. Withoute the whiche also or
anye other written, thei liued holily, hundred of yeares before: atteininge
to the truthes hidden from other, by a singuler gifte aboue other. That
Philosophre of Philosophers, and deuine of deuines, Moses the marueilous,
waienge in his insight, that no multitude assembled, coulde be gouerned to
continuaunce without ordres of equitie and lawes: when with rewardes to the
good, and reuenge vpon the euill, he had sufficiently exhorted, and trained
his people to the desire of vertue, and the hate of the contrarie: at the
last beside the two tables receiued in the mounte Sinah, added ordres of
discipline, and ciuile gouernaunce, full of all goodlines and equitie.
Whiche Iosephus, the Iewe, (a manne of greate knowledge, and eloquence,
aswel in the Hebrewe, his natural tongue, as in the Grieke, amonge whome he
liued in notable fame not a fewe yeres) hath gathered, and framed into one
seuerall treatise. Out of the which, because I rather fansie, if I maye
with like commoditie, to folowe the founteines of the first Authours, then
the brokes [Footnote: _Broke_, literally, broken meat. It here means
"disconnected passages."] of abredgers, which often bring with them much
puddle: I haue here translated, and annexed to the ende of this booke,
those ordres of the Iewes commune welthe, sendyng the for the reste to the
Bible. And yet notwithstanding, loke what I founde in this Abredger,
neither mencioned in the bible, nor in that treatise, the same thus ordrely
foloweth.

The heathen writers, and the Christianes, do muche diffre concerninge the
Iewes, and Moyses their chiefteine. For Cornelius the stylle [Footnote:
Cornelius Tacitus. The reference, however, is wrong. The passage quoted
does not appear in the Annals: it is from Book v., § 5. of the History.] in
his firste booke of his yerely exploictes, called in Latine Annales, dothe
not ascribe their departure oute of Egipte to the power and commaundement
of God: but vnto necessitie, and constrainte, with these wordes:

A great skuruines, and an yche saieth he, beinge risen throughe oute
Egipte, Bocchoris, the king sekynge remedye in the Temple of Iupiter
Hammon, was willed by responcion to clense his kingdome: And to sende awaye
that kinde of people whom the goddes hated (he meaneth the Iewes) into some
other contrey. The whiche when he had done, and they (as the poompe of al
skuruines, not knowing wher to become) laye cowring vndre hedges, and
busshes, in places desert, and many of them dropped away, for sorowe and
disease: Moyses (whiche also was one of the outecastes, saieth be)
counselled them not to sitte ther, awayting aftre the helpe of God or of
man, whiche thei ware not like to haue: but to folowe him as their
capteine, and lodesman, and committe them selues vnto his gouernaunce. And
that hervnto thei all agreinge, at wilde aduentures, withoute knowing what
thei did, tooke their iorney. In the which thei ware sore troubled, and
harde bestadde, [Footnote: Beset. "What then behoveth so bestad to done."
Gascoigne's Works, 1587.] for lacke of water. In this distresse, when thei
ware now ready to lye them downe, and die for thirst, Moyses espienge a
great heard of wilde Chamelles comming fro their fiedinge, and going into
woddie place ther beside, folowed them. And iudginge the place not to be
without watre, for that he sawe it fresshe and grene, digged and founde
plenty of watre. Wherwith when thei had releued themselues, thei passed on.
vi. daies iourney: and so exployted that the seuenth daye thei where thei
builte their Citie, and their temple. Moyses had beaten out all the
enhabitauntes of the contry, then to the entent he might satle the peoples
hartes towarde him for euer: deuised them newe ordres, and ceremonies
cleane contrary to all other nacions. For (saieth Cornelius) Looke what so
euer is holy amonge vs, the same is amonge them the contrary. And what so
euer to vs is vnlawfulle, that same is compted lawefull amonge theim. The
ymage of the beaste that shewed them the waye to the waters, and the ende
of their wanderinge: did they set vp in their chambres, and offre vnto it a
rambe, in the despight of Iupiter Hammon, whom we worship in the fourme of
a Rambe. And because the Egiptians worshippe their goddesse Apis in the
fourme of a cowe, therforethei vse to slea also in sacrifice a cowe. Swines
flesshe thei eate none, for that thei holde opinion that this kynde of
beaste, of it selfe beinge disposed to be skoruie, mighte be occasion
againe to enfecte them of newe. The seuenth daye thei make holy day. That,
is to say spende awaie in ydlenes and rest: for that on the seuenth daye,
they founde reste of theyr wandering, and misery. And when they had caughte
a sauour in this holye daye loytering: it came to passein processe of tyme,
that thei made a longe holydaye also of the whole seuenth yere: But other
holde opinion that thei do obserue suche maner of holyedaies, in the honour
of Saturne the god of fasting and famine: with whose whippe thei are lothe
againe to be punisshed. Their breade is vnleauened. These ceremonies and
deuises, by what meanes so euer thei ware brought in amonge them, thei do
stiffely defende. As thei are naturally giuen, to be stiffe in beliefe, and
depe in loue with their owne althoughe towarde alother thei be most
hatefull enemies. So that theineither will eate ne drincke with them: no
nor lye in the chambre that a straunger of a nother nacion lyeth in. A
people altogether giuen vnto leachery, and yet absteining from the
enbrasinges of the straunger. Emong them selues thei iudge nothinge
vnlawfull. Thei deuised to rounde of the foreskinne of their yarde (whiche
we call circumcision) because thei would haue a notable knowledge betwene
them, and other nacions. And the firste lesson thei teache vnto their
children, is to despise the goddes. The soules of those that die in
tormentes, or in warre, thei iudge to be immortall. A continuall feare haue
thei, and a regard of heauen and helle. And where the Egiptians honour many
similitudes and Images of beastes, and other creatures, whiche thei make
themselues: the Iewes onely doe honour with their spirite and minde, and
conceiue in their vndrestandyng, but one onely Godheade. Iudging all other
that worshippe the Images of creatures, or of manne: to bee vngodlie and
wicked. These and many other thinges doth Cornelius write, and Trogus also
in his xxxvi. booke.

There ware amonge the Iewes thre seueralle sectes, differyng in life from
the reast of the people. The Phariseis, the Sadduceis, and the Esseis. The
Phariseis vsed a certeine rough solempnesse of appareille, and a very
skante fare: determinyng the Tradicions of Moyses, by certein ordenaunces
and decrees, whiche they themselues sette vp. Thei caried vpon their
foreheades, and on their lefte armes pretie billettes of Paper, facioned
for the place, wherein ware written the tenne preceptes of the two Tables.
And this did thei for that the Lorde saieth: And these shall thou haue
(meanyng the commaundements) as a remembraunce hanging before thine eyes,
and alwaie ready at thine hande. These were called their Philacteries, of
these two woordes Phylexi and Thorat, wherof the former signifieth to
Kiepe, and the other, the Lawe. These menne also hauyng vppon their skirtes
muche broder gardes then other, stacke them full of Thornes, whiche beatyng
and prickyng them on the hieles as thei wente, might putte them in
remembraunce of the commaundementes of God. Thei attributed all thynges
vnto God, and destenie, which they call Emarmeni. Neuertheles thei
graunted, that it laie muche in the free choise of manne: either to doe, or
not to doe the thinges that are iust and godlie, but yet destenie to helpe
in al cases. Whiche destenie thei thought to depende of the influence of
the bodies aboue. Looke what their superiors and Elders had saied, or
answered to any demaunde, thei neuer would contrarie it. Thei belieued that
GOD should come to Iudge the worlde, and that all soules ware euerlastyng.
And as for the soules of the good, thei helde opinion, that thei passed
from one bodie to another, vntill the daie of the generall resurrection.
But the soules of the wicked, to be plonged into euerlasting prison and
dongeon. The name of Pharisei was giuen vnto them for that thei ware
disguised fro the commune maner of other, as ye would saie, Sequestred.

The Sadduceis denied that there was any destenie, but that God was the
beholder of all, and that it laie in the choise of manne, to do well or
euill. And as for ioye or sorowe that the soule should suffre aftre this
life, thei denied. Neither belieued thei any resurrection: because thei
thoughte the soule died with the bodie. Thei would not belieue that there
ware any spirites, good or bad. Neither would thei receiue more of the
Bible, then the fiue bookes of Moses. Thei ware sterne men, and
vncompaignable: not so muche as ones kepyng felowshippe one with another.
For the whiche sternesse, thei named theim selues Sadduceis, that is to
saie iuste menne.

The Esseis ware in all pointes verie like vnto our cloisterers, abhorryng
mariage and the companie of women. Not for that thei condempned Mariage, or
the procreation of issue, but for that thei iudged a manne ought to be ware
of the intemperauncie of women. And that no woman kept herself true to her
husbande. Oh shameful opinion, and muche better to be reported by the dead,
then to be credited of the quicke, bee it neuer so true. Thei possessed all
thinges in commune. As for checkes or reuilings, was to them muske and
honie, and slouenly vndaftinesse, a great comelinesse. So that thei ware
alwaie in a white surcote, all was well. Thei had no certein abiding in any
one citie: but Celles ouer all, where so euer thei became. Before the
risyng of the Sonne, they spake nothyng that touched any worldly affair:
but praied the Sonne to rise. After whose vprijste thei laboured vntill
eleuen of the clocke. And then, washyng firste their whole bodie in water:
thei satte doune together to meate, in solempne silence euery manne.
Swearing they compted forswearyng. Thei admitted no manne to their secte,
vndre a yere of probation. And aftre what time thei had receiued him: yet
had thei two yeres more to proue his maners and condicions. Suche as thei
tooke with a faulte, thei draue fro their compaignie. Enioyned by the waie
of penaunce, to go a grasing like a beast, vntill his dieng daie. When
tenne ware sette in a companie together, no one of them spake without the
consente of the other nyne. Thei woulde not spitte within the precincte of
the compaignie emong theim, ne yeat on their righte side. They kept the
Sabboth with suche a precisenesse, that thei would not that daie, ease
nature of the belie burden. And when vpon other daies, nature forced theim
to that easemente, thei caried with theim a litle spade of woode, wherewith
in place most secreate, thei vsed to digge a litle pit, to laie their
bealie in. And in the time of doyng, thei also vsed a very greate
circumspection, that their clothes laie close to the grounde rounde aboute
theim, for offending (saied thei) of the Maiestie of God. Vpon whiche
respecte, thei also couered and bewried it, assone as thei had done that
nature required. Thei ware of verie long life, by the reason of the
vnifourme diete that thei vsed, alwaie aftre one rate of fare: whiche was
onely the fruicte of their countrie Balme. Thei occupied no money. If any
manne suffered for wel doyng, or as wrongfully condempned, that thoughte
thei the beste kinde of death. Thei helde opinion that all soules ware made
in the beginnyng, and put in to bodies from tyme to tyme, as bodies did
niede them. And for the good soules beyng ridde of their bodies againe,
thei saied there was a place appointed beyond the Weast Occean, where thei
take repose. But for the euill, thei appoincted places toward the East, as,
more stormie colde and vnpleasante. Ther ware amonge them that prophecied
thinges. Some of them gaue themselues to wedlocke: least if they shoulde be
of the oppinion that men oughte to absteine vttrely from women, mankinde
shoulde fade, and in processe be extincte, yeat vsed thei the compaignie of
their wiues nothing at riote.

The lande of Siria (whereof we haue named Iewrie a parte) is at this daie
enhabited of the Grekes, called Griphones, of the Iacobites, Nestorians,
Sarracenes, and of two Christian nations, the Sirians and Marouines. The
Sirians vse the saie Masse, aftre the maner of the Grekes: and for a space
ware subiecte to the churche of Rome.

The Marouines agree in opinion with the Iacobites. Their lettres and tongue
are al one with the Arabique. These Christianes dwelle at the Mounte
Libanus. The Sarracenes, whiche dwelle aboute Ierusalem (a people valeaunt
in warre) delight muche in housbondrie and tilthe. But contrary wise, thei
that enhabite Siria, in that poincte are nothing worth. The Marouines are
fewe in nombre, but of all other thei are the hardieste.


¶ The v. Chapitre.

¶ Of Media, and the maners of the Medes.

Media (a countrie of Asia) as Solinus writeth, toke the name of one Medus,
the sonne of Medea and Egeus, kyng of Athenes. Of whom the people ware also
called Medes. But Iosephus affirmeth that it was so named of Medius the
sonne of Iapheth. This countrie, as it is sene in Ptolomie, hath on the
Northe, the sea named Hircanum, on the West Armenia, and Assiria, on the
Southe Persie, and on theast Hircania and Parthia. Sauing that betwixte
Parthia and it, there ronneth a mounteigne, that separateth their
frontiers. The feactes that thei mooste exercise, are shooting and ridyng.
Wherein thei be righte experte, and almoste (for those quartres) without
matche or felowe. It hathe bene there a longe continued and aunciente
custome, to honour their kynges like goddes. The rounde cappe, whiche thei
cal Tiara: and their long slieued garmentes, passed from them to the
Persians, together with the Empire. It was a peculier maner vsed of the
Kynges of the Medes, to haue many wiues. Which thyng was aftrewarde also
taken by of the communes: so that at lengthe it was thought vnmiete to haue
feawer wiues then seuen. It was also a goodlie thyng for a woman to haue
many husbandes: and to be without fiue at ones, was compted a miserable
state. The Medes entre leagues and couenauntes, both aftre the maner of the
Grekes, and also with drawing bloud vpon some parte of the arme aboute the
shouldre, one of another, whiche thei vse to licke eche of others body. All
that parte of the countrey that lieth towarde the Northe, is barrein and
vnfruictefulle. Wherefore thei vse to make store of their fruicte, and to
drie them, and so to worke them into a masse, or lumpe for their foode. Of
rosted Almondes thei make their breade: and their wine of the rootes of
certein herbes. Thei eate great plentie of the fleshe of wilde beastes.


¶ The. vi. Chapitre.

¶ Of Parthia, and the maner of the Parthians.

A Certeine nombre of Outlawes and Banisshed menne, called Parthie, gaue
name to this Countrie: Aftre suche time as by train, and stealth thei had
gotten it. On the Southe it hath Carmania, on the North Hircanum, on the
Weast The Meades, and on the Easte the country of Arabia. The countrie is
hilly, and full of woddes, and of a barreine soyle. And a people which in
the time of the Assiriens, and Medes, were scante known and litle estiemed.
In so moche that when that highe gouernaunce of the whole (whiche the
Grekes call the Monarchie) was yelde into the handes of the Persians: thei
ware made a butin, as a nombre of raskalles without name. Laste of all thei
ware slaues to the Macedonies. But afterward in processe of time, suche was
the valeauntenes of this people and suche successe had thei: that thei
became lordes, not ouer their neighbours onely rounde about theim, but also
helde the Romaines (the conquerours of the worlde) suche tacke, that in
sondrie warres they gaue them great ouerthrowes, and notablye endamaged
their power. Pliny reherseth xiiii. kingdomes of the Parthians. Trogus
calleth them Emperors of the East part of the worlde, Asthoughe they, and
the Romaines holding the Weste, had deuided the whole betwixte them.

Aftre the decay of the Monarchie of the Macedonians, this people was ruled
by kinges. Whome generally by the name of the first king, thei termed
Arsaces. Nexte vnto the kinges maiestie, the communaltie bare the swaye.
Oute of whome they chase bothe their Capteignes for the warres, and their
gouernours for the peace time. Their language is a speache mixte of the
Scithians and Medes. Their appareil at the firste, was aftre their facion
vnlike to all other. But when thei grewe vnto power, louse and large, and
so thinne: that a man mighte see thoroughe it, aftre the facion of the
Medes. Their maner of weapon, and armour, was the same that the Scithians
vsed. But their armies ware altogether almoste of slaues and bondemen,
contrary to the maner of other peoples. And for that no manne hath
aucthoritie amonge them to giue fredome vnto anye of this bonde ofspring:
The nombre of them by continuance, came vnto a greate multitude. These do
thei bringe vp, and make of as deerly, as thei do of their owne children:
teachinge them to ride, to shote, to throwe the darte, and suche like
feates, with great diligence and handsomenes. Eche communer ther, acording
to his substaunce, findeth a greate nombre of these to serve the kinge on
horsebacke, in all warres. So that at what time Anthonie the Romaine made
warre vpon the Parthians, wher thei mette him with fyftie thousande
horsemen: there ware of the whole nombre but eyghte hundred fre borne. They
are not skylfull to fighte it oute at hande stripes, ne yeat in the maner
of besieging or assaulting: but all together aftre the maner of skirmisshe
as they spie their aduantage. Thei vse no trompet for their warninges or
onsettes but a dromme: neither are thei able to endure long in their
fighte. For yf they ware so good in continuaunce, as thei be violente at a
brunte: ther ware no multitude able to susteine their force. For the moste
parte thei breake of, when the skirmishe is euen at the whottest. And
within a while aftre thei feigne a flight, wher with thei beginne againe a
newe onsette. So when thou thinckest thy selfe mooste sure of the honour of
the fielde, then arte thou at the poinct of the hardest hazarde. Their
horsmen vse armour of mayle entrelaced with fethers: bothe for their owne
defence, and the defence also of their horses. In times passed thei
occupied no golde ne siluer, but only in their armour. Vpon regarde of
chaunge in their luste, thei mary echeone many wiues, and yet punishe thei
none offence so greuously as adultery. For the auoyding whereof thei doe
not onely forbidde their women by generall restrainte from all feastes, and
banckettinges of men: but also from the sighte of them. Some neuerthelesse
do wrighte, amonge the whiche Strabo is one, that thei vse to giue their
wiues sometime to their friendes, as in the waye of mariage, that thei maye
so haue issue. Thei eate none other fleshe but suche as thei kylle at the
chace. Thei be euer on horsebacke, whether thei go to the fielde or the
banket, to bye, to selle, to commune of aughte with their friende, or to do
any thing that is to be done. Yea thei dispatche al commune and priuate
affaires, sittinge on horsebacke. And this is to be vnderstonden of the fre
borne: for the slaues are alwaies on foote. Their buriall for all menne
(sauinge the kinge) is the dogges bealy, and the kytes. But when thei or
suche like haue eaten of, the fleshe, then couer thei the bare bones with
earth. Thei haue great regarde vnto their goddes, and the worship due vnto
them. Thei are men of a proude nature, busie medlers, and sedicious,
craftie, deceiptfull, malaparte, and vnshamefaced: for thei holde opinion
that it becometh the man as well to be Sterne, as the woman to be milde.
Thei be euer in some stirre, either with their neighbours, or elles amonge
themselues. Men of fewe wordes, and readier to doe, then to saye. And
therefore whether it go with them or against them, thei lappe it vp in
scilence. Thei obey not their superiours for any reuerence, but for feare.
Altogether giuen to lechery, and yet skante in fiedinge. No farther trewe
of worde or promesse, then semeth them expediente for their owne behoue.


¶ The. vii. Chapiter.

¶ Of Persia, and the maners and ordinaunces of the Persians.

Persia (a countrie of the Easte) was so called of Persius the Sonne of
Iupiter and Danæ. Of whome the chiefe citie of the kingdome also, was named
Persepolis, whiche in Englishe soundeth Perseboroughe (or as we corruptly
terme it) Perseburie, and the whole nation Persiens. This countrie as
Ptolemie writeth in his fiueth booke, hath on the Northe, Media: on the
West, Susiana: on the Easte, the two Carmaniæs: and on the Southe, an
inshot of the Sea, called the Bosome of Parthia. The famous cities thereof,
were Axiama Persepolis and Diospolis. By the name of Iupiter thei
vnderstode the whole heauen. Thei chiefely honour the Sonne, whom the calle
Mitra. Thei worship also the Mone, the planet Venus, the fyre, the earthe,
the water, and the windes. Thei neither haue aultare nor temple, nor ymage,
but celebrate their deuine seruice vndre the open heauen vpon some highe
place for that purpose appoincted. In doinge sacrifice thei haue no farther
respecte, but to take awaye the life from the beaste. As hauing opinion,
that forasmuche as the goddes be spirites, thei delighte in nothinge but
the spiritual parte, the soule. Before thei slea it, thei set it aparte by
them, with a corone upon the heade, and heape vppon it many bittre
banninges and curses. Some of the nacion notwithstandinge, when thei haue
slaine the beaste: vse to lay parte of the offalle in the fire.

When thei sacrifie vnto the fire, they timbre vp drie stickes together,
cleane without pille or barcke. And after what time they haue powred on
neates tallowe, and oyle, thei kindle it. Not blowing with blaste of
blowesse or mouthe: but makinge winde as it ware with a ventile, or
trenchour, or suche like thinge. For yf any manne either blow into it, or
caste in any deade thing, or any durte, or puddle, it is deathe to the
doer. The Persians beare suche reuerence to their floudes, that thei
neither wasshe, pysse, nor throwe deade carcase into them. No not so moche
as spitte into them: But very reuerentlye honour their water after this
maner. Comminge to lake, mere, floude, ponde, or springe: thei trenche out
a litle diche, and ther cot thei the throte of the sacryfice. Being well
ware, that no droppe of blode sprinckle into the water by. As thoughe all
water ware polluted and vnhalowed ouer all: yf that should happen. That
done their Magi (that is to say men skylful in the secretes of nature)
layeng the flesh vppon a heape of Myrtus, or Laurelle, and tymbryng smalle
wandes about, sette fyre thereon and brenne yt. And pronouncyng certein
curses, they myngle oyle, mylke, and hony together, and sprinkle into the
fyre. But these cursinges make they not against the fyre ne water. But
against the earthe, a greate whyle toguether: holding in their hande a
boundle of smalle myrte wandes. Their kinges reigne by succession of one
kindred or stocke. To whom who so obeyeth not, hath his heade and armes
striken of: and so wythout buriall is throwen out for karreine. Policritus
sheweth that euery king of the Persians, buyldeth his howse vpon a greate
hille: and ther hourdeth vp all the threasure, tribute, and taxe that he
receyueth of the people: to be a recorde aftre his deathe how good a
husbonde he hath bene for the commune wealthe. Suche of the subiectes as
dwelle vpon the sea coast, are taxed to paie money. But those that inhabite
toward the mydde londe: suche commodities as the quarter beareth or hath
wher they dwelle. As apothecary druggues, woolle, coulours, and suche like
and cateille accordingly. He is not permitted any one cause, to putte any
man to death. Neither is it lawfull for any other of the Persians to
execute any thyng against any of his house or stock, that maie sieme in any
wyse cruelle. Euery one of them marie many wiues: and holde many concubines
also beside, for the encrease of issue.

The king Proclaimeth rewarde vnto him, that within one yere begetteth most
children. Fiue yere aftre thei are begotten, thei come not in the fathers
sight, by a certein ordenaunce vsed emong theim: but are broughte vp
continually emong the women: To the ende that if the childe fortune to dye
in the time of his infancie, their fathers grief maie be the lesse. Thei
vse not to marie but in one tyme of the yere: toward midde Marche. The
bridegrome eateth to his supper, an apple of that countrey, or a litle of
the maribone of a Chamel: and so without any farther banquetting goeth to
bedde. From fiue yeres olde, to twentie and fowre, thei learne to ride, to
throwe the Darte, to shoote, and chiefly to haue a tongue voide of all
vntruthe. For their nourituryng and trainyng in good maners, thei haue
appoincted theim Masters of greate sobrenes and vertue, that teache them
dieties, and pretie songes, conteinyng either the praises of their Goddes,
or of some worthy Princes. Whiche sometime thei sing, and sometyme recite
without note: that so they mighte learne to confourme their liues vnto
theirs, whose praises thei sieme themselues to allowe. To this lesson
assemble thei alwaie together, at the calle of a Trompette. And as thei
growe into yeres, an accompt is required of them how well thei haue borne
awaie the lessons of their childhode. Thei vse to ronne the race, and to
course, bothe on horsebacke and on foote: at the leadyng of some noble
mannes sonne, chosen for the nones. The field for the race, is at least
thre mile and thre quarters longe. And to the ende that heate or colde
should the lesse trouble them, they vse to wade ouer brookes, and swimme
ouer riuers, and so to rowme and to hunte the fieldes, and to eate and
drinke in their armour, and wette clothes. The fruyctes that eate are
akecornes, wild Peares, and the fruicte of the Terebinthine tree. But their
daiely foode aftre their ronnyng, and other exercises of the bodie: is hard
Bisquette, or a like crustie breade, Hortechocques, Gromelle sede, a litle
roste flesshe or soden, whether thei lust: and faire water their drincke.
Their maner of Huntyng, is with the bowe, or the Darte on horse backe. Thei
are good also in the slynge. In theforenoone thei plante and graffe, digge
vp settes, stubbe vp rootes, make their owne armour, or fisshe and foule,
with the Angle or nette. Their children are decked with garnishynges of
golde. And their chief iuelle is the precious stone Piropus, whiche thei
haue in suche price, that it maie come vppon no deade corps. And that
honour giue thei also to the fire, for the reuerence thei beare there vnto.
From twentie, till fiuetie: thei folowe the warres. As for byeng and
sellyng, or any kinde of Lawe prattle, thei vse not. Thei cary in their
warres, a kind of shieldes facioned like a losenge, a quiure with shaftes,
and a curtilace. On their heades a copintanke, embatled aboute like a
turrette, and a brestplate emboussed, of skaled woorke. The princes and
menne of honour did weare a treble Anaxirides, facioned muche like a coate
armour, and a long coate doune to the knees, with hangyng slieues acordyng.
The outside colours, but the lining white. In Somer thei weare purple, and
in Wintre Medleis. The abillementes of their heades, are muche like the
frontlettes that their Magj doe weare. The commune people are double coated
doune to the midde Leggue, and haue about their heade a great rolle of
Sendalle. Their beddes and their drinking vessell, are garnished with gold.
When they haue matier of moste importaunce to common of, thei debate and
conclude in the middes of their cuppes: thinkyng it muche surer that is so
determined, then aftre any other sobrer sorte. Acqueintaunce mieting of
equall degre, griete one another with a kisse. But the inferiour mietyng
with his bettre, enclineth his bodie foreward with lowe reuerence. Thei
bewrie their corpses in the grounde, cearyng them all ouer with waxe. Their
Magicens thei leaue vnbewried, for the foules to disspetche. The children
there, by an ordenaunce no where elles vsed: doe carnally knowe their
mothers. Thus have ye heard what the maners of the Persians ware sometyme.

Herodotus reherseth certeine other, their facions not vtterly vnworthe the
tellynge. That thei compted it vilanie to laughe, or to spitte before the
kyng. Thei thought it fondenes in the Grekes, worthie to be laughed at, to
imagine goddes to be sprong vp of menne. What so euer was dishoneste to be
done, that thoughte thei not honeste to be spoken. To be in debte was muche
dishonour, but of all thinges moste vile for to lie. Thei vse not to bewrie
their deade bodies, vntill thei haue bene torne with dogges, or with
fowles. And the parentes brought to niedinesses vse there to make
cheuisaunce of their doughters bodies, which emong no nation elles was euer
allowed. Howbeit some holde opinion, that it was also the propretie of the
Babilonians. The Persians at this daie, beynge subdued of the Saracenes,
and bewitched with Mahometes brainsicke wickednesse, are cleane out of
memorie. A people in those daies, whiche through their greate hardinesse
and force, ware of long tyme Lordes of the Easte parte of the worlde. But
now tombled cleane from their aunciente renowne, and bewried in dishonour.


¶ The. viij. Chapitre.

¶ Of Ynde, and the vncouthe trades and maners of life of the
   people therein.

Ynde, a Countrie also of the Easte, and the closyng vp of Asia toward that
quartre: is saied to be of suche a maigne syse, that it maie be compared
with the thirde parte of the whole earth. Pomponius writeth, that alonge
the shore, it is fowrtie daies sailyng the nighte also comprised therein.

It tooke the name of the floude called Indus, whiche closeth vp the lande
on the Weste side. Beginnyng at the Southe sea, it stretcheth to the
Sonnerisynge: And Northward to the mount Caucasus. There are in it many
greate peoples: and Tounes and Cities so thicke, that some haue reported
them in nombre fiue thousande. And to saie truthe, it ought not to sieme
greatly straunge vnto folkes, though the countrie be reported to haue suche
a nombre of Tounes, or to be so populous: consideryng that of all other,
the Yndiens alone, neuer discharged theim selues of any ouerplus of issue,
as other haue done: but alwaie kepte their owne offspryng at home in their
owne countrie. Their principall floudes are Ganges, Indus, and Hypanis. But
Ganges farre passeth in greatnes the other twaine. This lande by the
benefite of the battling breathe of the gentle Weast winde, reapeth corne
twise in the yere. And other Wintre hath it none, but the bittre blastes of
Theasterly windes called Etesiæ. Thei lacke wine, and yet some men reporte,
that in the quartre called Musica, there groweth a good wine grape. In the
Southe parte thereof, groweth Nardus, Cinnamome, Peper and Calamus
aromaticus: as doeth in Arabia and Aethiope. The woode Ebenum (which some
suppose to be our Guayacum) groweth there, and not elles where. Likewise of
the Popiniaye and the Vnicorne. As for precious stones, Beralle, Prasnes,
Diamantes, firie Carbuncles and Pearles of all sortes, be founde there in
greate plentie. They haue twoo Sommers, softe pimpelyng windes, a milde
aier, a rancke soile, and abundaunce of watre. Diuerse of them therefore
liue an hundred and thirtie yeres. Namely emong the Musicanes. And emong
the Serites, yet somewhat longer.

All the Yndians generally, weare long heare: died either aftre a bright
asshe coulour, or elles an Orenge tawnie. Their chief ieuelles, are of
Pearle and precious stones. Their appareille is verie diuers: and in fewe,
one like another. Some go in Mantles of Wollen, some of Linnen some naked,
some onely brieched to couuer the priuities, and some wrapped aboute with
pilles, and lithe barckes of trees. Thei are all by nature blacke of hewe:
euen so died in their mothers wombe acordyng to the disposicion of the
fathers nature, whose siede also is blacke: as like wise in the
Aethiopians. Talle men and strongly made. Thei are very spare fieders,
namely when thei are in Campe. Neither delighte thei in muche preasse. Thei
are as I saied, greate deckers and trimmers of them selues, haters of
theft. Thei liue by lawe, but not written. They haue no knowledge of
lettres, but administer altogether without booke. And for which they are
voide of guile, and of very sobre diete: all thing prospereth well with
them. Thei drinke no wine, but when thei Sacrifie to their goddes. But
their drincke is a bruage that thei make sometyme of Rize, sometime of
Barlie. Their meate for the mooste parte is soupynges made also of Rize.

In their lawes, bargaines, and couenauntes, their simplicitie and true
meanyng well appeareth: for that thei neuer are muche contencious aboute
them. Thei haue no Lawes concernyng pledges or thynges committed to another
mannes kiepyng. No witnessynges, no handwritynges, no sealynges, ne suche
like tokens of trecherie and vntrust: but without all these, thei trust and
be trusted, thei belieue and are belieued, yea, thei oftentymes leaue their
houses wide open without keper. Whiche truely are all great signes of a
iuste and vprighte dealyng emong them. But this peraduenture can not seatle
well with euery mannes fantasie: that thei should liue eche manne aparte by
himself, and euery body to dine and to suppe when he lust, and not all at
an howre determined. For in dede for the felowshippe and ciuilitie, the
contrary is more allowable. Thei commende and occupie muche as a commune
exercise, to rubbe their bodies: specially with skrapers made for the
nones. Aftre whiche, thei smothe them selues again with Ebenum, whereof I
spake afore.

In their Toumbes, and Bewrialles, very plaine and nothyng costlie: But in
trimming and arraieng of their bodies, to, to, gaude glorious. For there
aboute thei neither spare gold, ne precious stone ne any kinde of silke
that thei haue. Thei delighte muche in garmentes of white Sarcenet. And for
that thei sette muche by beautie, thei cary aboute with theim phanelles to
defende them from the sonne, and leaue nothyng vndone, that maketh for the
bettre grace of their faces. Thei sette asmuche by truthe alone, as by all
other vertues together.

Age hath there no prerogatiue, except thei winne it with their wisedome,
and knowledge. Thei haue many wiues, whiche thei vse to buye of their
parentes for a yoke of Oxen. Some to serve them as their vndrelynges, and
some for pleasure, and issue. Whiche maie neuerthelesse vse buttoke
banquetyng abrode (for any lawe or custome there is to restreine theim)
excepte their housebandes by fine force, can compelle them to kepe close.

No one emong the Yndians either sacrifieth coroned, ne offreth odours, ne
liquours. Thei wounde not their Sacrifice in no maner of wise: but smore
[Footnote: To smother, from the Dutch _smooren_] hym by stopping the
breath. Least thei should offre any mangled thing vnto God, but that that
ware in euery parte whole. He that is conuicte of false witnessyng, hath
his fingres cutte of by the toppe ioynctes. He that hath taken a limme from
any manne, suffreth not onely the like losse, but loseth also his hande.
But if any man haue taken from an artificer, his hande, or his eye, it
lyeth hym vpon his heade.

The kyng hath a garde of bought women: who take chardge of his bodie, and
haue the trimmyng and orderyng thereof, the residue of the armie, remainyng
without the gates. If the Kyng fortune to be droncken, it is not onely
lawfull for any one of these women to slea hym: but she shall also as in
the waie of rewarde, be coupled in mariage to the nexte king. Whiche (as is
saied) is one of his sonnes, that afore enioied the Croune. It is not
lawfull for the king to slepe by daie time: and yet in the night tyme to
auoide trecherie, he is forced euery houre to chaunge his chambre. When he
is not in campe, he ofte tymes cometh abroade: bothe to giue sentence, and
to heare matters dependyng in question. And if it be time of daie to trimme
his bodie: he bothe heareth the pleaes, and is rubbed in the meane season
with the skrapers afore mencioned, by thre of his women. He cometh furthe
also to Sacrifices, and to hunting: Where he is accompaignied with a rable
of women, in as good ordre as ours ware wonte to be vpon Hocke Mondaie.
[Footnote: Hock-Monday fell eight days after Easter, Hock-tide was a
festival instituted in memory of King Hardicanute's death in 1042.
Hock-Tuesday money was a duty paid to the landlord in ancient times.] His
waie is ranged with ropes, and his garde of menne abideth without. But if
it fortune any to steale in, to the women (whiche is contrary to their
ordre and duetie) he loseth his heade for it. There go afore hym Tabours
and Belles. When he hunteth in places fensed aboute, two or thre armed
women stande preste, [Footnote: Preste--_ready_.] for his aide, and
defence. But when he hunteth in open place, he is caried vppon an
Eliphante: and euen so sittyng on his backe shooteth, or throweth the darte
at his game. Some of his women ride vppon Horses, some vpon Elephantes. As
likewise in the warres, where thei fight with all kinde of weapons
skilfully.

Suche menne also as haue gathered thinges into writynges, recorde: that the
Yndians worshippe as their goddes the father of raine Iupiter: Ganges their
floude, and the familiar spirites of their countrie. And when their kyng
washeth his heade, thei make solempne feast, and sende his highnes greate
giftes, eche man enuyenge other, who maye shewe hym self most riche, and
magnificent.

The commune wealth of the Yndians, was sometyme deuided into seuen states
or degrees. The Sages (whiche other calle Philosophers) ware of the first
ordre, or state: the whiche although thei ware, in nombre feawer then any
of the rest: yet ware thei in honour and dignitie aboute the kyng, farre
aboue all other. These menne (priuiledged from all busines) neither be
troubled with office, ne be at any mannes commaundemente: But receiue of
the communes suche thinges as serue for the Sacrifices of their goddes, and
are requisite for bewrialles. As though thei ware bothe well acqueinted,
and beloued in heauen, and knewe muche of the trade in helle. For this
cause haue thei bothe giftes and honour largely giuen them. And in very
diede thei do muche good among the people. For in the beginning of the
yere, assemblyng together, thei foreshewe of raine, of drouthe, of winde
and of sickenesse: and of suche like thynges as maie to profeight be
foreknowen. For as well the kynge as the people, ones vndrestandyng their
foresawes, and knowyng the certeintie of their iudgemintes by former
experience: shone the euilles, and are preste to attende vpon that, that is
good. But if any of their said Sages shall fortune to erre in his
foresighte: other punishmente hath he none, then for euer after to holde
his peace.

The seconde ordre is of housebande menne, whiche beyng more in nombre then
any of the other states, and exempte fro the warres, and all other labour:
bestowe their tyme onely in housebandrie. No enemie spoileth them, none
troubleth them: but refraineth fro doing them any hurte or hinderaunce,
vpon respect of the profighte that redoundeth to the whole, throughe their
trauailles. So that thei, hauyng libertie without all feare to followe
their business, are instrumentes and meanes of a blessed plenteousnesse.
Thei with their wiues and children, dwell alwaie in the countrie, withoute
resortyng to the tounes or citie. Thei paie rente to the Kyng (for all the
whole Countrie is subiecte to their kyng) neither is it lawfull for any of
the communes to occupie and possesse any grounde, without paieynge rente.
And the housebande men beside this rente, yelde vnto the Kynges maiestie, a
fiueth of their fruictes yerely.

The thirde ordre standeth all by brieders and fieders, of all sortes,
whiche like wise neither enhabite toune ne village: but with tentes, in the
wilde fieldes. And these with huntyng and foulyng in sondrie wise, so kiepe
vndre the beastes and hurtefull foules: that whear other wise the
housebande menne should in siede tyme, and towarde harueste, be muche
acloyed [Footnote: This word, meaning overburthened, is frequently met with
in Chaucer.] and hyndered by the fowles, and theim selues alwaie by the
beastes, the countrie is quiete from al suche annoyance.

In the fowrthe ordre are Artificers, and handicraftesmen. Whiche are
deuided, some into Smithes, some into Armourers, some for one purpose, some
for another, as is expediente. These doe not onely liue rente free, but
also haue a certaine of graine allowed them at the kinges allowaunce.

In the fiueth ordre are the menne of warre, a greate nombre daiely
exercised in armes, bothe on Horsebacke, on Elephantes, and on foote. And
all their Elephantes, and horses miete for their warres, are found of the
kinges allowaunce.

The sixteth ordre is of Surueiours or Maisters of reporte, whiche haue the
ouer sighte of all thynges that are done in the realme, and the charge to
bryng reaporte vnto the kyng.

In the seuenth place, are thei that be Presidentes, and heades of the
commune counsailles, very fewe in nombre, but worthy men for their
nobilitie and wisedome. Oute of these are chosen counsailours for the
kynges Courtes, and officers to administre the commune wealth, and to
determine controuersies: yea, capitaines for the warres, and Princes of the
realme.

The whole state of Ynde beyng deuided into these ordres or degrees: it is
also ordeined, that a man shall not marie out of the ordre, wherin his
callyng lieth, ne chaunge his trade. For neither maie the souldiour occupie
housebandrie thoughe he woulde: ne the artificers entremedle with the
doctrine of the Sages.

There are also amonge the Yndians, persons of honour appointed to be as it
ware Tutours of straungiers, to see that no wronge be done them, to put
ordre for their kepyng, and Phisicke, if any falle sicke. As also (if it
fortune any of them to die) for the bewrieng of theim, and to deliuer their
goodes, and money to their nexte friendes.

All causes are brought afore the iudges, who heare the parties, and
punysshe the offenders diligently. Ther is no slauery amonge them. Yea,
thei haue a certaine ordinaunce, that none shalbe slaue or bonde amonge
them, but all fre, and of equalle aucthoritie and honour. For thei holde
opinion that who so accustometh his selfe neither to be Lorde ouer other,
ne to wronge any bodie: that man hath prepared him selfe sauftie and ease
what so euer shall happen hym by any aduenture. And a fonde thing ware it
to make the lawes indifferente for all, and not to make the states of the
men indifferente.

But because ther are in Inde manye sondrie contries, diuerse bothe in
people and tongue (as in so large a thing muste nedes happen) ye shall
vnderstond that thei do not all alike vse suche trade as I haue described,
but in some places somewhat worse.

Of those that lie towarde the Easte, some occupie brieding, and some do
not. Other dwellinge in the mershe and fennes vpon the riuers side: occupie
fisshing, and liue by the same all rawe. And thebettre to worcke their
feate, thei make them selues boates, of suche canes as growe ther, of a
wonderfull biggenes, So, that so muche of the cane as is betwixte ioyncte,
and ioyncte, is a iuste proportion of timbre for one of their boates.

These of all the other Indians, are appareilled in matte, made of a
certayne softe kinde of mere rushes. Which when they haue gathered out of
the floude, and sliced out in maner of lace: they brayde together muche
like oure figge fraile, or suche like kinde of mattinge, and make them
selues ierkins therof.

Those that be yet by Easte of them, are brieders of cataille: and liue
altogether with rawe fleshe, and haue to name Padians. Whose conditions are
sayde to be suche.

As often as it fortuneth any of their citezeins to besicke, yf it be a
manne: his nierest friendes, and those that are moste aboute him, kylle him
by and by, leaste (saye thei) his fleshe shoulde waxe worse. Yea, thoughe
he woulde dissemble the matier, and denie him self to be sicke, it boteth
not. For withoute pardon, they kille him, and make a feaste with him. If it
be a woman, looke how the menne did by the manne, so do the women by a
woman. Likewise do thei with bothe sortes, when thei waxe croked for age,
or become impotente: where broughte, what by the one meanes and the other,
none of them die for age.

Ther is another sorte of the Indians that kille no liuinge thing, ne
plante, nor sowe, nor builde house: but liue with herbes, and a certeine
sede whiche groweth there of the owne accorde, muche like vnto gromelle,
whiche thei gather with the cuppe or shelle that it groweth in, and so
seeth it, and eate it. If any of these falle sicke, he wandereth forthe
into some deserte place, and ther laieth him downe: no manne taking hede
either to his lieng or to his dienge.

All these Yndians that I nowe haue spoken of, in quenching of natures
heate, vse their women as secretly as beastes do their females.

These Yndians haue a kinde of sages, that the Griekes calle Gimnosophistæ,
whiche as the worde Sophista soundeth now, might merily be interpreted
briechelesse bablers. But as Sophista did signifie then, naked Sages: or to
giue one Grieke worde for a nother, naked Philosophres. These (as Petrarche
writeth) haunte the outemoste borders, and shadowie partes of that
countrie, wandering naked accordinge to their name, vp and downe, heather
and theather studienge, and searching the natures of thinges, the course of
the heauens, and the secretes of knowledge. Thei continue sometime al the
whole daye from the sonne rising, till his downe goinge: beholdinge the
same with stedfaste eye, neuer tourning away the heade (althoughe it be
ther moste feruently hote) searching and spienge aftre certaine secretes in
the body thereof.

At another time thei passe the daye likewyse, standing one while on one
legge, another while on another in the broilinge sande of that contrie.
Froste nor snowe, nor firie heate greued not them.

Amonge these, is ther a people called Brachmanes, whiche (as Didimus their
king wrate vnto Alexandre when he went aboute to subdue them) liue a pure
and simple life, led with no likerous lustes of other mennes vanities. This
people longeth for no more then nature requyreth naturallye. Thei are
content with suche foode as commeth to hande, desiryng no suche as other
menne tourne the worlde almoste vpside downe to haue, leauing no element
vnransaked to gette a gowbin [Footnote: A large mouthful. From the old
French, _Gobeau_.] for their glotenous gorge: but suche as the earth
vnploughed, or vndoluen, yeldeth of her self. And because thei acqueinte
not their table with surfet, in dede thei know not so many kindes of
sickenesses, ne so many names of diseases as we doe: but thei bettre knowe
what sounde healthe meaneth, and staied continuaunce of the same then euer
we are like.

Thei haue no neide to craue one anothers helpe and reliefe, wher no manne
maketh clayme by (thine) and by (myne) but euery manne taketh what he
lusteth and lusteth no more then he niedeth. Enuie cannot dwelle ther, ne
none of her impes, wher all be equalle, and none aboue other, and all alike
poore, maketh all alike riche. Thei haue no officers of Iustice among them,
because thei do nothing that ought to be punisshed. Ther can no lawe
appiere, because none offence appeareth.

The whole people hath one onely lawe, to do nothinge against lawe that
nature prescribeth. To cherishe labour, to barre out ydlenes, and banis all
[Transcriber's note: 'colle' in original] couetyse. That lechery licke not
away the vigour of their spirites, and strength: nor lacke throwe menne in
desperate doompes. That euery manne hath enoughe, wher no manne couettes
more. That neuer content, is of all other the moste cruell restles plague.
For whome she catcheth, she throweth a foote beneth beggery, whilest thei
canne finde none ende of their scrattinge, but the more thei haue, the
fellier gnaweth their longing.

Thei warme by the Sonne, the deawe is their moisture, the riuer is their
drinke, the faire grounde their bedde. Care breaketh not their sleape,
Compassing of vanities wearieth not their minde. Pride hath no stroke ouer
them, among whom ther is no diuersite. Neither is their any kinde of bonde
knowen amonge them: but the bondage of the body to the minde whiche they
onely allowe to be iuste.

For the building of their houses, they sende not ouer sea for stone, thei
burne no Calion to make lime to tempre their mortre, thei bake no brickes,
nor digge no sande. But either make them caues in the earthe, or take suche
as they finde ready made in the sides of mounteines and hilles. Ther dwel
thei without feare of rage or ruine, of weather or of winde. He thincketh
him self saeflier fenced from showres with his caue, then with a fewe
tiles: and yet hath by it a double commoditie. A house while he liueth, and
a graue ready made when he dyeth. Ther is no glittering apparell, no
rattelinge in sylkes, no sylkes, no rusteling in veluettes, but a litle
brieche of brawded russhes, or rather a couering of honeste
shamefacednesse.

The women are not sette oute to allure, ne pinched in to please, ne
garnisshed to gase at. No heare died, no lockes outelaied, no face painted,
no skinne sliicked, no countrefeicte countenaunce, nor mynsing of passe. No
poticary practise, no ynckhorne termes, nor pithlesse pratling. Finally no
colours of hipocrisie, no meanes to set out more beautie then nature hathe
giuen them. They ioyne not in engendrure for likerous luste, but for the
loue of yssewe and succession. Thei kepe no warres, but mainteine peace:
not with force, but with peaceable behauour and maners. The father and the
mother folowe not the child to the bewrialle. Thei builde no toumbes for
the deade: more like vnto chirches then graues. They bewry not vp their
asshes in pottes dasshed full of pearle and precious stone. For why they
estieme in these, neither the honour of the quicke, ne the pleasure of the
deade: but raither the trouble and paine of bothe. Pestilence or other
diseases (as I haue sayd) the Abrahmanes are not annoyed with, for they
enfecte not the ayer with any filthe doinges. But nature alwaye with them,
keapeth accorde with the season: and euery elemente his tourne with oute
stoppe or barre. Their Phisicque is abstinence, which is able not only to
cure the maladie already crepte in: but also to holde oute suche as
otherwise mighte entre. Thei couette no sightes, nor shewes of misrule: no
disguisinges nor entreludes. But when thei be disposed to haue the pleasure
of the stage, thei entre into the regestre of their stories, and what thei
finde theremoste fit to belaughed at, that do thei lamente and bewaile.
They delight not as many do, to heare olde wiues tales, and fantasies of
Robin Hoode: but in studious consideracion of the wondreful workemanship of
the worlde, and the disposinge of thinges in suche ordre of course and
degree. Thei crosse no sease for merchaundise, ne learne no colours of
Rethoricque. Thei haue one kinde of plaine eloquence commune to them all:
tongue, and harte agreinge in truthe. Thei haue neither moote halles, ne
vniuersities, whose disagreable doctrine more leaning to apisshe arte, then
natural reason and experience, neuer bringeth anye staye, or certeinte of
thinges. One part of this people iudgeth mannes perfeteste blessednes to
stande in honestie. And a nother in pleasure. Not in the tickelinges of the
taile, or pamperinges of the bealy, more bittre then pleasaunte as thou
maye vse them: but to lacke nothing that perfecte nature desireth, ne
nothing to do that perfecte nature misliketh. Thei thincke it no honour to
God, to slea for him an innocente beaste; yea thei say he accepteth not the
sacrifice of men polluted with bloode, but rather loueth a worship voide of
all bloodsheade. That is to saye, the humble entreatie of woorde, because
that proprety only (to be entreated with woordes) is commune to God and to
manne. With this therefore saye they he is pleased, because we somewhat
resemble him self therin. And this was the life of the vnchristened
Brahmanes, wher with we Christianes are so farre out of loue, that we are
afraid leaste any man should beleue it to be true.

The Yndians called Catheis, haue eche man many wiues. And assone as any one
husbands fortuneth to die, his whole number of wiues assemble before the
chiefest iudges of the citie, and there eche for her self, sheweth and
alledgeth her welle deseruinges towarde her housebande: how derely she
loued him, howe muche she tendered and honoured him. And she that is by
them iudged to haue borne her self beste in that behaulfe, and to haue bene
dierest to her husbonde: she in the beste maner and moste gorgeous that she
can deuise, triumphing and reioysinge, getteth her vp vpon the funeralle
pyle wher her housebandes corps lieth ready to be brente, and ther kissinge
and embrasinge the deade body, is burned together with her housebande. So
gladde is she to haue the victorie, in the contencion of wiuely chastitie,
and honeste behauiour toward her husbande. And the other that lyue, thincke
them selues dishonoured: and escape not without spotte of reproche as longe
as they liue. Their children in their infancie, are not nourished vp at the
libertie and will of the parentes: but certeine there are appointed to
viewe the children: whiche yf thei spie vntowardnes in the infante,
deformitie, or lacke of lymmes, commande it to be slayne.

Thei ioyne not mariages for nobilitie of birthe, or aboundaunce of
substaunce, but for beaultie, and rather vpon regarde of frute, then of
luste.

Certaine also among the Yndians haue this custome, that yf thei be of suche
pouertie that thei be not able to marye oute their doughters: euen in the
floure of her age thei bringe her, or them, furthe into the marcate with
trompet and dromme, or suche other their noyses of warre: And their, after
the multitudeis comen together, the maiden first vncouereth her self wholie
vp to the harde shoulders, on the backe haulfe, to be sene starke naked,
and aftre that likewise on the bealy. Yf the multitude finde no faulte, but
allowe her as worthye to please for her bodye, then marieth she to some one
ther, whome she beste liketh.

Megasthenes writeth that vpon diuerse mounteines in Ynde, are people with
dogges heades, and longe clawes, cladde in hydes of beastes, speakinge with
no voyce like vnto manne, but barking onlye, muche like vnto dogges, with
mouthes roughe like a grater.

Thei that dwelle aboute the heade of Ganges, haue no nede of anye kinde of
meate: for they liue by the sauour of their frutes. And yf thei fortune to
iorney, so that they thincke to fayle of the sauour when thei would haue
it, they cary with theim to smell to, at times as thei fainte. But if it
fortune those to smelle any horrible stincke, it is as present deathe vnto
theim, as poyson to vs. It is recorded in writyng, that certaine of those
were in Alexandres campe.

We rede also that there are in Inde men with one eye and no mo. And certein
so notably eared that thei hange downe to their hieles with suche a
largenesse that they may lye in either of them as vpon a pallet: and
soharde, that thei may rende vp trees with them. Some others also hauing
but one legge, but vpon the same such a foote, that when the sonne is hote,
and he lacketh shadowe, lyenge downe vpon his backe, and holdinge vp his
fote, he largely shadoweth his whole bodie.

It is redde that in Clesia certein women haue but ones childe in all their
life time: and the children as sone as thei are borne, immediatly to become
horeheded. Againe, that there is another nacion, much longer lived than we
are, whiche in their youth are horeheared: and in their age, their heare
waxeth blacke. They affirme also that there is another sorte of women that
conceiue at fyue yeres olde, and liue not aboue the age of viii. yeres.
There are also that lacke neckes, and haue their eyes in their shoulders.
Ther are also beside these, certeine saluages with dogges heades, and
shacke heared on their bodies, that make a very terrible charringe with
their mouthes. But in these and suche like tales of the Indians, and their
countrie: for that a manne had nede of a redie beliefe that should take
theim for truthes, one had not niede to bee to large: considerynge
specially that menne nowe a daies, will skante beleue the reporte of other
mens writinges, in the thinges that almost lye vndre their noses.

Ther is a place betwixt Gedrosia and the floude Yndus which is called
Cathainus of the Cathaiens that enhabyte it. This people ware an ofspring
of the Scithians, muche altered from their naturall condicions, and wonted
maners, if that that Aritone the Arminiane writeth of them in his storie,
be true.

Thei passe (saieth he) all other men in quicke smelling. And thei saye of
them selues, that though all other menne haue two instrumentes of sight,
yet do none se with both two in dede, but thei: all other men in comparison
either to haue no sight, or elles as it ware but with one eye. Their
wittinesse is greate, but their boastinge greater. The whole nacion of them
is perswaded, that thei muche passe all other men in knowledge, and the
subtilties of sciences. Thei are all of colour shining, white, small eyed,
beardelesse by nature. Their lettres are aftre the facion of the Romaine,
all in squares. Thei are diuersely ledde with fonde supersticions, some
aftre one sorte, and some aftre another. But thei are all voyde of the true
knowledge which is in Iesus Christe. Some worship the sonne, some the mone.
Other, ymages of yoten metalle, manie of them an oxe. And thus to sondry
suche other monsters, hath this people in sondry wyse diuided it selfe in
supersticion. Thei haue no maner of written lawes, nor knowe not what we
meane when we speake of faithfulnesse or trustiness. And wher (as I said
afore) thei haue in all handi worckes a passing subtiltie of witte, yet in
the knowledge of heauenly thinges, thei are altogether to learne: that is
to saie, the are vtterly ignoraunt. A cowardly people and very feareful of
death. Yet exercise thei a maner of warre, but that thei handle rather by
witte, and pollicie, then by strength and hardinesse. In their fighte thei
use a kinde of shaftes, and certaine other weapons of flight, vnknowen to
other countries.

Their money is a piece of square paper, with their Kynges Image vpon it.
And because it cannot be durable: ordre is taken, that when it is soiled or
dusked muche, with passyng from man to man, thei shall bring it to the
coignyng house, and make exchaunge for newe. All their vtensiles and
necessaries of house, are of golde, siluer, and other metalles. Oile is so
deintie emong theim, that the kyng onely vseth it, as it ware for a
precious ointement Thus haue we treated of the Yndians, and now to their
borderers, the Scithians.


¶ The ix. Chapitre.

¶ Of Scithia and their sterne maners

Scithia (a countrie lieng by North) is said of Herodotus, to take the name
of Scitha Hercules sonne. Or as Berosus Iudgeth, of an other Scitha, borne
of our greate granndame Araxe, Noahes wife, that dwelt first in that
countrie. This people in the beginnyng pente within narowe boundes, so in
processe by litle and litle, through their valeauntnes and force enlarged
their limites: that thei became lordes of many countries aboute, and grewe
into a great gouernaunce and renoume. Thei nestled first vpon the floude
Araxis so fewe in nombre and so base: that no manne thought theim worthie
the troublyng or talkyng of. But gettyng vnto them a certain king, hardie,
of great courage, and notable, experience in the warres: thei enlarged
their land so, that thei made it stretche on the one parte (whiche is
altogether Hille, and Mounteigne) vnto Caucasus, and ouer at the plain vnto
the Occean, and vnto the greate marshe of Meotis, and Tanais the floude.
From whence the countrie of Scithia now stretcheth all along toward the
East. And because the mounteigne Imaus, ronnyng along as the countrie
coasteth, deuides it in the middes into two haulues: the one haulfe is
called Scithia within Imaus, and the other without (as ye would saie) on
this side the Mounte, and beyonde. There neuer medled any power with theim,
that was able to conquers theim: or muche to endamage them. Thei forced
Darius, the Kyng of the Persians, with greate dishonour to flie their
countrie. Thei slue Cirus with all his armie. Thei made an ende of
Alexandre with al his power. The Romaines sente theim threates thei would
warre with theim, but they proued in fine but wordes. Thei are a people not
tameable with any toile, bittre warriours, and of great strength of bodie.
At the first very rawe, and with out any ordinarie trade of life: neither
knowyng what tillage meant, ne yet hauyng any houses or cotages to dwell
in. But wandryng vp and doune the wilde fieldes and driuyng their catteile
afore theim, their wiues and their children ridyng in wagons by them. Thei
obserued iustice, without constraint of lawe. Thei compted none offence
more heinous, then thefte. As folke that had nothyng vndre locke nor keye,
barre, nor bolte: but altogether in the open fielde. Thei nether occupied
golde ne siluer. Their chief foode was milke and Hony. Against colde and
other stormes, thei wrapped their bodies in felles, and hides of beastes,
and Mice skinnes. Thei knewe not what Wollen meante, ne any facion of
garmente.

This maner of life was in many of the Scithians, but not in all. A greate
nombre of theim, as thei muche differed in distaunce of place from other,
so differed thei also from other in maners: and vsed a certeine trade of
liuyng emong them selues, wherof we aftreward will entreats, when we haue
saied somewhat more of their facions in generall.

Many of the Scithians delight in manslaughter. And the firste man that he
taketh, in fight, his bloud drincketh he: and offreth vnto his Kynge the
heades of all those that he ther sleaeth. For when he hath so done, he is
admitted to be partaker of the butine what so euer it be, whereof he should
be otherwise partles. He cutteth of the heade aftre this sorte. Firste,
with his knife he maketh in it a gashe rounde aboute like a circle, vndre
the eares: then taketh he it by the heare of the croune, and striketh it
of. That done, he fleaeth it, and taweth the skinne betwixte his handes,
vntill it become very souple and soft and kiepeth it for a hande kercher.
This wille he hange vpon the reine of his horse, and glorieth not a litle
in it. And he that hath moste of suche handkerchers, is compted the
valeauntest manne. There are many also that sowe together these skinnes of
menne, as other doe the skinnes of beastes, and weare theim for their
clothyng. Some of them flea the right hand of their enemies beyng slaine,
so that the nailes also remain vpon the fingres, and make couers of theim
for their quiuers.

Many of them flea the whole bodie, and stretche out the skinne vpon
certaine stickes fitted for the nones, and so sprede them vpon their Horse.
Of the Skulles of the heades thus slaine, thei make measures to drincke in:
coueryng them on the outside with rawe Neates leather, and gilding them on
the inside, if he be of habilitie. And when any gheste of estimacion
commeth vnto theim, thei offre them to drincke in asmany as they haue, and
declare for a greate braggue of their valeauntnesse, that so many they haue
slaine with their owne hande.

Ones euery yere, all the chief heades of the Scitians, kepe a solempne
drinckyng. At the whiche the maner is, out of one of these Skulles, as out
of a wassailing boule, to giue all those the wine that haue slaine an
enemie. But he that hath done no such notable acte, tasteth not therof, but
sitteth aparte in a corner with out honour: which is iudged among them a
greate reproche. But thei that haue achieued many slaughters, thei drancke
of two Goblettes together, which thei haue for that purpose.

The goddes whom thei worshippe, and doe Sacrifice vnto, are these: Firste
and chiefly vnto Vesta, then to Iupiter, and the goddesse of the grounde:
for that thei take her to be Iupiters wife. Nexte vnto Apollo and Venus,
Mars and Hercules. Yet erecte thei no Chapelle, Altare, nor Image to any of
these: but onely to Mars: to whom thei offre of euery hundred prisoners
that thei take, one for a sacrifice. To the other thei offre bothe horses
and other beastes, but specially horses. Swine thei so little estieme, that
thei neither offre them to any of their goddes ne vouchesauf to kiepe theim
in their Countrie. Looke whom the kyng punissheth with death, his children
he also commaundeth to be slain, as many as be males, but the women are
pardoned.

With whom the Scithians couenaunt or make League: after this manor thei doe
it. They fille an earthen panne with wine, and of the parties that shall
strike the League or couenaunte, thei drawe a quantitie of bloude, whiche
thei mingle therwith. Then diepe thei into the panne their Curtilasse, then
shaftes, their axe, and their darte. That done, thei wishe vnto them selues
many terrible curses and mischiefes, if thei holde not the league or
couenaunte. And then drincke thei the wine. And not thei onely that strike
the couenantes, but also those that are moste honourable in their
compaignie.

The bewriall of their kynges is aftre this maner; where the Kyng dieth,
those that are of his bloude, rounde his heare, cutte of one of his eares,
slice his armes rounde aboute, all to begasshe his foreheade and his nose,
and shoote him through the lifte hande, in thre or fowre places. Then laie
thei the corps in a Carte, and cary it to the Gerrites, where the
Sepulchres of all their Kynges are. And thei dwell vpon the floude
Boristhenes, about the place wher it becometh first saileable. This people
when thei haue receiued it, trenche out a square plotte in the ground very
wide and large. And then rippe the bealy of the corps, and bowelle it
cleane: clensyng it and drieng it from all filthe, and fille it vp with
Siler Montanum, Frankencense, Smallache siede, and Anise siede, beaten
together in a Mortre. And when thei haue sowed it vp againe close, thei
ceare the whole bodie, and conueighe the same in a Carte, to the nexte
people vndre the gouernaunce of the Scithians, whiche with honour receiue
it, and conueigh it vnto the nexte of their dominion: and so from one to
another, vntle it haue passed rounde aboute, to as many peoples as are of
their dominion, and be comen againe to the place of bewriall emong the
Gerrites, whether it is accompanied with a certain of all the peoples, to
whom it hath comen, as thei gathered encreace from place to place. Thei,
aftre what tyme thei haue laied the corps, cophine and all, vpon a bedde of
state, amid the square afore mentioned: sticke doune their iauelines and
speares aboute him, and with stickes laied ouer from one to another, frame
as it ware a Cielyng, whiche thei couer with a funeralle palle. Then in the
reste of the voide space, that yet remaines in the Cophine made for the
nones: thei berwrie one of his dierest lemmans, a waityng manne, a Cooke, a
Horsekeper, a Lacquie, a Butler, and a Horse. Whiche thei al first
strangle, and thruste in, together with a portion of all sortes of plate,
and of euery suche thyng as appertained to his housholde, or body. And when
the yere comes about, then do thei thus. Thei take of those that ware
nerest about the Kyng (now there are none aboute the king, but thei be
Scithians free borne, and suche as his self doth commaunde: for he maie be
serued with no bought slaue) of those take thei fiuetie and as many of his
best horses. And when thei haue strangeled bothe the men and the horses,
they bowell the Horses, stuffe their bealies againe with Chaffe, and sowe
theim vp close, and sette the menne vppon their backes. Then make thei a
voulte ouer round about the bordre of the greate square, and so dispose
these Horse menne enuiron the same, that thei sieme a farre of, a troupe of
liuyng horsemen gardyng the kyng.

The communes haue also a maner of bewrialle aftre a like sorte. When one of
theim dieth, his nexte neighbour and kindsfolke laie hym in a Carte, and
cary hym aboute to euery of his frindes: whiche at the receipte of hym make
a feaste, as well to the kindsmen, as to all the residewe that accompaignie
the corps. And when thei haue thus caried hym aboute by the space of
fowretene daies, he is bewried. All the braine of his heade beyng first
piked out, and the skulle rinsed with water cleane. Aboute the bodie thei
sette vp three sparres of woodde slopyng, and restyng one vpon another at
the toppes. Rounde about these sparres, thei straine cappyng woollen,
packyng theim as close as thei can. And within betwixt the sparres, as it
ware in the middest ouer the deade, thei set a traie or shallowe trough,
where in to thei caste a kinde of stones, that glistereth by fire light.

The menne emong the Scithians do not vse to washe them selues. But the
women vse to powre water vpon their own bodies, and to rubbe themselues
against some roughe stone: and then with a piece of a Cipresse, Ceadre, or
Encence tree, to grate their whole bodie, vntill it be some what bollen or
swollen. And then enoint thei bothe that and their face, with certeine
medicines for the nones: whereby thei become the nexte daie of a very good
smell, and (when the medicine is washed awaie) slicke and smothe.

Their commune othe, and the othe of charge in matiers of controuersie, or
iudgemente, is by the kynges clothe of estate: by the whiche if a man
shalbe tried to haue forsworne hymself (as their enchauntours haue a maner
to trie with salowe roddes whether thei haue or not) by and by without
respighte, he loseth his heade, and all his goodes, whiche tourne to the
vse of them that haue proued him periured.

The Massagetes, a people of Scithia in Asie, beyond the sea called Caspium
mare in appareille and liuyng, muche like to the Scithians, and therefore
of some so called: vse to fighte bothe on horsebacke and on fote, with
suche actiuitie and force, that thei are almoste inuincible in bothe. Their
weapons are bowe and arrowes, Launces and Armynge swordes. Their beltes
aboute their waste, the ornament of their heades, and their pollerone, are
garnished with golde. Their Horses are barbed on the brest, with barbes of
gold. Their reines, bridles, and trappour are all of golde. The heades of
their Launces are of Brasse, and their Quiuers armed with Brasse. As for
Siluer and Iron thei occupie none. Eche manne marieth one wife, and yet are
the wiues of them all, commune one to another, whiche thyng is not vsed
emong any of the other Scythians. When so euer any man lusteth for the
compaignie of his woman, he hangeth vp his quiuer vpon the carte wherein
his wife is caryed by him, and there openly without shame coupleth.

When any one of this people waxeth very aged, his friendes, acquaintance,
and kindesfolke assembled together, make a bealy Sacrifice of hym: sleayng
as many shiepe besides, as will serue for the fulnesse of the nombre. And
when thei haue dressed theim, eate parte and parte like, the one with the
other. And this kinde of departynge is compted emong theim, of all other
moste blessed. If any fortune to pine awaie of sickenesse, hym eate thei
not: but put in a hole, and throwe earthe vpon him. Sory for the losse,
that he came not to the feaste.

Thei neither sowe nor mowe, but liue by flesshe of suche beastes as thei
haue, and suche fisshe as Araxe the floude doeth plenteously minister vnto
them: and with drinckynge of Milke, wherof thei make no spare. Thei knowe
no goddes but the Sonne: In whose honour thei offre vp Horses in Sacrifice,
as beyng in swiftenesse moste like vnto the Sonne.

The Seretines are a debonaire people, and suche louers of quietnesse, that
they shonne to entremedle with any other people. Merchauntes passe their
outmost floude toward them, but thei maie come no nigher. Along the banques
there, thei sette oute suche thynges, as thei are disposed to selle. Not
the Merchauntes, but the indwellers of the Countrie. For thei selle to
other, and buie of none. And thei sette them in ordre as thei iudge them in
price. The buyer cometh, and as he iudgeth theim by his eye to be worthe,
without further trade or feloweshippe betwixte theim, so laieth he doune.
And if thei receiue it, he departeth with the ware. Emong them is there
neither whore nor thiefe, nor adulteresse broughte to iudgemente. Neither
was it euer hearde, that there was a manne slaine emong theim. For the
feare of their Lawes woorketh more strongly with theim, then the influences
of the Starres. Thei dwelle as it ware in the beginnyng or entryng of the
worlde. And for that thei liue aftre a chast sort: thei are neither
skourged with Blastynges, ne Haile, ne Pestilence, ne suche other euilles.
No manne toucheth a woman there, aftre she hath conceiued, ne yet in the
time of her flowres. Thei eate none vncleane beastes, ne knowe what
Sacrifisyng meaneth. Euery man there is his owne Iudge, acordyng to
Iustice. Therefore are thei not chastised with suche corrections as happen
vnto other for synne, but bothe continue long in life, and die without
grief.

The Tauroschithians (so called for that thei dwell aboute the mounteigne
Taurus) offre as many as fortune to make Shipwracke vpon their shore: to
the virgine, whose name ye shall aftre heare. And if it fortune any Greke
or Grekes, to be driuen thether, him doe thei sacrifice after this maner.

Aftre what tyme thei haue made prayer after their maner, thei strike of his
heade with an hatchet. And (as some saie) tumble doune the carkesse into
the Sea, (for this Virgine hath a Chapelle vpon the toppe of a high clieue,
hangyng ouer the Sea, where this feate is doone) and naile vp the heade
vpon a Gibet. In this poincte of nailyng vp the heade, all the writers
agre, but in tomblyng doune the body, not so, for some affirme, that the
body is bewried. The Virgine Deuille, to whom thei Sacrifice: is saith to
be Iphigenia Agamemnons doughter. Their enemies as many as thei take, thus
thei handle. Euery manne cutteth of his prisoners head, and carieth it
home: and fasteneth it vpon the ende of a long pole, and setteth it vp:
some vpon their house toppe some vpon their chimneis as high as thei can.
And no merueile though thei set them so that thei might well see rounde
about theim: for thei saie: they are the wardens and kepers of al their
whole house. They liue by spoile, and by warre.

The Agathirsians are menne verie neate and fine, and greate wearers of
golde in their appareill. Thei occupie their women in commune, so that thei
seme all of one kindred, and one householde: neuer striuyng nor grudgyng
one with another, muche like in body vnto the Thracians.

The Neuriens vse the maners of the Sithians. This people the somer before
that Darius set furthe, ware constrained for the greate multitude of
Serpentes that ware bredde in their quartres, to chaunge their dwellyng
place. Thei verily doe belieue, and wille sweare it: that euery yere ones
for a certaine daies, thei become Woulues, and retourne againe into their
former shape and state.

The Antropophagites (so called for that thei liue by mannes fleshe) of all
menne, are the worste condicioned, without lawe, or officer, appareilled
like the Scithiens: but in language like vnto no bodye but them selues.

The Melanchleni do all weare blacke, as their name dothe signifie. And of
these also are eaters of mannes fleshe: so manye as folowe the trade of the
Scithians.

The Budines are a great nacion, and a populous, graye eyed, and redde
headed al. Their heade citie is Gelone, wherof thei are also called
Gelonites. Thei kepe euery thirde yere a reuelle in the honour of Bacchus:
whereat thei make reuelle in dede, yea, reuell route. Thei ware sometime
Griekes, whiche put of fro their countrie, seatled them selues there. And
by processe, losing the proprietie of their owne tongue, became in language
haulfe Grekes, and haulfe Scithians. Yet are the Gelonites bothe in
language and liuinge, different from the Budines. For the Budines being
natiue of the place, are brieders of Catteile: The Gelonites, occupienge
tilthe: liue by corne, and haue their frute yardes. Neyther lyke in colour
ne countenaunce to the other. All their quartres are verye full, and thicke
of trees. It hathe also many meres and greate. In and aboute the whiche
thei take Ottres, and Beauers, and many other beastes: of whose skinnes
they make them pilches, and Ierkins.

The Lirceis liue by woodmanshippe, and huntinge, and aftre this maner.
Their countrie beinge also very thicke of trees, thei vse to climbe suche
as siemeth them beste: and there awaite their game. At the foote of euery
mannes tree lieth a dogge, and a horse well taughte to couche flatte on the
bealy, as lowe as can bee. When the beast cometh within daungier, he
shoteth. And yf he hitte, he streighte commeth downe, taketh his horse
backe, and foloweth with his hounde.

The Argippians dwell vndre the foote of the highe mountaines. Men whiche
fro their birthe are balde; bothe the males and the females. Their noses
tourne vp like a shoinge horne, and their chinnes be great out of measure.
The sounde of their voice vnlike to all other: ther apparell aftre the
sorte of the Scithians. Thei haue small regarde to brieding: by the reason
wherof thei haue smalle store of cattaile. Thei lie vndre trees, whiche in
the wintre thei couer ouer with a white kinde of felte, and in the somer
take the same awaye, and lie vndre the open tree. Ther is no manne that
will harme them for that thei are compted holy halowed: neither haue thei
anye kinde of armour, or weapon of warre. These men haue the arbitrement of
their neighbours controuersies rounde aboute. And as thei determine so are
thei ended. Who so flieth vnto them, is saufe as in sanctuary.

The Issedonnes haue this propertie. When so euer any mannes father ther,
dieth: all his kinsfolke bringe euery man one beast or other to the house
of the sonne that kepeth the funeral. Which when they haue killed and
minsed: they minse also the body of the deade. And bothe the flesshes
beinge mingled together, thei fall to the banket. Then take thei the dead
mannes heade, and pike the braine cleane, and all other moistures and
ragges, and when thei haue guilte it, thei vse it for a representacion of
the partie departed. Solempnisinge euery yere furthe, the memoriall, with
newe ceremonies, and mo. This dothe the sonne for the father, and the
father for the sonne, as the Grekes kepe their birthe daies.

These are also sayde to be verye iuste dealers, and their wiues to be as
valeaunt and hardie as the husbandes. Suche haue the maners of the
Scithians bene. But afterwarde being subdued by the Tartares, and wearing
by processe into their maners and ordinaunces: thei nowe liue all aftre one
sorte, and vndre one name.


¶ The x. Chapiter.

¶ Of Tartarie, and the maners and power of the Tartarians.

Tartaria, otherwyse called Mongal: As Vincentius wryteth, is in that parte
of the earthe where the Easte and the Northe ioyne together. It had vpon
the Easte, the londe of the Katheorines and Solangores, on the South, the
Saracenes: on the Weste the Naymaniens, and on the Northe is enclosed with
the occean. It hath the name of the floude Tartar that ronneth by it. A
country very hilly, and full of mountaines. And where it is champein,
myngled with sande and grauelle. Barreine, except it be in places where it
is moysted with floodes, which are very fewe. And therfore it is muche
waaste, and thinly enhabited. Ther is not in it one Citie, ne one village
beside Cracuris. And wood in the moste parte of the country so skante, that
the enhabitauntes are faine to make their fyre, and dresse their meate with
the drie donge of neate and horses. The ayer intemperate and wonderfulle.
Thondre, and lightening in somer so terrible, that sondry do presently die
for very feare. Nowe is it broiling hote, and by and by bittre colde, and
plenty of snowe. Suche stronge windes sometime, that it staieth horse and
man, and bloweth of the rider: teareth vp trees by the rootes, and doeth
muche harme. In wintre it neuer raineth ther, and in Somer very often. But
so slendrely, that the earthe is skante wette with al. And yet is ther
great store of Cattaile: as Camelles, neate, &c. And horses and mares, in
suche plentie, as I beleue no parte of the earth hath againe. It was first
enhabited of foure peoples. Of the Ieccha Mongalles that is to saye, the
greate Mongalles. The Sumongalles, that is to say the watre Mongalles,
whiche called them selues Tartares, of the floude Tartar whose neighbours
thei are.

The thirde people ware called Merchates, and the fourthe Metrites. There
was no difference betwixte them eyther in body or language, but al aftre
one sorte and facion. Their behauour was in the beginning very brute, and
farre oute of ordre, without lawe or discipline, or any good facion. Thei
liued amonge the Scithians, and kept herdes of cattalle in very base state
and condition: and ware tributaries to all their neighbours. But within a
while aftre, thei deuided them selues as it ware into wardes, to euery of
the which was appointed a capitaine: in whose deuises and consentes
consisted thordre of the whole. Yet ware thei tributaries to the Naimannes
(their next neighbours) vntyll Canguista by a certaine prophecie was chosen
their kynge. He assone as he had receiued the gouernaunce, abolished all
worshippe of deuilles, and commaunded by commune decree that all the whole
nacion should honour the highe God euerlasting: by whose prouidence he
would seme to haue receiued the kingdome. It was further decreed that as
manye as ware of age to beare armour, should be preste, and ready with the
king at a certeyne daye. The multitude that serued for their warres, was
thus distributed. Their capitaines ouer ten (which by a terme borowed of
the Frenche, we calle Diseners) are at the commaundemente of the
Centurians. And the Centuriane obeied the Millenarie, that had charge of a
thousande. And he againe was subiecte to the grande Coronelle that had
charge ouer ten thousande: aboue the whiche nombre thei mounted no degree
of captaines.

This done, to proue the obedience of his subiectes, he commaunded seuen
sonnes of the Princes or Dukes whiche before had gouerned the people: to be
slaine by the handes of their owne fathers, and mothers. Whiche thinge
althoughe it ware muche againste their hartes, and an horrible diede, yet
did thei it. Partely vppon the feare of the residew of the people: and
partly vpon conscience of their obedience. For why, the people thoughte
when thei sawe him begyn aftre this sorte: thei had had a god amongest
them. So that in disobeyinge of his commaundemente, thei thoughte thei
should not haue disobeied a king but God him selfe.

Canguista takinge stomake with this power, firste subdued those Scithians
that bordred vpon him, and made them tributaries. And where other afore had
bene tributaries also vnto them: now receiued he in that one peoples
righte, tribute of many. Then settinge vpon those that ware further off, he
had suche prosperous successe that from Scithia to the sonne risinge, and
fro thence to the middle earthe sea, and beyonde: he broughte all together
vndre his subiection. So that he moughte nowe worthely wryte him selfe
highe Gouernour, and Emperour of the Easte.

The Tartares are very deformed, litle of bodie for the moste parte, hauyng
great stiepe eyes: and yet so heary on the eye liddes, that there sheweth
but litle in open sight. Platter faced and beardlesse, sauyng vpon the
vpper lippe, and a litle about the poincte of the chinne thei haue a feawe
heares as it were pricked in with Bodkins. Thei be communely all slendre in
the waste. Thei shaue the hindre haulfe of the heade, rounde aboute by the
croune, from one eare to another: compassyng towarde the nape of the necke
after suche a facion, that the polle behind sheweth muche like the face of
a bearded manne. On the other parte, thei suffre their heare to growe at
lengthe like our women: whiche thei deuide into two tresses, or braudes,
and bryng aboute to fasten behinde their eares. And this maner of shauyng,
do thei vse also that dwelle among theim, of what nacion so euer thei be.
Thei theim selues are very light and nimble: good on Horse, but naughte on
foote. All from the moste to the leaste, as well the women as the menne:
doe ride either vpon Geldynges, or Kien, where so euer thei become. For
stoned Horses thei occupie none, ne yet Gelding that is a striker, and
lighte of his heles. Their bridelles are trimmed with muche gold, siluer,
and precious stones. And it is compted a ioly thyng among theim: to haue a
great sort of siluer sounded belles, gynglyng aboute their horse neckes.
Their speache is very chourlishe and loude. Their singyng is like the
bawlynge of Woulues. When thei drinke, thei shake the heade: and drincke
thei do very often euen vnto dronckennesse, wherein thei glorie muche.
Their dwellyng is neither in tounes ne Bouroughes. But in the fieldes
abrode, aftre the maner of thauncient Scithians in tentes. And the
ratherso, for that thei are all moste generally catteill mastres. In the
wintre time thei are wont to drawe to the plaines, and in the Somer season,
to the mounteignes and hillie places for the better pasture. Thei make
theim Tentes, or elles rounde cotages of wickres, or of Felte vndersette
with smothe poles. In the middes thei make a round windowe that giueth them
lighte, and letteth out the smoke. In the middes of the Tent, is their
fire, aboute the whiche their wife and their children doe sitte. The menne
delight muche in dartyng, shootyng, and wrastelyng. Thei are merueilous
good hunters, to the whiche thei go armed at all pieces. And assone as thei
espie the beaste, thei come costing together rounde aboute and enclose her.
And when euery manne hath throwen his darte, or shotte his arrowe: whilest
the beast is troubled and amased with the stripes, thei steppe in to her
and slea her. Thei neither vse breade ne bakyng: table clothe ne napkin.

Thei belieue that there is one GOD that made all thynges, bodily and
ghostly, sene or vnsene, and hym thei honour: but not with any maner of
Sacrifice or ceremonie. Thei make theim selues litle pupettes of silke or
of felte, or of thrumme, like unto menne: whiche thei sette vp vpon eche
side of their Tentes, and do them muche reuerence, beseching them to take
hede to their catteille. To these thei offre the first milke of all their
milche catteill, of what kinde so euer thei be. And before thei begin
either to eate or drinke aught, thei sette a porcion thereof before theim.
Looke what beaste thei kille to be eaten, thei reserue the harte all nighte
in some couered cuppe, and the nexte mornynge seath it and eate it.

Thei worshippe also and Sacrifice to the Sonne, Moone, and elementes fowre.
To Cham also their Lorde and Kyng, thei do very deuoute honour and
Sacrifice: supposyng him to be the sonne of God, and to haue no piere in
the whole worlde: neither can they abide to heare any other manne name hym.

This people so despiseth al other men, and thincke theim selues so farre to
surmount them in wisedome and goodnes: that thei abhorre to speake to
theim, or to compaignie with theim. Thei calle the Pope and all Christen
menne, Doggues and Idolatres: because thei honour stones and blocques. And
thei theim selues (beyng giuen to deuelishe supersticions) are markers of
dreames, and haue dreame readers emong theim: as well to enterpreate their
sweuens, [Footnote: From the Saxon, meaning a dream. See Bailey's _Dict._,
London, 1737.] as to aske knoweledge of Idolles. In whom thei are perswaded
that God speaketh: and therefore acordyng to their answeres, frame them
selues to do. Thei marke many seasons, and specially haue regarde to the
chaunges of the Moone. Yet make thei for no season, ne chaunge, any
singular holidaie or obseruance: but ilike for them all indifferently. Thei
are of so gredie a coueitousenesse, and desire, that if any of them se
aughte, that he coueiteth to haue, and cannot obtein with the good wille of
the owner: if it apperteigne to no Tartarre, he will haue it by force. And
thei thincke (through a certein ordenaunce that their Kyng made) thei
offende not therein. For suche a commaundemente had thei of Canguista, and
Cham, their firste Kynges: That if it fortune any Tartarre, or Tartarres
seruaunt, to finde in his waie, horse, man, or woman, without the kinges
lettres or his saulfconduite: he should take it, him, her, or them as his
owne for euer.

To suche as lacke money thei lende, but for shamefull gaines: that is to
saie, two shillynges of the pounde for euery Monethe. And if it fortune ye
to faile to make paiemente at the dale: ye shall also be forced to paie the
enterest, acording to the rate of the Vsurie. That is to saie, of euery
tenth penie, one.

Thei do so polle and oppresse their tributaries, with subsidies, taxes and
tallages, as neuer did people but thei, that euer manne redde of. It is
beyonde belief to saie. Thei euer coueite, and as Lordes of all, do rape,
and rende from other, and neuer recompence aught. No, the begger that
liueth on almose, getteth not an aguelette of hym. Yet haue thei this one
praise worthie propretie, that if he fortune to finde them at meate: thei
neither shutte the doore against hym, ne thruste him out, if he be disposed
to eate, but charitably bidde them, and parte with them suche as thei haue.
But thei fiede the vnclenliest in the worlde, as I haue saied, without
tableclothe, napkinne, or towell to couer the borde, or to wipe at meate,
or aftre. For thei neither washe hande, face, ne body, ne any garmente that
thei weare. Thei nether eate bread, nor make bread, nor sallottes nor
potage, nor any kinde of Pultz. But no maner of flesshe cometh to them
amisse. Dogges, Cattes, Horses and rattes. Yea, sometime to shewe their
crueltie, and to satisfie their vengeaunce, the bodies of suche their
enemies, as thei haue taken, thei vse to roste by a greate fire: and when
thei bee asembled a good nombre together, thei teare theim of the spittes
like Wolues, with their tiethe, and deuoure them. And aftreward drincke vp
the bloude, whiche thei reserue afore hande for the nones. Otherwise thei
vse to drincke Milke. Thei haue no wine of the countrie it self, but suche
as is brought into them thei drincke very gredilie. Thei vse to Lowse one
anothers heade, and euer as thei take a Lowce to eate her, saieng: thus
wille I doe to our enemies. It is compted a greate offence emong them to
suffre drincke, or a piece of meate to be loste. Thei neuer therfore giue
the bone to the Dogge, till they haue eaten out the marrowe. Thei neuer
eate beaste (suche vile niggardes thei are) as long as the same is sounde
and in good likyng: but when it fortuneth to be hurte, sicke, or febled by
age, then bewrie they it in their bealies. Thei are greate sparers, and
contente with smalle chaunge, and litle foode. Thei drincke in the mornyng,
a goblet full of Milke or twaine, whiche serueth theim sometyme for their
whole daies foode.

The menne and the women moste communely are appareilled ylike. The men
weare vpon their heades shallowe copin tackes, comming but behinde with a
taile of a handefull and a haulfe long, and as muche in breadth: whiche
thei fasten vnder their chinnes, for falling or blowing of, with a couple
of strynges of ribbande lace, as we doe our nighte cappes. Their married
women wear on their heades, fine wickre Basquettes of a foote and a haulf
long: rounde, and flatte on the toppe like a barrelle. Whiche are either
garnished with chaungeable silkes, or the gaiest parte of the Pecockes
feathers, and sette with golde and stones of sondrie sortes. Asfor the
residue of their bodie, thei wear acording to their abilitie, bothe men and
women, Skarlet or Veluet, or other silkes. Thei weare coates of a straunge
facion, open on the left side, whiche thei put on acordingly, and fasten
with fowre or five Buttons. Their Somer wiedes are all communely blacke:
and those that thei weare in Winter and foule weather, white: and neuer
lower then the knee. Wearing furres (wherein thei muche delight) thei weare
not the furre inwarde, as we communely doe: but contrariwise the heare
outwarde, that thei maie enioie the pleasure of the shewe.

It is harde to discerne by the appareile the maide, fro the wife, or the
woman fro the manne: so like araied do the menne and the women go. Thei
weare brieches, the one and the other. When they shal go to the skirmishe,
or to battaille, some couer their armes (whiche at all other tymes are
naked) with plates of iron, buckeled together alonge, in many pieces, that
thei may the easelier sturre their armes. Some doe thesame with many foldes
of Leather: wherwith thei also arme their head. Thei cannot handle a
target: nor but fewe of theim a launce or a long sweard. Thei haue
curtilasses of iii. quarters longe: not double edged but backed. Thei
fighte all with a quarter blowe, and neither right downe, ne foyning. Thei
be very redy on horsebacke, and very skilful archers. He is counted moste
valeaunte, that best obserueth the commaundement and the obedience dewe to
his capitaine. Thei haue no wages for their souldie, yet are they prest and
ready in all affaires, and all commaundementes. In battayle, and otherwise
wher oughte is to be done, very politike and experte. The princes and
capitaines entre not the battle, but standyng aloofe, crye vnto their men,
and harten them on: lookinge diligently aboute on euery side what is
nedefull to be done. Sometime to make the armye sieme the greater, and the
more terrible to the ennemy: thei set vpon horsebacke their wiues and their
children, yea and men made of cloutes. It is no vilany amonge them to flye:
if any thinge maye eyther be saued or wonne by it. When thei will shoote,
thei vnarme their righte arme, and then let thei flye with suche violence,
that it pearceth all kinde of armour. Thei giue the onset flockinge in
plumpes, and likewise in plompes they flie. And in the flighte thei so
shoote backe warde behinde them, that thei slea many of their ennemies
pursuinge the chase. And when thei perceiue their ennemies dispersed by
pursuinge the chase, or not to fighte any thing wholie together: soudeinly
retourninge, the beginne a newe onset with a hayle of shotte, neither
sparing horse ne man. So that oftetimes thei ouercome when thei are
thoughte to be vanquisshed. When thei come to enuade any quartre or
countrie, thei deuide their armie, and sette vpon it on euery parte: so
that the inhabitours can neither haue laisure to assemble and resiste, ne
waye to escape. Thus are thei alway sure of the victory, whiche thei knytte
vp with moste proude crueltie. Neither sparinge manne woman ne childe, olde
ne younge sauing the artificer onely, whom thei reserue for their own vses.
And this slaughter make thei aftre this maner. When they haue all taken
them, thei distribute them to their Centurians: who committe them againe to
the slaues: to euery one fewer or more acordinge to the multitude. And when
the slaues haue all slayne them as bouchers kylle hogges: then for a
terrour to al other ther about: of euery thousande of the dead thei take
one, and hange him vp by the hieles vpon a stake, amydde these deade
bodies: and so ordre his heade as though it appiered by his facion or maner
of hanginge, that he yet bothe harkened the complainte of his felowes, and
lessened them againe. Many of the Tartarres when the bodies lie freshe
bliedinge on the grounde, laye them downe alonge, and sucke of the bloud a
full gloute.

Thei kepe faithe to no manne, howe depely so euer thei binde them selues
thervnto. Thei deale yet wourse with those that thei ouer come with force.
The maidens and younge women thei deflowre, and defile as thei come to
hande, neither do thei iudge it any dishonestie. The beautifuller sorte
thei lead away with them: and in extreame misery, constraine them to be
their slaues all their lyfe longe. Of all other thei are moste vnbrideled
in leachery. For althoughe they marye as many wiues as they luste, and are
able to kepe: no degre prohibited, but mother, doughter, and sister: yet
are thei as rancke bouguers with mankinde, and with beastes, as the
Saracenes are, and no punishmente for it amonge them. The woman that thei
marie, thei neuer take as wife, ne receiue any dowrie with her, vntill she
haue borne a childe. So that if she be barren he maye caste her vp, and
mary another.

This is a notable meruaile, that though amonge theim manye women haue but
one manne: yet thei neuer lightely falle out, ne brawle one with another
for him. And yet are the menne parcialle in theyr loue: shewing muche more
fauour to one then another, and goynge fro the bedde of the one, streighte
to the bedde of an other. The women haue their seuerall tentes and
householdes: And yet liue verye chastely, and true to their housebandes.
For bothe the manne and the women taken in adultery, suffre death by the
lawe.

Those that are not occupied for the warres, driue the catteile a fielde,
and there kepe them. Thei hunte, and exercise themselues in wrastlinge,
other thing doe thei not. The care of prouision for meate and drincke,
appareille and householde, they betake to the women. This people hath many
superstitious toyes. It is a heinous matter with them, to touche the fier,
or take fleshe out of a potte with a knife. Thei hewe or choppe no maner of
thing by the fire, leasse by any maner of meanes, thei might fortune to
hurte the thing which alway they haue in reuerence, and iudge to be the
clenser, and purifier of al thinges. To laye them downe to reste vppon the
whippe that thei stirre theyr horse with (for spurres thei vse none) or to
touche their shaftes therewith, in no wise thei wylle not. Thei neither
kille younge birdes, ne take them in the neste or other waies. Thei beate
not the horse with the bridle. Thei breake not one bone with another. Thei
are ware, not to spill any spone meate, or drincke, specially milke. No
manne pisseth within the compasse of their soiourning place. And if any one
of self willed stubbornesse should do it, he ware sure withoute all mercy
to die for it. But if necessitie constraine them to do it (as it often
happeneth) then the tente of hym that did it, with all that is in it, muste
be clensed and purified after this maner. They make two fires, thre strides
one from another. And by eche fire thei pitche downe a Iaueline. Vpon them
is tied a lyne stretching fro the one to the other, and couered ouer with
buckerame. Betwene these ii. Iauelins, as throughe a gate, muste all
thinges passe that are to be purified. Two women (to whome this office
belongeth) stande, on either side one, sprinckelinge on watre, and
mumblinge certaine verses. No straungier, of what dignitie so euer he be,
or of howe greate importance so euer the cause of his comming be: is
admitted to the kinges sighte before he be purified. He that treadeth vppon
the thressholde of the tente wherein their kinge, or anye of his
chiefteines lyeth, dieth for it in the place. If any manne bite a gobet,
greater than he is able to swallowe, so that he be constrained to put it
out of his mouth againe: thei by and by make a hole vndre the tent, and
ther drawe him out, and cruelly slea him. Many other thinges ther are which
thei compte for faultes beyonde all forgiuenesse. But to slea a man, to
enuade a nother mannes country, contrary to all righte and reason, to
bereue them of their goodes and possessions, to breake the preceptes of
God, thei estieme as nothinge. Thei haue a beliefe that aftre this life
thei shal liue for euer in another worlde (but what maner of worlde thei
cannot telle) and ther receiue rewarde for their well doinges. When any of
them falleth sicke, and lieth at the pointe of deathe, thei sticke vp a
Iaueline with a piece of blacke clothe at the dore of the tente wher he
lieth, that none come in as they passe by. For no manne when he seeth this,
dare entre thether vncalled.

Aftre what time the sicke is dead, his whole house gather together, and
priuely conueighe the corps into some place withoute the tente, chosen for
the purpose. Ther cut they out a trenche, broade and diepe enoughe to sette
vp another lytle tent in: so that the toppe of the tent maye be well within
the grounde. In that thei prepare a table with a banket: at the whiche thei
sette the deade bodye in his beste appareille. And so together, as it ware
with one hande, couer all with earth againe. Thei bewry with him also some
beaste of bourden, and a horse ready sadled and appointed to ride. The
gentlemen by their life time, appointe out a slaue (whome thei marke with
their brande) to be specially bewried with him when he dieth. And this do
thei vpon perswasion of a life in a nother worlde, wher thei woulde be loth
to lacke these necessaries. Then doe the deades friendes take another
horse, and slea him. And when they haue eaten the fleshe, thei stuffe the
hide full of haye, and sowe it againe together and sette it vp ouer the
graue vpon foure poles, in remembraunce of the deade. The bones do the two
ordenarie women burne, for the clensinge and purifienge of the soule. But
the gentlemen, and thei of higher degree, handle the hide aftre another
maner. Thei cut it out into very fine thonges, to asmuche lengthe as thei
can, and measure oute asmuche grounde about the Sepulchre as the thonge
wille stretche vnto. For so muche ground thincke thei shall the deade haue
in another worlde. At the thirtieth daye thei ende their mourning.

Certaine of the Tartarres, professing the name of Christe, yet farre from
his righteousnes: when their parentes waxe aged, to haste their death,
crame them with gobins of fatte. When thei die thei burne them to pouldre,
whiche thei reserue as a precious Iewelle, to strawe vppon their meate
euery daie. But to declare with what solempnitie and ioifulnes thei sette
vp their newe Kynge, aftre the death of tholde: because it ware to longe a
thyng, bothe for the reader and writer to set out at length, I will shewe
you in brief theffecte.

Abrode in the fieldes, in a faire plaine ordenary for the purpose: all the
Dukes, Erles, Barons, Lordes, and the reste of the nobilitie, together with
the people of the whole kyngdome, do assemble. Then take thei hym, to whom
the croune is due, either by succession, or by election. And when thei haue
set hym vp in a throne of Golde: thei all fall doune on their knees, and
together with one voice crie out a loude, aftre this maner. We require the,
yea, we will and commaunde the, to take the rule and gouernaunce of vs. He
answereth, if ye will haue me doe so, then must ye of necessitie be redy to
do whatsoeuer I commaunde ye. To come when I calle ye, to go whether so
euer I sende ye, to slea whom so euer I commaunde ye, without staieng or
stackering. And to put the whole kingdome and rule in my handes, when thei
haue aunswered, we are content: Saieth he againe, from hencefurthe then the
speache of my mouth, shalbe my swearde. To this the people yealde with
greate shoutes, and reioisynges. In the meane while the princes and the
nobles, taking the king out of his throne, spread abrode on the grounde a
piece of felte: vpon the whiche, thei cause hym in simple sorte to sitte
doune, and thus saie to hym. Looke vp, and remembre GOD aboue the. And now
looke doune also, and behold this felt vndre the. If thou gouerne welle,
thou shalte haue all euen as thou wouldest wisshe it. But if contrary wise,
thou shalt so be broughte doune againe, and so nighe be bereued of all:
that thou shalte not haue so muche, as this poore felte left the, whervpon
thou sittest. This ones saied, thei sette in to hym, of all his wiues the
dierest derlyng. And liftyng vp the felte alofte, haile hym by the name of
Emperour, and her by the name of Empresse. Then, come there presentes
streight from al countries, and peoples of his dominion: and all the
Threasoures that the kyng, his predecessour lefte, are brought him. Of the
whiche he giueth giftes to al the princes and high estates: commaundyng the
reste to be kepte for himself, and so dissolueth the Parlament as it ware.

In his hande and power is then altogether, no manne can: or though he can,
he dare not saie this is myne, or this is his. No man maie dwelle in any
part of the lande, but in that wherevnto he is appoincted. The Emperour
hymself appoincteth the Dukes: the Dukes, the Millenaries: the Millenaries,
the Centurianes: and they the Disniers: and the Disniers the residewe. The
seale that he vseth hath this superscription. GOD in heauen, and Chutchuth
Cham in earth, the force of God, and Emperour of all menne. He hath fiue
armies of greate multitude and force: and fiue chiefteines, by whom he
subdueth all that stande against hym. He hymself neuer speaketh to any
foreine ambassadours, nor admitteth them to his presence, as is aboue
saied: excepte bothe thei and their giftes (without the whiche specially
thei maie not come) bee purified by the ordenarie women. The Kyng
aunswereth by another mannes mouthe. And the persone by whome he
aunswereth, be he neuer so honourable, for the tyme that he becommeth the
kynges mouthe, kneleth on his knees and giueth so diligent care, that he
swarueth not from the Kyng in one woorde. For it is not lawefull for any
manne, to chaunge the kynges woordes: ne for any man in any wise, to replie
against suche sentence as he giueth. He neuer drincketh in open presence,
but some body first sing to hym, or plaie vpon some instrumente of
Musicque.

The gentlemen and menne of honour when thei ride, haue a phannell borne
afore them, on a Iauelines ende, to kiepe awaie the Sonne. And as it is
saied, the women likewise. These ware the maners and facions of the
Tartarres, for a two hundred yeres paste.

The Georgians, whom the Tartarres aboute the same tyme did subdue: ware
Christians, aftre the fourme of the Greke Churche. Thei ware neighbours to
the Persians. Their dominions stretched out a great length, from Palestine
in Iewrie to the mounteignes called Caspij. Thei had eightene Bishopries:
and one Catholicque: that is to saie, one generall bishoppe, whiche was to
them, as our Metropolitane to vs. At the firste thei ware subiecte to the
Patriarche of Antioche. Menne of greate courage and hardinesse. Thei all
shaued their crounes: the Laietie square, the Clercques rounde. Their women
(certeine of theim) had the ordre of Knighthode, and ware trained to the
warres. The Georgianes when thei ware sette, ordered, and raunged in the
fielde, and ware at poinct to ioyne the batteill: vsed to drincke of a
gourdfull of strong wine, aboute the bigguenes of a mannes fiste. And to
sette vpon their ennemies: muche amended in courage.

Their Clercques, whiche we calle the Spiritualtie, mighte vse bothe Simonie
and vsurie at their wille. There was continuall hatred betwixte Tharmenians
and them. For the Armenians ware also Christians, before the Tartarres had
subdued the Georgianes and them. But thei differed in many thinges, from
the belief and facions of the true Churche. Thei knewe no Christemas daie,
no vigilles, nor the fowre quartre festes, whiche we call Embryng dales.
Thei fasted not on Easter euen, because (saie thei), that Christ rose that
daie aboute euen tide. Vpon euerie Saturdaie, betwixte Easter and
Whitsontide, thei did eate flesshe. Thei ware greate fasters, and beganne
their Lente thre wekes afore vs: and so streightly fasted it, that vpon the
Wednesdaie and Fridaie, thei neither eate any kinde of fisshe, ne aughte
wherin was wine, or oile. Belieuing that he that drancke wine on those twoo
daies: synned more then if he had bene at the stewes with a whore. On the
Monedaie thei absteined from all maner of meate. On Tewsdaie and Thursdaie,
thei did eate but one meale. Wedensdaie and Fridaie, nothyng at al.
Saturdaie and Sondaie, thei eate flesshe and made lustie chiere. Throughe
their whole Lente, no manne said Masse but on Saturdaies and Sondaies. Nor
yet on the Fridaies throughout the whole yere: for thei thought then, that
thei brake their fast. Thei admitted to the houseale, aswell children of
two monethes olde, as all other indifferently. When thei went to Masse,
thei vsed to put no watre in the wine. Thei absteined from Hares flesshe,
Beaws flesshe, Crowes, and suche other as the Grekes did, and Iewes do.
Their Chalices ware of Glasse, and of Tree. Some said Masse without either
albe or vestement, or any maner suche ornament. Some onely with
thornamentes of Deacon or Subdeacon. Thei ware all busie vsurers, and
Simonites: bothe spirituall and Temporall, as the Georgianes ware. Their
priestes studied Sothesaieng and Nigromancie. Their Spiritualtie vsed
Iunckettyng oftener then the Laietie.

Thei maried, but aftre the death of the wife, it was not lawefull for the
housebande to marie againe, nor for the wife, aftre the death of the
housebande. If the wife ware a whore, the Bisshoppe gaue hym leaue to put
her awaie, and marie another. As for the fire of Purgatorie thei knewe
nothing of it. Thei denied also verie stifly, that there ware two natures
in Christe. The Georgianes saied that thei swarued from the truthe of
Christes Religion, in thirtie poinctes or articles.


¶ The xi. Chapitre.

¶ Of Turcquie, and of the maners, Lawes, and Ordenaunces of the Turcques.

The lande, whiche now is called Turcquie: hath on Theaste Armenia the more,
and ronneth endelong to the Sea of the Cilicians: hauyng on the Northe, the
Sea named Euxinus. There are in it many countries conteined. As Lichaonia,
whose heade citie is Iconium. Cappadocia with her heade citie, named
Cesarea. Isauria, whiche hath for the chief citie Seleucia. Licia, whiche
now is called Briquia. Ionia: now called Quisquoun, in the whiche standeth
Ephesus. Paphlagonia, and in it Germanopolis. And Leuech: that hath for the
heade Citie Trapezus. All this countrie that now is called Turcquie, is not
enhabited by one seuerall nacion, but there be in it Turcques, Grekes,
Armenians, Saracenes, Iacobites, Nestorians, Iewes and Christians. Whiche
liue for the moste parte, acording to the Tradicions and Ordenaunces, that
Mahomet the counterfeict Prophete, gaue vnto the Saracenes (a people of
Arabie) the yere of our Lorde and Sauiour Iesus Christe. vi. hundred and.
xxix. A manne whome I can not telle whether I maye calle an Arabiane or a
Persian. For ther be aucthorities of writers on either behaulfe. His father
was an idolastre aftre the maner of the heathen. His mother an Ismalite
leaning to the lawe of the Iewes. And whilest in his childehode, his mother
taught him aftre one sorte, and his father aftre another: thei printed in
hym suche a doubtfull belief, that when he came to age he cleaued to
neither. But as a manne of subtyle and guilefull witte, aftre what time he
had bene longe conuersaunte amongest menne of the Christian religion: he
draue a drifte, deuised out of both lawes (the olde and the newe) how he
mighte notably enfecte the worlde.

He said the Iewes did wickedly to denie Christe to be borne of the virgine
Mary, seinge the prophetes (men of great holinesse, and enspired with the
holy ghost) had foreshewed the same, and warned men of many yeres passed to
looke for him. Contrariwyse he said to the Christians thei ware very fonde
to beleue that Iesus, so dierly beloued of God, and borne of a virgine,
would suffre those vilanies and tormentes of the Iewes.

Martinus Segonius Nouomontanus, in his booke of the Sepulchre of Christe
our king, writeth that the Turkes, and Saracenes by an auncient opinion
receiued from Machomet: do laughe Christian menne to skorne, that seke
thether with so greate reuerence. Sayeng that Christ the prophet of all
prophetes endewed with the spirite of God, and voyde of all earthly
corruption: had there no sepulchre in very diede, for that he being a
spirituall body conceiued by the breathe of the holy ghost coulde not
suffre, but should come againe to be iudge of the Gentiles: This saieth
Segonius, and many other thinges sounding to like effecte: whiche the
Mahometeines are wonte to throwe out against the Christians, bothe
foolisshely and wickedly. When this counterfeicte prophet had saused his
secte with these wicked opinions: he gaue them his lawe, and sorte of
religion. Against the whiche lesse any man of righte iudgemente should
aftrewarde write or dispute (as against a pestilent and filthie perswasion)
he wrote a lawe in his Alcorane that it shoulde be deathe to as many as
should reason or dispute vppon it. Wherby he euidentlie declared, that ther
was nothing godly or goodly therin. For why shoulde he elles haue so raked
it vp in the ashes, and forbidden it to be examined: so that the people
coulde neuer come to knowledge what maner of thinge it is that thei beleue
in. In the giuing of his lawe, he vsed muche the counselle and helpe of the
moncke Sergius: of the wicked secte of the Nestorianes. And to the ende it
might please the more vniuersally: he patched it vp together with peces of
all maner of sectes. He thoughte it good to sette out Christe with the
beste, affirminge that he was a manne excelling in all holinesse and
vertue. Yea he extolled him to a more heigth then was appliable to the
nature of man, calling him the woorde, the spirite, the soule of GOD, borne
out of a virgines wombe, whome he also with many wondrefull praises
magnified. He confirmed with his consente, the miracles, and story of the
gospel, as farre as it varieth not from his Alcorane.

The Godspelles said he ware corrupte by the disciples of the Apostles. And
ther fore it behoued his Alcorane to be made, for to correcte and amende
them. Thus fauning into fauour with the Christians, he would haue bene
christened of Sergius. Then to procure, and moue other also to fauour his
procedinges: he denied with the Sabellians the Trinitie. With the Manicheis
he made two goddes. With Eunomius, he denied that the father and the sonne
ware equal. With Macedonius he said that the holy ghoste was a creature, or
substaunce created. With the Nicholaites He allowed the hauinge of many
wiues at ones. He allowed also the olde testament. Althoughe sayd he, it
were in certain places faultie. And these fondenesses did he beswiete with
a wondrefull lure of the thinges that menne in this lyfe mooste desire.
Lettinge louse to as many as helde of him, the bridle of al lechery and
luste. And for that cause doth this contagious euil sprede it self so wide
into innumerable contries. So that if a man at this day compare the nombre
of them that are by him seduced, with the other that remaine in the
doctrine of faithe: he shal easeli perceiue the great oddes, ware it but
herin. That wher Europe alone, (and not al that by a great deale) standeth
in the belief of Christe: almoste all Asie, and Aphrique, yea and a greate
pece of Europe standeth in the Turkisshe belief of Mahomete.

The Saracenes that firste receiued the brainesicke wickednesse of this
countrefeicte prophete, dwelte in that parte of Arabia, that is called
Petrea: wher it entrecommuneth with Iewry on the one side, and with Egipt
on the other. So named of Serracum, a place nere vnto the Nabatheis, or
rather as thei woulde haue it them selues, of Sara, Abrahams wife.

Wherupon thei yet sticke faste in this opinion, that thei onely of al men
are the lawfull heires of Goddes beheste. Thei gaue themselues to tilthe,
to cattle, and to the warres. But the greater parte to the warres. And
therefore at what time they ware hired of Heraclius in the warres againste
the Persians: when he had gotten the victory, and thei perceiued them
selues to be defrauded by him: kindled with the angre of the villanye thei
had done vnto them, by the counsell and persuasion of Mahomet (who tooke
vppon him to be their captaine) thei forsoke Heraclius. And going into
Siria, enuaded Damasco. Wher when thei had encreased them selues bothe in
nombre, and purueiaunce necessary for them, thei entred into Egipte. And
subdued firste that: then Persis, then Antioche, and then Ierusalem. Thus
their power and fame daily so encreaced, and grewe: that men muche feared,
that any thing afterwarde shoulde be able to resiste them. In the meane
season, the Turkes: a ferce and a cruell people, of the nacion of the
Scithiens, driuen out by their neighbours fro the mountaines called Caspij,
came downe by the passage of the mounte Caucasus, firste into Asia the
lesse, then into Armenia, Media, and Persis. And by stronge hande wanne all
as they came. Against these the Saracenes went forth as to defende the
bordres of their gouernaunce. But forasmuche as this newecome power was to
harde for them, the Saracenes within a while felle into such despaire of
their state: that vppon condicion that the other would receiue Mahometes
belief: thei ware content thei shold reigne felowlike together with them,
in Persis. Wherto when thei had agreed, it was harde to saye whether of the
peoples had receiued the greater dammage. The Saracenes, in yelding to them
the haulf right of their kingdome: or the other, whiche for coueteousnes
thereof yelded them selues to so rancke, and wicked a poyson of all vertue
and godlynes.

One bonde of belief then so coupled and ioyned them: that for a space it
made to them no matier whether ye called them all by one name, Saracenes,
or Turkes. But nowe as ye se, the name of the Turkes hath gotten the bettre
hande, and the other is out of remembraunce. This people vseth moe kindes
of horsemen then one. Thei haue Thimarceni, that is to saye Pencioners,
aboute a foure skore thousande. These haue giuen vnto them by the kinge,
houses, villages, and Castles euery one as he deserueth, in the steade of
his wages or pencion. And thei attende vppon the Sensacho, or capitaine of
that quarter, wher their possessions lye. At this daye the Turkes are
deuided into two armies: the one for Asie, and the other for Europe. And
either hath a chiefteine, at whose leading thei are. These chiefteines in
their tongue be called Bassay. Ther are also another sorte muche lyke to
our aduenturers, that serue withoute wages, called Aconizie. And these euer
are spoiling afore when the campe is yet behynde. The fiueth parte of their
butine is due vnto the king. And these are aboute a fourty thousande. Their
thirde sorte of horsemen is deuided into Charippos Spahiglauos, and
Soluphtaros. The beste, and worthiest of these, are the Charippie: of an
honourable ordre of knighthode, as it ware for the kinges body. And those
be euer about him, to the nombre of eyghte hundred, all Scythians and
Persians, and elles of none other kinde of menne. These, when niede is,
being in the sighte of the kinge: fight notably, and do wondrefull feates
on horsebacke. Spahy, and Soluphtary be those whiche haue bene at the
kinges bringing vp from their childehode, to serue his filthy abhominacion.
And when thei are come to mannes state, thei marye at the kynges pleasure:
And be enriched both with dowery of their wife, and a stipende. These for
the moste parte serue for embassadours, deputies, lieutenauntes and suche
other dignities, and are nexte vnto the kinge on bothe sides of him, when
he goeth any whether as a garde. Thei are in nombre a thousande and thre
hundred.

Among the footemen are three sortes, Ianizarie, these be chosen all the
Empire ouer, of xii. yeres of age, or there aboute, by certein that haue
Commission for the purpose: And are for a space enstructed in the feactes
of warre, in commune schooles. And then aftrewarde are thei chosen into
souldie, and haue giuen them a shorter garmente, and a white cappe, with a
tarfe tourned vpwarde. Their weapon is a Targette, a Curtilase, and a Bowe.
Their office is to fortifie the campe, and to assaulte cities. Thei are in
nombre aboue twentie thousande.

The seconde sorte are called Asappi, and are all footemen of light
harnesse, weaponed with swearde, target, and a kinde of long Iauelines,
wherewith thei slea the horses of their enemies, in the skirmishe and
battaile. These, to be knowen fro the Ianizaries, weare redde cappes. These
are appoincted in nombre, accordyng as the case shall require. But thei are
euer at the leaste fouretie thousande. When the warres are finished, for
the whiche thei ware hired: these are no longer in wages. Tharmie roialle
hath about two hundred thousande armed menne, beside a greate rable of
footemen aduenturers, that take no wages, and suche other as be called out
of Garrisons. And amonge these, Pioners and Cookes, Carpenters, Armourers,
and suche other as thei must niedes haue to make the waye, wher the place
is combresome: to dresse victualles, to amende harnesse, to make bredges
ouer floudes, to trenche aboute their ennemies, to plante battries, make
Ladders, and suche other thinges necessarie for the siege. Ther foloweth
the armie also, sondrye sortes of money Masters: some for lone, some for
exchaunge, some to buy thinges. And sondrie sortes of occupiers, such as be
thought nedeful in such cases.

But there is nothing in all that nacion more to be marueiled at, then their
spiedinesse in doeyng of thinges: their constantnes in perilles, and their
obedience and precise obseruinge of all commaundementes. For the least
fault, of goeth the heade. Thei passe ouer raginge floudes, mounteignes and
rockes: roughes and plaines, thicke and thinne, if thei be commaunded. Not
hauing respecte to their lyfe, but to their rulers. No men maie awaie with
more watche, no men with more hongre. Among them is no mutinyng, no
vproures, no sturres. In theyr fyght thei vse no cries, not shoutes, but a
certeine fiercenes of brayeng. Thei kepe suche precise scilence in the
night, through out their campe: that thei wil rather suffre such as they
haue taken prisoners, to run their waie, then to make any sturre. Of all
the peoples at this daie, thei onely doe warre, acording to the ordre of
armies. So that no manne niedeth to meruayle how it cometh that no people
this two hundred yeare and aboue, haue had like successe vnto them. Yea, it
may truely be sayd, that excepte it be by some plague or murreyn, or
discorde among them selues, they can not be subdued. The apparail that the
souldiours do vse, is most comely and honeste. In their sadles and bridles,
there is neither curiositie, ne yet superfluitie. No man emong them weareth
his Armour, but when niede is to fight. They carry their harnesse behynde
theim, at their backes. They vse neither banner, standerde, ne flaggue: but
certein Iauelins that haue streamynge out fro the toppe, diuers coloured
thriedes, by the whiche euery hande knoweth his capiteine. Thei vse a
dromme and a fiphe, to assemble their Bandes, and to sturre them to the
batteile. When the batteile is done, all the armie is presented to the
Regestour (whiche is some one of the nobles) bothe that it maye bee knowen
who is slain, and what nombre: and that newe may be entred in their places.
In all assemblies and mietinges, feaste, or other: thei praie for their
souldiours, and menne of warre. But specially aboue all other, for those
that haue suffred death for the commune quarelle of their countrie: calling
them happie, fortunate, and blessed, that thei yelded not vp their liues at
home, amidde the lamentacions and bewailynges, of their wiues and children,
but loste them, abrode, amonge the shoutes of their enemies, and the
ratling of the Harneis, and Launces. The victories of their forefathers and
eldres, thei put into Balade, and sing theim with greate honour and
praises: for that thei thinke the courages of the souldiours and menne of
warre be muche quickened, and kindled thereby.

Their dwelling houses are communely of timbre and claie, very fewe of
stone: for of them are the noble mennes houses their temples, and Batthes.
And yet are there amonge the communes, men able of them self alone, to set
furthe an whole armie, furnisshed at all poinctes. But because thei are
naturally giuen to sparing and to abhorre all sumptuousenesse, embrasing a
lowe and simple state: thei wel beare this voluntarie pouertie, and rude
homelinesse. For this cause also, doe thei not set by any kinde of Painters
Imagerie. As for the other imagerie of coruen grauen, or molten worke, thei
do so hate and abhorre: that they call vs Christians for delighting so
muche in them, verie Idolatours and Image worshippers. And do not onely so
calle vs, but wil earnestly argue, that we are so in dede. Thei vse no
Seales to their Lettres, of what sorte so euer thei be, the kynges or
other. But they credite the matier, assone as thei haue red the
superscription, or heard the name of the sender. Thei occupie no belles,
nor suffre not the Christianes that dwelle among them to do. Thei game not
for money, or any valewe elles. And if it fortune that any manne be founde
to do, in many sundrie wise thei reuile him, and baite him with shames and
reproche.

No man among them, of what degree or dignitie so euer he be: requireth
forme chaire, stoole, or other kinde of seate to sitte vpon. But foldinge
bothe him selfe and his clothes, aftre a mooste comely sorte: rucketh downe
vpon the grounde, not muche vnlike to the sitting of our gentlewomen ofte
times here in Englande. The table wherupon thei eate, is for the mooste
parte of a Bullockes hide, or a Hartes skinne. Not dressed, but in the
heare, facioned rounde, beyng a fowre or fiue spanne ouer, and so set
rounde about on the bordre, or verge, with ringlettes of iron: that putting
a couple of stringes throughe the ringes, it maye be drawen together, and
shutte and opened like a purse. House, or Churche, or any other place wher
they entende to sitte, no man entreth with his shoes on. For it is compted
a very dishonest and vnmanerly facion, to sitte shoed. Wherfore they vse a
maner of slippe shooes, that may lightly be putte of and on. The place
where thei sitte, either at home, or at Churche, is in some place matted,
and in some place ouerspred with course woollen Carpette. And some places
also, either for the lowenes, moistenes, or vncleanelinesse therof are
plancked with boorde.

The garmentes aswell of the menne, as the women, are large and longe, and
open afore: that thei may the more honestlie and couertly hide all, when
nature craveth to be eased. And in doeyng those niedes, thei take greate
hiede, that their face be not into the Southe, as it is when thei praye. As
also that thei discouer no priuie parte, that any myghte fortune to see.
The menne make water sitting, aswell as the women. For if a man amonges
them, ware sene to make water standing: he should be iudged of all, a
foole, or an hertique.

From wine (as from a prouoker of al sinne and vnclennesse) thei absteine by
their lawe. And yet eate they the Grapes, and drincke muste. Thei also
forbeare to eate any thinge, that commeth of the Hogge: or any thinge elles
that dieth of sickenesse, or by aduenture vnslain. But any other thinges,
being mannes meate, thei refuse not to eate. Thei worshippe the Fridaie,
laieng all labour and businesse aparte, with as greate solempnitie and
deuocion, as we doe the Sondaie, or as the Iewes doe the Sabboth daie. In
euery citie there is one principall or head Churche. In the whiche vppon
the Fridaie at aftre Noone, thei all assemble together. And aftre solempne
praiers, heare a sermone. Thei acknowledge one God, to whome thei make no
like, nor equalle: and Mahomet to be his trustie and welbeloued, Prophete.
All the Saracenes are bound to praie fiue times on the daie, with their
faces toward the South. And before thei so do, to the ende thei maie be
cleane from all filthe of bodie: to wasshe them selues toppe and taile,
heade, eares, eyes, nose, mouthe, armes, handes, bealy, colions, legges and
fiete. Specially, if he haue bene late at the soile with a woman or stouped
on his taile to vnburden his bealie. Except he haue some lette of iournie,
or sickenesse. But if he lacke watre to doe this withall (as that sieldome
or neuer can happen, for that thei haue in all cities, bathes, ordenarie
for the purpose) thei supplie the defaulte with the moulde of fresshe
cleane earthe, wherewith thei rubbe ouer their whole bodies. Who is so
polluted in any maner wise: suffreth no man before this clensing, to speake
with hym, or to see him, if it be possible. Euery yere for the space of
fiue wiekes continually together, thei faste al daie as presicely as is
possible, bothe from meate, drincke and women. But aftre the sonne is ones
doune, till the next daie he riseth, thei neither spare eatyng ne
drinckyng, ne pressyng of pappes. In thende of their lente, and againe the
sixtieth daie aftre: Thei kiepe their passeouer or Easter, in remembraunce
of the Rambe shewed vnto Abraham, to be Sacrificed in the steade of his
sonne, and of a certaine nighte in the whiche thei doe beleue that the
Alcorane was giuen them from heauen.

Euery yere ones, the Saracenes also are bound of duetie to visite the house
of God, in the citie of Mecha: bothe to acknowledge their homage, and to
yelde vnto Mohomete his yerely honour at his Sepulchre there. The Saracenes
compelle no man to forsake his opinion or belief: ne yet labour so to
perswade any countrie to do. Although their Alcorane commaunde theim to
treade doune and destroie all menne of the contrary beliue yea them and
their prophetes. But through this sufferaunce, ther are to be founde
enhabiting in Turkie, peoples of all opinions, and beleue: euery man vsinge
suche kinde of worshippe to his God, as to his religion apperteineth. Their
priestes do not muche diffre from the commune people, nor yet their
churches from their dwelling houses. Yf thei knowe the Alcorane, and the
praiours and ceremonies or their lawe, it suffiseth. Thei are neither giuen
to contemplacion ne yet schole study. For why thei are not occupied with
any churche seruice or cure of soules. Sacramentes haue thei none, nor
reliques, nor halowinges of foutes, Aulters, and other necessaries. But
prouidinge for their wiues, their children, and householdes, thei occupie
their time in husbondrie, marchaundise, huntinge, or some other meane to
get the penie, and mainteyne their liuing, euen as the temporall men doe.
Ther is nothing forbidden them, nothing is for them vnlawfull. Thei be
neither burdoned with tillage, ne bondage. Thei be muche honoured of al
men, for that thei are skilfull in the ceremonies of the lawe, teache them
to other, and be the gouernours of the churches.

They haue many schooles and large, In the which great nombres are taught
the lawes there giuen by kinges, for the ciuile gouernance and defence of
the Realme. Of the whiche some are afterwarde sette fourth to be men of the
churche, and some to be temporalle officers. Their spiritualtie is deuided
into many and sondry sortes of religions. Of the whiche some liue in the
wooddes and wyldernes shonnyng all companye. Some kiepe open hospitalitie
in cities, and yet liue by almose them selues. These if they lacke meate to
refreshe the niedy straunger and pelligrine, yet at the least waie they
giue him herbour and lodgyng. Other, roumyng the cities vp and downe and
caryeng alway in bottles faire watre and fresshe, if any man be disposed to
drinke, vnasked they willingly proffre it him, and refuse not to take, if
he for their gentlenesse offre aught vnto them agayn. Otherwise they craue
nothyng, but in al their woordes, gesture, behauour, and diedes: shewe
theim selues aungelles raither then menne. And euery one of these hath one
knowledge or other, of difference from the reaste. The Saracenes or Turkes
are very precise executours of Iustice. Who so committeth bloudshed: hath
in like sorte his owne shedde againe. Taken in adultery, both parties are
streight without mercy stoned to deathe. Thei haue also a punisshement for
fornication, whiche is to the manne taken with the diede, foure score
ierkes or lasshes with a skourge. A thief for the first and the seconde
time, escapeth with so many stripes. But at the thirde time, hathe his
hande cut of, and at the fourthe his foote. He that endamageth any manne:
as the losse or hinderaunce shalbe valewed, so muste he of force
recompence. In claiming of goodes, or possessions, the claimer muste proue
by witnesse that the thing claimed is his: and the denier shalbe tried by
his othe. Witnesses they admitte none, but persones of knowen honestie, and
suche as mighte be belieued withoute an othe. Thei haue also certeine
spiefaultes ordinarilye appoincted (muche like to our Sompnours) that spie
in euery shiere for suche as be necligent, and let slippe suche oraisons
and seruice as thei be bounde to. Those if thei fortune to finde them: do
thei punishe aftre this maner. Thei hange a borde about their neckes, with
a great many of foxe tailes, and togginge them vp and downe the stretes:
all ouer the citie, thei neuer lette them go vntyll they haue compounded by
the purse. And in this also nothing vnlike to our Sompnours. It is lawfull
for no manne, beinge come to mannes state, to liue vnmaried. It is compted
amonge them as lawfull to haue iiii. wiues, as it is amonge vs to haue one.
Marie what soeuer is aboue this nombre (as thei may if thei liste, and be
able to kepe them, no degree excepted, but mother and sister, marie a
hundred) thei are not iudged so lawfulle. The children that thei haue bothe
by the one, and the other haue equalle porcion in the fathers enheritaunce.
Sauing that ii. women children are compted in porcion but for one man
childe. Thei haue not ii. of their wiues together in one house, ne yet in
one citie. For the busines, and disquietinges that might happen therby, but
euery wife in a seuerall towne. The housebandes haue libertye to put them
away thrise, and thrise to take them againe. But yet when he hath ones
putte her awaie, if any manne haue taken her, and she lust to abide with
hym, she maie.

Their women are moste honestlie appareiled. And vpon their heades doe vse a
certeine attire, not muche vnlike the veluet bonette of olde Englande:
wherof the one lappe so hangeth vppon whiche side semeth her good: that
when she is disposed to go out of the doores, or to come amongest menne
within the house, she maie hide therwith by and by her whole face, sauyng
her eyes.

The Saracenes woman, neuer dare shewe her self wher there is a company of
menne. To go to the marchate to occupy byeng or sellyng in any wise: is not
syttyng for their women. In the head church they haue a place farre a part
fro the men: so close that no manne canne looke into them. Into the which
notwithstandyng it is not laufull for euery mans wyfe to entre: but for the
nobilitie onely. Ne yet for them neyther, but on Friday, at the onely houre
of noone praier: whiche as I haue aforesayd, is kept amonge them high and
holy.

To see a man and a woman talke together ther, in the open strete or abrode:
is so straunge, and so vnwonte a thing, that in a whole yere it skante
happeneth ones. For a man to sitte with his wyfe in open sighte, or to ride
with any woman behinde him: amongest them ware a wondre. Maried couples
neuer dally together in the sighte of other, nor chide or falle out. But
the menne beare alwaies towarde the women a manly discrete sobrenes, and
the women, towarde them a demure womanlie reuerence. Greate menne, that
cannot alwaie haue their wiues in their owne eye, appoincte redgelinges, or
guelte menne to awaite vppon them. Whiche waite them in diede so narrowlye,
that it ware impossible for any man beside the housebande to speake with
the wyfe vnsene: or the wyfe by any stealthe to false her trouth and
honestie. Finally the Saracenes do so full and whole beleue their Mahomete
and his lawes: that thei doubte no whitte, but the kepers of them shall
haue euerlasting blessednesse. That is to saye, after their opinion, a
paradise of pleasure, a gardein plotte of delighte, full of swiete rindles
of Christalline watre. In whose botomes the grauelle, popleth like
glisteryng golde. The ayre alwaie so attempre and pure, that nothyng can be
more swiete, more pleasaunte, nor healthsome. The grounde couered and
garnisshed with natures Tapesserie, neither lacking any colour that
pleasaunte is to the eye, or sauour that maie delight the nose. Birdes
syngyng with suche armonie, as neuer mortalle eare heard. Briefly flowyng
in all pleasure that any harte can aftre thincke. Disshes for the mouthe,
of all deinties. All maner of Silkes, Veluettes, Purples, Skarlettes, and
other precious apparelle. Godly younge damoselles, with graie rowlyng eyes,
and skinne as white as Whales bone, softe as the Silke, and breathed like
the Rose, and all at their becke. Vesselles of siluer and golde. Angelles
for their Butlers that shall bryng theim Milke in Goblettes of golde, and
redde wine in siluer. But contrariewise, thei threaten vnto the breakers of
them, helle, and euerlastyng destruccion. This thei also beleue, that be a
manne wrapped in neuer so many synnes, yet if at his death, he beleue vpon
God, and Machomete, he shalbe saued.


¶ The xii. Chapitre.

¶ Of the Christians, of their firste commyng vp, their Ceremonies, and
  ordenaunces.

Christe Iesu, the eternalle and verie sonne of thalmightie father, the
seconde persone in the holie inseparable, equalle, and euerlastyng
Trinitie: Of a sette purpose, and spiritualle secrete, not reuealed from
the beginning of tyme, and aboue mannes capacitie: was by the meane of the
holy ghost, conceiued and borne manne. In Iewrie, of a Virgine, of the
stocke of Dauid, a thousande fiue hundred, and twentie yeres gone
[Footnote: It appereth by this place that this was written xxxv. yeres
gone.]. To sette vs miserable, and vnhappie menne on foote againe, whiche
ware in Adam and Eue, by the sinne of disobedience ouerthrowen. And to
bryng vs againe, vnto our heauenlie natiue countrie, from the whiche we
haue by so many ages, for that presumpcion bene banished. Finally, to
repaire and supplie in heauen againe ones, the ruine and fal of those
spirites, whiche a space afore our creacion, ware thurste doune fro thence.
For the whiche purpose, we chiefly ware made. This Iesus, from thirtie
yeres of age, vntill thirtie and fowre (in the whiche, throughe the
maliciousnes of the Iewes, he suffred on the galowe tree) traueillyng all
Iewrie ouer: first moued and exhorted the Iewes, and then other peoples,
from the olde Lawe of Moses, and their wicked Image worshippe, to his newe
ordenaunce and trade. And as many as would folowe, and doe aftre hym, he
called theim his scholers or disciples. Out of the whiche, he gaue vnto
xij. that he had specially chosen, Commission aftre his death (when he had
appered to them on liue again, as he had forwarned them that he would) to
go as Legates, or Embassatours into the whole world, and to preache vnto
all creatures, what so euer thei had sene or learned of him. Simon Petre
(to whom longe afore he had surrendred the gouernaunce and chiefteinshippe
of his Church, as in reuercion aftre him) when aftre the comyng of the holy
ghoste some wente into one coste, and some into another, euery manne his
waie, as thei ware allotted and commaunded: came first vnto Antioche. And
there setting vp the first and chief chaire of the Churche, kepte a
counsaille with the other Apostles, whiche often tymes came to hym. In this
Counsaille among other thinges it was decreed, that asmany as should
receiue, and cleaue vnto the doctrine, and righte perswasion of Christes
godlines: should fro thence furthe be called Christianes. This Seate of
superioritie, beyng afterwarde translated to Rome: bothe he and his
Successours, tooke it for their chief charge and businesse, to put the rude
and rawe secte of their Christe, and the folowers of the same, in some good
ordre and trade of gouernaunce. Bothe aftre the manor of Moses Lawe (whiche
Christe came not to breake, but to consummate and finishe) and the state of
the Romain gouernaunce, the Greke, and Egipcian: and also by paterne of the
Ceremonies, obseruances, lawes, and ordenaunces Ecclesiasticalle and
Temporalle, of many other peoples: But specially aftre the doctrine, of
Christe Iesu, and the woorkyng of the holy ghoste, to bring them in to
frame and facion. When thei ware entred in the mattier: As thei sawe that
men not emong the Hebrues alone, but emong other peoples also, ware diuided
into Ecclesiasticalle and Temporalle Spiritualtie and Laietie: and eche of
them in mooste goodly wise, into their dignities and degrees (The Romain
Emperour then being gouernour of the whole worlde alone) to haue Consulles,
Fathers or Senatours: at whose becke all thinges ware deuised and doone:
And in the residewe of the earthe to bee many Kynges, many Dukes, Erles,
Presidentes, and Deputies of countries, and their Lieutenauntes:
Maresshalles of the fielde, and highe Conestables for the communes,
Pretours or Prouostes, Standerdbearers roialle, Centurianes, and Disners,
Seriauntes, Conestables, Collectours, Serueiours, Porters, Scribes,
Listers, and many other persones without office, bothe menne and women. And
in the Temples of their Goddes, a Sacrificer roialle, whiche is to saie in
effecte, a highe Prieste of the dignitie of a kyng. Archeflamines, Flamines
of honour, and other Flamines inferiour and laste in degree their Priestes.
And by like ordre emong the Hebrues: an highe Bisshoppe, and interiour
Priestes, Leuites, Nazareis, candle quenchers, commaunders of Spirites,
Churche Wardeines, and Syngers, whiche wee calle Chantours aftre the
Frenche. And among the Grekes: Capiteines, or heades ouer a thousands, ouer
an hundred, ouer fiuetie, ouer tenne, and ouer fiue. And that there ware
yet beside these, bothe emong the Hebrues, and the Romaines, many couentes,
or compaignies of menne and women religious. As Sadduceis, Esseis, and
Phariseis emong the Hebrues: Salios, Diales, and Vestalles, emong the
Romaines: The moste holy Apostles did all consente, that Petre, and thei
that should folowe him in the seate of Rome, should for euermore be called
Papa. As who would saie, father of fathers, the vniuersalle,
Apostollicalle, moste holy, and moste highe bisshoppe. And that he should
at Rome be Presidente ouer the vniuersalle Churche, as the Emperour there,
was ruler of the vniuersall worlde. And to matche the Consulles (which ware
euer twaine) thei appoincted fowre head Fathers, in the Greke named
Patriarches, one at Constantinople, another at Antioche, a thirde at
Alexandrie, and the fowrthe at Hierusalem. In the place of the Senatours,
thei took the Cardinalles. To matche their kynges, whiche had three Dukes
at commaundemente, thei deuised Primates: To whom ware subiecte thre
Archebishoppes. So that the Archebishoppe or Metropolitane, standeth in the
place of a Duke. For as the Duke had certein Erles or Barones at his
commaundemente: so haue the Archbisshoppes, other inferiour Bisshopes at
theirs, which also by reason muste countreuaile an Erle. The Bisshoppes
coadiutor or Suffragane, came into the Presidentes place. Thordenarie into
the Deputies, then did the Officialle matche with the Mareshalle. And with
the high conestable for the communes, the Bisshoppes Chauncelour. And for
the Pretour or Prouoste, thei sette vp an Archedeacon. In stede of the
Centuriane, was a Deane appoincted. And for the Disnere, the Persone or
Vicare. For the Aduocates, crepte in the Parisshe Prieste, Soule Prieste,
Chaunterie Prieste, Morowe Masse Prieste, and suche other. The Deacon
standeth for the Surueiour. The Subdeacon for the Serieaunte. For the two
Conestables, came in the two Commaunders of Spirites, called Exorcistæ in
the Greke. The Collectours office, was matched with the Churche wardeines.
The Porter became the Sexteine. The Chauntour, scribe, and Lister, kiepe
stille their name. The Acholite, whiche we calle Benet and Cholet,
occupieth the roume of Candlebearer.

All these by one commune name, thei called Clerj, of the Greke woorde
Cleros, that is to saie, a Lotte. For that thei ware firste from among the
people, so alloted vnto God. Thereof cometh our terme Clerque, and his
cosine Clergie. Neuerthelesse, this name Clergie, was not so commune vnto
all: but that it siemed moste proprely to reste in the seuen degrees, that
the Pope of Rome vsed for his Ministres, when he saied Masse in persone him
self. That is to saie, the Bishoppe, the Priest, the Deacon, and subdeacon,
the Acholite, and the Chauntour. Vnto euery of these gaue thei in the
churche their seueralle dignities officies, and appareile.

To the Bishoppe was giuen aucthoritie, to ordeine and make other Clerckes.
To enueile virgines, and to hallow them. [Sidenote: That is to saie, to
make Nunnes.] To consecrate their likes, and their superiours also. To laie
handes vpon them. To confirme and Bisshoppe children. To hallowe Churches.
To put Priestes from their Priesthode: and to degrade theim, when thei
deserue it. To kiepe Conuocacions and Sinodes. To make holy oile: to
hallowe the ornamentes and vess [Transcriber's note: gap in text about 3-4
words long. vess(els)...?] And to do also other thinges, that the inferiour
Priestes doe. To enstructe those that be newly come to the faithe. To
Christiane, to make the Sacramente of the Altare, and to giue it to other.
To absolue the repentaunte of their sinnes, and to fettre the stubberne
more streighte. To shewe furthe the Gospelle. To enioyne all Priestes to
shaue their heades in the croune, like a circle of iiij. fingres brode,
after the maner of the Nazareis. To kepe their heare shorte, to weare no
bearde. And to liue chaste for euer.

Their liuyng onely to rise of the firste fruictes, tenthes, and offringes:
and vttrely to be voide of all temporalle and Laiemennes cares and
businesse. To be honestlie appareiled, and accordyngly to vse their passe
and conuersacion. Onely to serue God and the churche. Diligently, to plye
the reading of holy scripture, that they themselues mighte perfectly knowe
all thinges perteining to Christian religion, wherin thei are bound to
enstructe other. The companies or couentes of religious, aswel men as
women: are Benedictines, Preachers, Franciscanes, Augustines, Barnardines,
Anthonines, Iohannites, Cisternois, and innumerable other. Whiche al haue
their habite, and maner of liuing by them selfe: acordinge to the rule that
echeone priuately prescribed to them selues. And liued for the moste parte
a solitary life, professing chastitie, pouretie, and perpetualle obedience.
And for their solitarines the Greke called them Monarchi. Some of these
haue for the heades Abbotes, some Priours: whiche are either subiecte to
the Pope onely, or to the bishoppes. Al these vsed coules, much aftre one
facion, but in colour diuers, and abstained fro fleshe. The bisshoppes when
thei say masse, haue xv. holy garmentes, aftre the maner of Moyses lawe,
for the perfection of them. His boatewes, his Amice, an Albe, a Girdle, a
Stole, a Maniple, a Tunicle of violette in graine fringed, his gloues,
ringe, and chesible or vestimente, a Sudari, a cope, a mitre and a crosse
staffe. [Marginal Note: The Latine calleth it a shiepe hooke.] And a chaire
at the Aultares ende, wherein he sitteth. Of the whiche, vi. are commune to
euery inferiour prieste: the Amice, the Albe, the girdle, the stole, the
Maniple, and the vestiment. But ouer, and aboue all these the Pope, by the
gifte of Constantine the greate, hath libertie to weare al the ornamentes
Imperialle. That is to saye a kirtle of skarlet, a robe of Purple, a
sceptre, and a close corone. With the whiche aftre he hath rauisshed him
selfe in the vestrie, vppon solempne feastes, when he entendeth to do
masse: he commeth forth to the aultare, hauing on the right side a prieste,
on the lefte side a Deacon, a Subdeacon going before him with a booke faste
shutte, two candle bearers, and an encensour with the censoure in his hande
smoking. When he is comen to the griessinges, the stayers, or foote of the
aultare: putting of his mitre, he maketh open confession [Marginal note:
That is, he saieth confiteor.] of his sinnes together with his company.

That done he goeth vp to the aultare, openeth the booke, lieng vpon the
lefte corner of the same, kysseth it, and so procedeth in the
Solempnisacion of the Masse. The subdeacon readeth the epistle, and the
Deacon the godspelle. Priestes of al degrees, are charged to prayse God
seuen times a daie, and to praye with ordenarie oraisons. Towarde the
eueninge, euensonge: and compline more late. Matines in the morninge, and
incontinente prime, and howres, in ordre of tyme, as thei stande in ordre
[Footnote: Hora prima, tertia, sexta, nona.] of name. And this humbly
before the aultare, if he maye conueniently, with his face towarde the
Easte. The pater nostre and the Crede, said thei, onely at the beginning of
their seruice, as the commune people do nowe a daies also. Saincte Ierome,
at the vrgent request of Pope Damasus, parted out the Psalmes acording to
the daies of the wieke. And appoincted for euery houre a porcion of propre
psalmes. For the nighte houres on the holy daye, ix. and on the working
daye, xii. For laudes in the morning, v. for euensonge as many, and for
eche other houre but thre. He also ordeined the Epistles, Godspelles, and
other seruice, vsed to be red out of the olde or newe testament, in maner
altogether, sauing the note. The Anthemes (which Ambrose, Bysshoppe of
Millayne wrate, and endited) Damasus put ordre that the quiere should sing
side aftre side, and added to euery psalmes ende. Gloria patri, &c. The
lessons and Himpnes that go before eche one of the howres did the
counceiles of Thoulouse and Agathone aucthorise. The orisons, the grailes,
the tractes, the Alleluya, thoffertorie, the Communions in the Masse, the
Anthemes, Versicles, repitions, and other thinges, either songe or redde by
nyghte or by daye, to the beautifieng, and praysing of God: did Gregory,
Gelasius, Ambrose, and many other holy fathers, deuise, and put furthe, not
at one time but at sondry. The Masse (so terme thei the sacrifice) was
firste vsed to be done in suche simple sorte, as yet is accustomed, vppon
good Friday, and Easter euen, with certeine lessons before it. But then
Pope Celestinus put to the office of the Masse. Thelesphorus, Gloria in
excelsis: But Hilarius of Pictauia made the Et in terra. Simachus ordeined
it to be songue. The Salutacions, which by the terme of Dominus vobiscum,
be made seuen tymes in a Masse, ware taken out of the booke of Ruthe, by
Clemente and Anaclete, and put in, in their places. Gelasius made vp all
the reste to the Offertory, in the same ordre thei be vsed. Excepte the
Sequences and the Crede: wherof Nicolas put in the firste, and Damasus the
nexte: acordinge to the Sinode of Constantinople. The bidding of the
beades, with the collacion that was wonte to be made in the pulpite on
Sondaies, and halydaies: raither grewe to a custome by the example of
Nehemias, and Esdras, then was by any aucthorised. In this collation at the
firste comming vp therof, when so many as ware presente at the Masse did
receiue the communion, acording as was ordeyned by a decree: thei that ware
at any discorde ware exhorted to concorde, and agremente. And that thei
should receiue the sacrament of the aulter cleane from the filthe of sinne,
vppon the whiche consideracion at this daye it endeth with confiteor, or an
open confession. There ware thei wonte to teache the instrumentes of the
olde lawe, and the newe. The ten commaundementes. The xii. articles of our
beleue. The seuen sacramentes, holy folkes liues, and Martirdomes, holy
dayes, doctrines, and disciplines: vertues, and vices, and what soeuer are
necessary beside forthe, for a Christiane to knowe. Gregory linked on the
offertorie. Leo the prefaces. Gelasius the greate Canon, and the lesse. The
Sanctus blessed Sixtus. And Gregory the Pater noster out of the Gospelle of
sainte Mathewe. Martialle the scholer of blessed Peter, deuised that
Bysshoppes should gyue their benediction at the Agnus. And as for other
inferiour priestes, Innocentius commaunded them to giue the paxe, that is
to saye peace. Sergius tacked on the Agnus, and Gregory the poste
communion. The closing vp of all with Ite missa est, Benedicamus, Deos
gratias: was Leoes inuencion.

The xii. articles of our beleue, whiche the blessed Apostles would euery
manne not onely to confesse with mouthe, but to beleue also in harte, are
these.

Firste, that ther is one God in Trinitie, the father almighty maker of
heauen and earthe. The seconde, Iesus Christe, his onely sonne our Lorde.
The thirde, the same beinge conceiued of the holye ghoste, to haue bene
borne of the Virgine Marie. The fourthe, to haue suffred vndre Ponce
Pilate, to haue bene crucified, deade, bewried, and to haue descended in to
helle. The fiueth, to haue risen agayne the thirde daye fro the deade. The
sixteth, to haue ascended vp into the heauens, and to sitte on the right
hande of God the father almighty. The seuenth, that he shall come fro
thence like a triumpher, to iudge the quicke and the deade. The eight, that
ther is an holy ghoste. The nineth, that there is an holy churche
vniuersalle, the communion of the godly and good. The tenthe, forgiuenesse
of sinnes. Thee eleuenth, the rising againe of the flesshe. The twelueth,
aftre our departing, life in another worlde euerlasting.

The tenne commaundementes, which God wrate with his owne finger, and gaue
vnto the Israelites by Moses, whiche thapostles willed vs also to kiepe.
The firste, thou shalte haue none other Goddes but me. The seconde, thou
shalte not make any grauen Image, or likenesse of any thing that is in
heauen aboue, in the earthe benethe, or in the water vnder the earthe, thou
shalt not bowe doune to them, nor worshippe them. The third, thou shalt not
take the name of thy lorde God in vaine. The fowrthe, remembre that thou
kiepe holie thy Sabboth daie. The fiueth, honour thy father and mother. The
sixteth, thou shalte doe no murdre. The seuenth, thou shalte not commit
adulterie. The eight, thou shalte not steale. The nineth, thou shalt beare
no false witnesse against thy neighbour. The tenthe, thou shalte not desyre
thy neighbours home, his wife, his seruaunte, his maide, his Oxe, nor his
Asse, nor any thing that is thy neighbours.

The seuen Sacramentes of the churche, which are contained in the fiue laste
Articles of our beleue, and commaunded vs by the holie fathers to be
beleued.

The firste, diepyng into the water, called Baptisyng, aftre the Greke.
This, by canonicalle decree, in time paste was not wonte to be giuen
(excepte greate necessitie soner required it) but to those that had bene
scholers a space afore, to learne the thinges appertinent to Christendome.
Yea, and that aftre thei had bene exceadingly welle enstructed in the
faithe: and proufe taken of their profityng, by seuen examinations, which
ware made vpon seuen seueralle daies in the Lente, and so ware thei
Baptissed vpon Easter euen, and Whitesondaie euen. Vpon whiche daies, thei
ware accustomed to hallowe the christening watre, in euery Paroche. But
because this specially of all other, is chiefly necessarie vnto euerlasting
saluation: leasse any bodie should die without it, thei decreed that assone
as the childe was borne, godfathers should be sought for it, as it ware for
witnesses or sureties whiche should bryng the childe vnto the Churche
doore, and there to stande without. And then the Priest should enquire,
before the childe be dieped in the Fonte, whether it haue renounced Sathan
and all his pompe and pride. If it beleue certeinely and wholie, all the
Articles of the Christiane faithe. And the Godfathers answering, yea: for
it, the Prieste breathyng thrise vpon his face, exorciseth it, and
catechiseth it. Aftre that, doeth he seuen thinges to the childe in ordre.
Firste, he putteth into the mouth hallowed salt. Secondely, he mingleth
earthe and his spattle toguether, and smereth the eyes, eares, and
nosethrilles of the childe. Thirdly, giuyng it suche name as it shall euer
aftre bee called by: he marketh it on the breaste and backe with holie
oile, aftre the facion of a crosse. Fourthly, he diepeth it thrise in the
Watre, or besprinkleth it with watre thrise, in maner of a crosse, in the
name of the holie Trinitie, the father, the sonne, and holie ghoste. In the
whiche, name also, all thother Sacramentes are ministred. Fiuethly, weting
his thumbe in the holie ointement, he maketh therewith a Crosse on the
childes foreheade. Sixthly, he putteth a white garment vppon it. Seuenthly,
he taketh it in the hande a Candle brennyng. The Iewes before thei be
Christened (by the determinacion of the counsaile holden at Agathone), are
cathechised, that is to saie, are scholers at the enstruction of our beleue
nine monethes. And are bound to fast fourtie daies: to dispossesse them
selues of all that euer thei haue, and to make free their bonde men. And
looke whiche of their children thei haue Circumcised, acording to Moses
lawe: hym are thei bounde to banishe their companie. No merueile therefore
if thei come so vnwillingly to christendome.

Bishopping, whiche the Latines calle Confirmacion, a confirming, a
ratifieng, establishyng, auethorisyng, or allowyng of that went before: is
the second Sacramente. And is giuen of the Bishoppe onely, before the
Aultare in the Churche, to suche as are of growen yeres, and fastyng (if it
maie be) aftre this maner. As many as shalbe Confirmed, come all together
with euery one a godfather. And the Bishoppe aftre he hath saied one
orasion ouer them all, wetyng his thumbe in the holie oile, maketh a crosse
vpon eche of their foreheades: In the name of the father, sonne, and holie
ghoste. And giueth hym a blowe on the lefte chieke, for a remembraunce of
the Sacrament, that he come not for it againe. The godfathers, to the ende
the enoilyng should not droppe awaie, or by negligence bee wiped awaie,
clappe on a faire filette on the foreheade, whiche ther iudge to be
unlawfully taken awaie, before the seuenth daie. The holie fathers estemed
this Sacrament so highly, that if the name giuen to the childe at his
Christendome, siemed not good: the Bishoppe at the giuyng hereof mighte
chaunge it.

The thirde Sacramente is holie Ordres whiche in the firste Churche, was
giuen likewise of the Bishoppe, onely in the monethe of Decembre. But now
at sixe seueralle tymes of the yere: that is to saie, the fowre Saturdaies
in the embre wekes (whiche ware purposely ordeined therefore) vpon the
Saturdaie, whiche the Churche menne calle Sitientes, because the office of
the Masse for that daie appoineted, beginneth with that woorde, and vpon
Easter euen. This Sacrament was giuen onely to menne: and but to those
neither, whose demeanour and life, disposition of bodie, and qualitie of
minde, ware sufficiently tried and knowen. Aftre the opinion of some, there
were seuen ordres, or degrees, wherby the holy fathers would vs to beleue
that there ware seuen speciall influences, as it ware printed in the soule
of the receiuer, wherby eche one for eche ordre, was to be compted an
hallowed manne. Aftre the mindes of other there ware nine. That is to saie,
Musicens (whiche encludeth singing and plaieng) Doore kiepers, Reders
Exorcistes, Acholites, Subdeacon, Deacon, Prieste and Bishop. And for all
this, it is compted but one Sacramente, by the reason that all these tende
to one ende, that is to saie, to consecrate the Lordes bodie. To euery one
of these did the Counsaile of Toledo in Spaine, appoinete their seueralle
liueries, and offices in the Churche. The Dorekepers had the office of our
Common Sexteine, to open the churche dores, to take hede to the churche,
and to shutte the dores. And had therfore a keie giuen vnto theim, when
thei ware admitted to this ordre. The Reader, in signe and token of
libertie to reade the Bible, and holie stories, had a greate booke giuen,
him. The Exorcistes, serued to commaunde euille sprites oute of menne, and
in token therof, had a lesse booke giuen them. The Acholite, had the
bearyng and the orderyng of the Tapers, Candelstickes, and Cruettes at the
Altare: and therfore had a Candelsticke, a Taper, and two emptie Cruorettes
deliuered hym. The Subdeacon, mighte take the offring, and handle the
Chalice, and the Patine, carie theim to the Altare, and fro the Altare, and
giue the Deacon Wine and water, out of the Cruettes. And therfore the
Bishoppe deliuereth hym an emptie Chalice with a Patine, and the Archdeacon
one Cruet full of wine, and another full of watre, and a Towelle. To the
Deacons, is the preachyng of Goddes Gospelle to the people committed, and
to helpe the priest in al holy ministracion. He hath the Gospelle booke
deliuered hym, and a towell hanged vppon his one shouldre, like a yoke. The
Prieste hath power to consecrate the Lordes bodie, to praie for sinners,
and to reconcile them againe to God by Penaunce enioined them. He hath
deliuered hym a Chalice with Wine, the Patine, with a singyng cake, a stole
vpon bothe shouldres, and a Chesible. What Ornamentes the Bisshoppe hath
giuen vnto hym, ye haue heard afore. He maie not be made Bisshoppe, but on
the Sondaie about the iii. houre aftre Prime, betwene thoffice of the Masse
and the Gospelle: at the whiche tyme twoo Bisshoppes, and a Metropolitane,
laie their handes vpon his heade and a booke. The Bisshoppes in the firste
Churche, did litle or nothyng diffre from other Priestes, and ware ruled by
the commune Counsailes of the Churche, before that dissencion and deuision
entred emong the people, causing theim in sondrie sortes, to cleaue vnto
sondrie names, euery sorte as thei fortuned to be conuerted and Christened
of a sondrie persone. As whom Paule Baptised, thei would be called
Paulines. Whom Appollo, Appollonians, Whome Cephas, Cephites, and so of
other. To auoide therefore these breaches of concorde, and for an
vniformitie, the holy fathers ware driuen to decree and stablish that
asmany as should aftreward be baptised, should be called Christianes of
Christe. And that ouer euery Countie or Shiere, there should be sette one
Prieste or moe, acordyng to the greatnesse of the same, suche as ware best
tried. Whiche should haue to name, Ouersears in Englishe: in Greke,
Episcopj. Whom we cal Bishopes, by chaungyng of P. into B. and leauing out
the E. for shortnes, acordyng to the nature of our tongue. These mighte not
then gouerne their Clergie, and other their Diocesans, at their owne
pleasure, as thei did before: but acording to the decrees of the Churche of
Rome, and the holie Counsailes of the fathers assembled. Then began thei
firste (by the suffraunce and helpe of deuoute princes) to deuide all
Christendome into Dioceses, and the Diocesse into Conuocacions or Chaptres,
and those againe into Paroches, and to set that goodly ordre, that yet
continueth, aswell emong the clergie as the laietie. That the parishe
should obeie their lawfull Persone, the Persone the Deane: the Deane the
Bishoppe: the Bishoppe, the Archebishoppe. The Archebishoppe, the Primate
or Patriarche: the Primate or Patriarche, the Legate: the Legate, the Pope:
the Pope the generalle Counsaille: the generalle Counsaile, God alone.

For the fourthe Sacramente it is holden, that euery prieste rightly
priested, acordyng to the keies of the Churche, hauing an entente to
consecrate, and obseruynge the fourme of the woordes: hathe power, of
wheaten breade to make the very bodie of Christe, and of wine to make his
very bloude.

Christe our Lorde hym selfe, the daye before he suffred, kepte it solemnly
with his disciples, and consecrated, and ordeined it continually to be
celebrated, and eaten in the remembraunce of him selfe. And about this
mattier a man had nede of a great faythe. Firste to beleue the breade to be
chaunged into the body, and the wine into the bloude of Christe. Againe
thoughe this be done euery daye that yet Christ for all that should growe
neuer a whitte the bigger for the making, nor the lesse for the eatinge.
Thirdely that the Sacrament being deuyded into many partes, Christ should
yet remaine whole in euery cromme. Fourthly that thoughe the wicked eate
it, yet should not it be defiled. Fiuethly, that it bringeth to as many
euyll as receiue it, death; and to the good euerlasting life. Sixthly that
it tourneth not into the nature of the eater to his nourisshemente as other
meate dothe: but turneth the eater contrariwise into the nature of it
selfe. And yet being eaten, that it is rapte into heauen, vnhurte or
vntouched. Seuenthly that in so smalle a syse of breade and wine, the
infinite, and incomprehensible Christe, God and manne shoulde be
comprehended. Then, that one, and the self same bodye of Christe, at one
very instaunte, shoulde be in many places, and of many menne receiued at
ones, and in sondrye parcelles. Ninethly that thoughe the bread it selfe be
chaunged into the very flesshe of Christe, and the wine into his bloude,
that yet to all the sences thei remaine breade and wine, and neither
flesshe ne bloud. Further that all these commodities conteined in these
verses folowing should happen vnto those that worthely eate it.

It putteth in mynde and kindleth, encreaseth hope, and strengtheneth.
Mainteineth; clenseth, restoreth, giues life, and vniteth. Stablissheth
beliefe, abates the foode of sinne, and all vnclennes quencheth.

Finally, to be very profitable for the saluacion aswell of those liuyng as
deade, for whom it is specially offred by the priest in the Masse. And
therefore to haue to name Eucharistia communio.

In the beginning of the Christianne faithe (and yet amonge certeine
schismatiques as thei saye) one whole lofe was consecrated, of suche
bigguenesse, as when the Priest had broken it in a platter into smalle
pieces, it, mighte suffise the whole multitude that ware at the masse to
participate of. For in time paste the Christianes came euery day to
communicate by a speciall commaundemente, and ordenaunce. Aftrewarde but
ones in a wieke and that on the Sonday. But whan it began to be skant well
kepte vppon the Sonday neither: then was it commaunded that euery manne
should receiue it thrise in the yere, or ones at the leaste, at euery
Easter. And that euery Christian manne, when he stode in any daungier of
death, beyng whole of minde, should receiue it as a waifaring viande, to
staye him by the waye: with as good preparation of bodye and soule, as he
possibly mighte.

Matrimonie (whiche is the lawefulle coupling of the manne and the woman)
broughte in by the lawe of nature, the lawe of God, the lawe of all
peoples, and the lawe ciuille, is the fiueth Sacrament. The holy fathers
woulde haue but one mariage at ones, and that not in secrete but with open
solemnitie eyther in the churche, or in the churche porche, and so that the
priest be called to the matier. Who shold firste examine the man, and then
the womanne, whether thei bothe consent to be maried together. Yf thei be
agreed (whiche is chiefely in this case requisite) he taking them bothe by
the right handes: coupleth them together in the name of the holy and
vnseperable trinitie, the father, the sonne, and the holy ghoste. And
commaundeth, and exhorteth them that thei alwaye remembring this their
coupling of their owne free wille and consent: as longe as they liue, neuer
forsake one another but loue and honour one another, be debonaire and
buxome one to another, giuing them selues to procreacion, and not to
lecherous luste. And that thei honestly and diligently bringe vp, suche
children as God sendeth them of theyr bodies. Aftre that he affiaunceth
them both with one ringe. And sprinckling holy water vpon them, reacheth
them a stole, and leadeth them into the churche, where (yf thei ware not
blessed afore) he blesseth them knieling before the altare. The woman hath
on a redde fillet or frontelette, and ouer that a white veile, withoute the
whiche it is not lawfulle for her fro that daye forwarde, to go oute of
doores abrode, or to sitte by any manne. Twelue thinges ther be, whiche the
holy fathers woulde haue to barre persons from contracting of matrimonie,
and to disseuer them againe, yf thei be contracted. Errour of person, that
is to saye, mistaking one for another. A betrowthing vpon a condicion,
Consanguinitie or kindred, An open crime, Diuersitie of secte, Force, or
constrainte, Holy ordres, a Bonde or former contracte, Commune or open
honestie, Affinitie, and Disshabilitie of engendrure.

The sixteth Sacramente is penaunce or repentaunce, giuen of Christe as it
ware for a wracke boorde, wherby men are preserued fro drowninge. Eche
Christian oughte vndoubtedly to beleue that this consisteth in foure
poinctes. To saie, in Repentaunce of our sinnes, Canonicaile confession,
Absolucion, and Satisfaction, or amendes. Firste let him sorowe, not with a
lighte forthinckinge, but with a moste earneste and bittre repentaunce in
the botome of his conscience: for the puritie and innocencie that he had
gotten eyther by baptisme or the benefite of former repentaunce, and nowe
hathe eftsones loste, and forgone throughe sinne. And let him hope with
this repentaunce, to be reconciled to the fauour of God againe. And let him
humbly, and truly with his owne mouthe, confesse to a wise prieste, in the
steade of God: all those offences wherwith he knoweth him selfe to haue
loste his innocencie and clennesse, and to haue prouoked the wrathe of GOD
againste him selfe. And let him assuredly beleue that the same prieste,
hath power giuen him of Christe (as beinge his vienre, or deputie on
earthe) to absolue him of all his sinnes. Finally, for satisfaction or
amendes making for the faulte: lette him not with grudginge, but
chierfully, and gladly doe, what so euer he shalbe commaunded. Beleuing
with vndoubted faith, that he is absolued, and quyte of all, assone as the
priest in dewe forme of wordes, hath pronounced the absolucion.

The seuenth, and the laste Sacrament is the laste enoynting, by an oyle
that is made to this vse, by the bishope in euery diocesse, by an yerely
custome vpon Maundy Thursdaie, like as the chrismatory oyle is. And this by
the precepte of sainte Iames the Apostle, and by the ordinaunce of Felix,
the fourthe Pope after Sainte Peter: was giuen only to them that laie in
dyeng, being of full age, and requyring it. Thei vse to enoynte with a
prescripte fourme of wordes; and with often inuocacion of sainetes: those
partes of the bodie, wher our fiue wittes or senses: the hearing, seyng,
smelling, tasting and touching, beare moste stroke, and with whiche man is
iudged chiefely to sinne. That is, the eares, the eyes, the nosthrilles,
the mouthe, the handes, and the fete. Whereby the holy fathers would vs to
beleue, that there was not onely purchased cleane forgiuenesse of all
smaller offences, or venialle sinnes: but also either presente recouerie,
or a riper and gentler deathe. All the feastes and holydaies, throughout
the yere, which the churche hath commaunded to be obserued and kept:
beginne at the Aduente, or approache of Christe our Lorde. Whiche Peter the
Apostle instituted to be obserued in Decembre, with fasting and praier,
thre wiekes and a haulfe before Christemas, when we close vp the last.
viii. daies of that moneth, with greate ioye and feaste. Thei deuided the
yere into two and fiuetie wekes, and xii. seueral monthes. The monethes
commonly into xxx. daies. The firste daye of Ianuary the churche recordeth
how Christe was circumcised acordinge to Moyses lawe. The iii. daye aftre,
howe he was worshipped of the thre Sages, with thre sondry presentes: and
howe beinge baptissed of Iohn in Iordaine the floude, he laide the
foundacion of the newe Lawe. The seconde of Februarie, how his mother
vnspotted, obeyeng the maner of her country: brought hym into the temple,
and suffred her self to be purified or clensed, whiche we calle churching
of childe. In memorie wherof the churche vseth that daye, solempne
procession, and halowing of candles, The fiue and twentieth of Marche, how
the aungel brought woorde to the virgin Marie, that Christ shoulde be borne
of her, being conceyued in her wombe; by the ouershadowing of the holy
ghoste. At the whiche time they willed vs to faste the fourtie daies that
he fasted him selfe, being with vs vppon earth, and to renewe the
remembraunce of his passion, and deathe, which he willingly susteined to
deliuer vs fro the yoke and bondage of the deuell. The laste day of that
faste, which oftentimes falleth in Aprille, to celebrate the highest featte
in althe yere: in remembraunce howe he ouer came deathe, descended into
helle, vanquisshed the deuell, and retourned againe on liue, and appeared
in glorious wyse vnto his scholers, or disciples. In Maye, how all those
his scholers loking vpon him, he by his owne vertue and mighte, stied vp
into the heauens. At the whiche time, by thordenaunce of saincte Mamerte,
bishoppe of Vienne: there be made ganginges with the lesse Letanies from
one Churche to another, all Christendome ouer. In Iune, and somtime in
Maie, how the holy ghoste, promised to the disciples, giuen from aboue,
appered to them like glowing tongues: and gaue them to vndrestande, and to
speake the tonges of al nacions. Theight daie folowing, Trinitie Sondaie.
The fiueth daie aftre that, how Christe in his laste supper, for a
continualle remembraunce of himself, instituted the moste holsome
Sacramente of his bodie and bloud, vndre the fourme of breade and wine
leauyng it to be sene and eaten of his. The fiuetenth of Iuly, how the
blessed Apostles, acordyng as thei ware commaunded, the twelueth yere aftre
the Ascension of their Master into heauen: wente their waies into the
vniuersalle worlde, to Preache vnto all people. The departyng of Christes
mother out of this life, the fiuetenth daie of Auguste. And her Natiuitie,
theight of Septembre. And thone and twentie of Nouembre, how she from, thre
yeres of age (at the whiche tyme she was presented to the temple) vntill
she was mariage able, remained there seruing God stil a peace. And theight
of Decembre, how she was of her parentes begotten, that longe afore had
bene barreine. The second daie of Iulie, how Elisabethe passyng the
Mounteines, visited her kindeswoman.

There ware also certeine holie daies appoincted to the xii. Apostles. To
certeine Martyres, Confessours, and Virgines As the fowre and twentieth of
Februarie to saincte Matthie. To saincte Marke the Euangeliste, the xxv. of
Aprille. Vpon the whiche daie, Gregorie ordeined the greate Letanies to be
songe. The firste of Maie is hallowed for Philippe and Iames the more. The
xxix. of Iune, for Petre and Paule: and the xxiiii. of the same, for the
Natiuitie of S. Ihon Baptiste. The xxv. of Iuly, for Iames the lesse. For
Bartholomewe the fowre and twentie of August. For Mathewe, the one and
twentie of Septembre. And the eight and twentie of Octobre, for Simon and
Iude. The last of Nouembre, for S. Andrewe. The one and twentie of
Decembre, for saincte Thomas. And the vii. and twentie of thesame moneth
for Ihon the Euangeliste. The daie before, for Stephin the firste Martire.
And the daie aftre for the Innocentes. The tenth of August for sainct
Laurence. And the thre and twentie of Aprille, for saincte George. Of all
the Confessours, there are no moe that haue holidaies appoincted, but S.
Martine and saincte Nicholas. The firste, on the eleuenth of Nouembre: and
the other the sixteth of Decembre. Katherine the virgine, the fiue and
twentie of Nouembre, and Marie Magdalene the twentie and two of Iuly. There
is also vndre the name of saincte Michael alone, the xxix. of Septembre: a
holy daie for all blessed Angelles. And one other in commune for all the
sainctes, and chosen of GOD, the firste of Nouembre.

Thei would also that euery seuenthe daie, should be hallowed of the
Christianes, by the name of Sondaie, as the Iewes doe their Sabboth:
restyng from all worldly woorke, and beyng onely occupied with praising of
GOD, and the deuine Seruice in the Churched. To learne by the Priestes
preachyng, the Gospelle and the commaundementes of our faith. And by what
meanes so euer we thinke in our conscience we haue prouoked the wrathe of
God against us all the wieke afore: that, this daie to amende, to sette
cliere, and aske pardone for. In time past euery Thursdaie also was kepte
as the Sondaie. But because we might sieme therein, somewhat to gratifie
the Heathen (whiche that daie kepte solempne holie daie, to Iupiter their
Idolle) it was laied doune againe. More ouer the clerkes and the people,
vsed bothe Thursdaie and Sondaie before Masse, to go rounde aboute the
Churche a Procession, and the Prieste, to sprinckle the people with holy
watre. Agapitus instituted the one and the other. The Thursdaie, in
remembraunce of Christes Ascencion, and the Sondaie, of his glorious
Resurrection: which we celebrate fro Sondaie to Sondaie continually, ones
euery eight daies. The night afore euery ordenary holidaie or feastefull
daie: the whole clergie, and the people, ware bounde to kiepe Vigile in
euery churche. That is to saie, to wake all nighte, in deuine seruice and
praier. But vpon consideracion of many slaunderous crimes and offences,
that ware by diuers naughtie and malicious persones committed, by the
oportunitie of the darke: this maner was taken awaie, and ordeined that the
daie before the feaste, should be fasted, whiche yet kiepeth stille the
name of Vigile. The fathers decreed that the churche in the whole yere
should renue the memorie of fiue thynges.

Fro the Sondaie called Septuagesima (because there are seuentie daies,
betwiene that and the octaues of Easter) thei would vs to renue the memorie
of Christes Fasting, Passion, Death and Bewrialle. The miserable falle also
of our first parentes, and those extreme errours of mankinde, by the whiche
thei ware ledde awaie fro the knowledge and worshippe of one verie GOD: to
the wicked supersticion and honour of Idolles and deuelles. And further,
the greuous and intollerable bondage that the people of Israeli suffred
vndre the Pharao of Egipte. Vpon whiche consideracion, the bookes of
Genesis and Exodus be redde in the seruice of the churche. Whiche sheweth
then in all her demeanour, and appareilyng, heauinesse and sorowe.

From the octaues of Easter, to the octaues of Whitsontide, Christes
Resurrection, and Ascencion, with the commyng of the holy Ghoste. And
together with that, the redempcion, reconclliacion, and atonement of
mankinde with God the father, throughe Iesus Christe: and the restoryng
againe of the children of Israeli, to the lande of beheste. Wherein was
prefigured our reconciliacion and redempcion aforesaid. For that cause is
all the seruice out of the newe Testament, and al thinges done with ioie
and gladnes.

From the octaues of Whitsontide, till Aduente, xx. wiekes space, and more,
thei would haue to bee celebrated the conuersation of Christ here in the
worlde, with his miracles and woorkes of wondre. And ouer and beside that,
the longe pilgrimage, that mankinde, by longe reuolucion maketh, from one
generacion to another, from the tyme of our redempcion, saluacion, and
sauing, vntill the laste daie of time. Wherefore duryng this while, vpon
consideracion of the diverse happe and hasarde, wherwith the Churche is
tossed, like a Shippe in the troubled Seas, she neither greatly reioiceth,
ne sorroweth, but redeth grcate chaunge of bookes, oute of the olde and
newe Testamente: to the ende she maie walke the warelier, and the bettre
wijnde her self out of the stormes, that are ready to assaile her.

From Aduente to Christemas, to remembre the tyme from Moses, to the commyng
of Messias. In the whiche mankinde certefied of saluacion, bothe by the
lawe and the Prophetes, awaited with moste earneste desires for his
comming, and the kingdome that he shold haue. Wherefore thei ordeined that
the Prophecies should be redde, and fasting exercised. That the churche the
bettre enstructed, and abled by these, mighte the worthelier receiue the
Birthe daie of Christ her Lorde (whiche euer falleth the fowerth wieke
aftre) and from thens holde on with feaste, and continuall gladnesse vntill
Septuagessima. Reioisyng that he was now come: whiche should bee the
sauluiour of the worlde. Their oratories Temples, or places of praier
(whiche we calls Churches) might not be built without the good will of the
Bisshoppe of the Diocese. And when the Timbre was redy to be framed, and
the foundacion digged: it behoued; them to send for the Bishoppe, to
hallowe the firste corner stone of the foundacion, and to make the signe of
the crosse thervpon, and to laie it, and directe, it iuste Easte and Weste.
And then might the Masons sette vpon the reste, but not afore. This Churche
did thei vse to builde, aftre the facion of a crosse, and not vnlike the
shape of a manne. The Chauncelle (in the whiche is conteined the highe
Altare and the Quiere) directe full into the East, representeth the heade.
And therefore ought to be made somwhat rounde, and muche shorter then the
body of the churche. And yet vpon respecte that the heade is the place for
the eyes, it ought to be of more lighte, and to bee separate with a
particion, in the steade of a necke, from the body of the Churche. This
particion the Latine calleth Cancelli; and out of that cometh our terme,
Chauncelle. On eche side of this chauncelle peraduenture (for so fitteth it
beste) should stand a Turret, as it ware for two eares. And in these the
Belles to be hanged, to calle the people to Seruice, by daie and by night.
Vndre one of these Turretes, is there commonly a voulte, whose doore
openeth into the quiere. And in this are laid vp, the hallowed vesselles
and ornamentes, and other vtensiles of the church. We calle it a vestrie.
The other parte oughte so to be fitted, that hauing as it ware on eche side
an arme, the reste maye resemble the bodye with the fete stretched in
breadthe, and in lengthe. On eche side of the bodye the pillers to stonde.
Vpon whose coronettes or heades the vaulte or rophe of the churche maye
reste. And to the foote beneth, aulters to be ioyned.

Those aulters to be ordrely alway couered with two aulter clothes, and
garnisshed with the crosse of Christe, or some little cofre of reliques. At
eche ende a canlesticke: and a booke towarde the myddes. The walles to be
parieted without, and within, and diuersly paincted. That thei also should
haue in euery parisshe a faire sounde stone, made holowe and fitte to holde
water: in the whiche the water consecrate for baptisme, may be kept for the
christening of children. Vpon the right hande of the highe aulter, that
ther should be an almorie, either cutte into the walle, or framed vpon it:
in the whiche thei woulde haue the Sacrament of the Lordes bodye, the holy
oyle for the sicke, and the Chrismatorie, alwaie to be locked. Furthermore
thei woulde that ther should be a pulpite in the middes of the churche,
wherein the prieste maye stonde vpon Sondaies and holidayes, to teache the
people those thinges that it behoueth them to knowe. The chauncelle to
serue onely for the priestes, and clerkes. The rest of the temporalle
multitude to be in the body of the church. Separate notwithstonding, the
men on the ryghte side, and the women, on the lefte. And eche of them to be
sobre and honest in apparelle and behauour. Whatsoeuer is contrary to good
facion or Christiane religion, with greate dilligence to shonne it. It was
the maner in the first churche, both among men and women, to lette their
heare growe, to shewe out their naked skinne, and very litle or nothing to
diffre in apparelle. Sainct Peter put first ordre, that women should couer
their heades, and menne rounde their heare, and either of them to go in
seueralle and sondrye apparelle. Moreouer that to euery churche, shold be
laid out a churchyarde, of the grounde adioyning, in the whiche all
Christen mennes bodies mighte indifferently bebewried. The same to be
consecrate, or halowed by the bishoppe, and to enioye all the priuilegies
that the churche may enioye.

The funeralle for the deade, thei kepe not in euery place ylike. Some
mourne and kiepe dirige and Masse seuen daies continualle together, some
ix. some xxx. or fourtye some, fiuetie, and a hundred, and other a whole
yere, wrapped vp in blacke. The counseile of Toledo ordeined that the corps
beinge firste wasshed, and then wrapped vp in a shiete, shoulde be caried
forthe with singing by menne of his owne condicion or sorte, clerkes by
clerkes, and laye menne of laye menne. And aftre what time the priest hath
sensed the corps, throwen holy water vppon it, and said certeine prayers,
to laye it into the graue with the face vpwarde, and the heade into the
Weaste. Then to throwe in the earth again, and in token that ther is a
Christian ther bewried, to sette vp a crosse of wodde, garnisshed with
yvie, cipres, or laurelle. These be the ordres and facions of the
Christiane religion.


FINIS.



Imprinted at London

by

John Kyngston and Henri Sutton.

The xxii daye of December

Anno Domini

MDLV.



THE CONQUEST OF THE GRAND CANARIES,

MADE THIS LAST SUMMER BY THREESCORE AND THIRTEENE SAILE OF SHIPPES,

SENT FORTH AT THE COMMAND AND DIRECTION OF THE GENERAL OF THE VNITED
PROUINCES,

TO THE COAST OF SPAINE

AND THE CANARIE-ISLES:

WITH THE TAKING OF A TOWNE IN THE ILE OF GOMERA

AND THE SUCCESSE OF PART OF THE SAIDE FLEETE IN THEIR RETURNED HOMEWARD.

WHICH SET SAILE FOR SPAINE THE 25 OF MAIE, AND RETURNED HOME

THE 10 OF SEPTEMB. 1599.

At London:

PRINTED BY P.S. FOR W. ASPLEY, DWELLING IN PAULES CHURCHYARD
AT THE SIGNE OF THE TYGERS HEAD.

1599.


NOTE

The following very curious and interesting pamphlet was not included in the
edition of 1598-1600. It was, however, inserted in the fifth volume of the
small edition, 4to., of 1812, and is here transposed to that part of the
Voyages relating to the Canaries, etc. Originally printed for "W. Apsley,
dwelling in. Paules Church-Yard, at the signe of the Tygers Head" in 1599,
it is of the utmost rarity, and for that reason I have thought it right to
give the original title-page.--_E. G._



A TRUE REPORT

OF A VOYAGE MADE THIS LAST SUMMER, BY A FLEETE OF 73. SHIPPES,

SENT FORTH AT THE COMMANDE AND DIRECTION OF THE STATES GENERALL OF THE
VNITED PROUINCES,

TO THE COAST OF SPAINE AND THE CANARIE-ISLES.

Tuesday the 25. daie of Maie the wind being Northe and Northe-east, we in
the fleete of Roterdam, being 20. saile of ships, the sunne beeing
Southe-west and by West, came before Flushing, and ankered neere vnto
Cleiburch; our generall at his comming found the fleetes of North-Holland,
and Zealand ready.

Wednesday, the 26. daie wee remained there at anchor.

Thursday the 27. daie of Maie, we tooke into our ships (by the Generals
commandement) two gentlemen and foure souldiours.

Friday the 28. of May 1599, the wind being northerly, we waied our anchors,
and sailed from the Weelings with 73. ships, hauing faire weather, setting
our course West, Southwest. Wee had 3. Admirals in this fleete, whereof the
chiefe Admirall was the ship of William Derickson Cloper, wherein was
embarked the honourable gentleman Peter Van Doest being generall of the
fleete. This ship was called the Orange, carying in her top a flag of
Orange colour, vnder whose squadron was certaine Zelanders, with some South
and North Hollanders; Ian Geerbranston caried the white flag vnder whom the
Zelanders and ships of the Maze were appointed. And Cornelius Gheleinson of
Vlyshing wore in his maine top the blew flag, vnder whom were appointed
certaine ships of the Maze with some North Hollanders. Thus were wee
deuided into sondry squadrons, but to what ende it was so done, it is to
me, and many others vnknowne.

Saturday the 29. of Maie, hauing sight of Callis, the ships lay to the lee
ward, and staied for the rereward. The Lord generall shot off a peece, and
afterward hung out the princes flag, in signe that the captains shold come
aboord him, presently al the captains entred into their boates, and rowed
aboord the General, at which time were two pinnaces sent out of the fleet,
whereof one was the Generals Pinnace, but vnto what place they sailed, wee
were altogether ignorant. And when the boates rowed from the Generall, some
of them went aboord the victualers, and tooke out of them certaine
fire-workes. The sunne Southwest, the Generall discharged an other peece of
ordinance, and put out the Princes flag, wherevpon presently the captaines
went aboord him, and when our captaine returned, he had in his hande a
letter closed vp, which hee brought from the Generall, and wee imagined
that euery captaine had receiued the like, and then wee sailed altogether
toward the higth of Blacknesse, where wee anchored, (which caused vs
greatly to wonder, seeing we had so faire a wind,) but we perceiued
afterwards, that this was done, to the ende we should there abide the
coming of the great new ship of Amsterdam: for the soldiours which were
appointed for her, were all with vs in a ship of our company.

Sunday, the 30. of Maie, where lying at anchor al that night, the next
morning we set saile altogether hauing the winde at North East, wee set our
course West Northwest, the weather being faire. The same morning our
captain read vnto vs those very articles which before had bin read vnto vs
in the prince Mauritz his Court, and afterwards we altogether, and with one
accord were sworne to the keeping of them: At noone we were neere vnto
Beuersier hauing a fine gale out of the East Northeast, the euening was
calme, the foremost shippes slacked their sailes, attending the comming in
of the hindermost.

Wednesday the ninth of Iune by the breake of daie we were hard vnder the
coast of Spaine neere to Viuero, the winde being westerly, we sailed North
West and by North, and North Northwest, the sunne Southwest and by West, we
were ouer against the cape Ortegael, we sailed North West and by North, to
fetch the wind: we were in 44. degrees 20. minuts, at twilight, we had the
foresaid Cape of vs about 5. miles South West and by West.

Thursday the 10. of Iune, the winde being at East South East, wee directed
our course towardes the shore, and might certainly discerne that it was the
coast of Ortegall, we bore in West Southwest directly with the land, and
ordered all thinges as if we presently should haue had battell, and about
noone wee had sight of the Groyne, namely the tower which standeth neere
the Groine.

Friday, the 11. of Iune, at the breake of day the winde being at North East
and by East, sixe of our ships sailed forwarde South Southwest, meaning to
enter the Groine, and there to learne how al things stood. The sunne being
Southeast, Cape Prior was East from vs, wee bare South, presently after we
spied two boates comming out of Veroli to learn what ships we were, the
rather because that the day before they had seen our fleete at sea: we
sailed by the wind, and lay in the wind to stay for their comming. The one
doubting vs woulde not come neere vs, the other boat also durst not approch
neere vs; wee called to one of the Spaniardes, saying wee came from
Hamborch laden with cordage and other goods, desiring and praying him to
let vs haue a Pilot to bring vs into the Groine, wherewith the boate came
aboord vs, so that by our great haste, and policie we got one Spaniard, the
other which remained in the boate would not come into our ship, but
presently thrust off their boate, making all possible speede to get from
vs. Hauing nowe gotten this Spaniarde, hee was presently deliuered into the
handes of the Generall, who confessed that there were about 4000.
souldiours come into the towne, with certaine horsemen, 36. waggons with
money, and 300. pipes of wine, to furnish the Spanish fleet, that he lay
the night past in the Groine, and was the Kings seruant. [Sidenote: The
whole fleet cometh before the Groine.] The sun South South-West, we came
with fleet our whole fleete before the Groine, where wee found the great
newe ship of Amsterdam vnder the Towne.

At 12. 13. and 10. fadome we cast anchor, so that wee might behold much
people both on the shoare and vpon the wals of the town: from the castle
and town both, they shot mightely with their great ordinance into our
fleet, so that there were aboue 200. cannon shot discharged, wherewith some
of our ships were hit, but not one man lost, and little hurt done
otherwise. There lay an other castle East ward from the towne, which shot
also most terribly, but altogether vncertainly, for we know not that they
touched any one ship more then Moy Lambert, which was greatly, to bee
wondered at, seeing our fleete lay so thicke together, and so neere vnder
the castle. There laie hard vnder the castle 12. great Gallions, with some
French ships, which also nowe and then shot among our fleete, but they lay
so neere the walles that wee could do them no harme at all. The Lord
Generall worthy of al praise, wisely be thinking himselfe, caused all his
captaines and counsell to come aboorde him, that they might together
conferre vpon this busines, and what meanes might best bee found, to inuade
the towne and the enemy, but they concluded not to meddle with the land
there: seeing the enemy was there, strong vpon his guard, and that 5.
weekes past both from Amsterdam, and by a French man, they had knowledge of
our comming; by reason of the calme, wee were constrained to towe out our
ships with the boates in dispite of al their shot, thus we parted from the
Groyne without profit, or effecting of any thing, leauing the Papists of
Groyne as wee founde them, from thence (the winde being at South Southwest)
wee bent our course towarde Cape Saint Vincent, meaning to goe to Saint
Lucars, hoping to fal vpon them at vnawares, and ere they looked for vs.

Saturday the 12. of Iune, hauing got a fine gale we ran along the coast of
Galicia, at noone wee were before the Iland of Cesarian, and set our course
towards Cape Finister.

Sunday the 13. of Iune, the lorde Generall gaue sharpe commandement by his
letters, forbidding al men aboorde the ships to vse any play, with tables,
cards, or dice, either for money, or for pastime, or vpon credit.

Munday the 14. of Iune, the wind blew so harde out of the North, that wee
could not beare our topsailes with our forecourse which sailed South, the
sunne was southward we had Port a Porte of vs, being in 41. degrees and 20
minuts.

Tuesday the 15. of Iune, as soone as day appeared, we had sight of Cape
Roxent, and then we sailed making small way, staying for the comming
together of the fleete: the wind as before we sailed South Southwest, and
were in 36 degrees.

Wednesday the 16. of Iune, towardes the euening we had sight of two strange
ships eastward of our fleete, certain of our ships made towards them and
tooke them, the one was an English man of war; the other was a Spanish
barke with three missens: at his comming before the Generall, he said, he
had already sent 2. prises into Englande, and woulde now with this prise
returne home: for his victuals were almost spent.

Thursday the 17. of Iune, it was very still and calme weather.

Friday the 18. of Iune, the wind being at North Northeast, we sailed South
Southwest. The Lord Generall caused all the Captaines with the Pilots to
come aboord him: demanding of them which of them was best acquainted in the
Isles of Canaria: and further, by what meanes, they might conquer and force
the said Ilands, and land their people. And about noone the captaines were
chosen and appointed which shoulde commande on lande. The Generall gaue out
newe ensignes, to the number of 9. or 10. according to the number of the
ships. The Lord Generall appointed to each new captaine, an Ancient bearer,
a Lieutenant, and other officers, with 130. souldiers and mariners, and
instructions how euery one of them should gouerne himself on the land.

Saturday the 19. of Iune, the Generall commanded that the captaines should
deliuer out victuals but twice a day, to wit, 6. and 6. to a messe: for 6.
men, 5. cans of beere of Roterdams measure euery day, 5. pounde of breade
and no more; a cheese of 6. l. euery weeke, one pound of butter weekely,
likewise pease, beanes, or Otemeale twise a day, according to the order.
Captaine Harman, and captaine Pije, had each of them commission to commande
on the land as captaines ouer two companies of saylers, each company
containing 130. men. Harman Thunesson was appointed Ancient to captaine
Henricke Pije, and de Blomme Ancient to captaine Hendricke Hertman. The
ancients were deliuered the same day.

The 20. 21. 22. daies, wee sailed South Southwest, the wind being
northerly.

Wednesday the 23. of Iune, the wind was North Northeast. The Generall
commaunded all the captaines both for the sea and land to come aboord him,
where it was ordained and determined how the battell should be ordered,
after they were landed. According to the latitude, we found our selues to
be 36. miles from great Canaria.

Thursday the 24. of Iune, we ranne our foresaid course. The sun being West
Northwest, we sawe the land East and by South off vs: wee sailed East and
by South, and with great labour and diligence bore all that might with the
land.

Friday The 25. of Iune, we continued our course to the land for our assured
knowledge thereof, and perceiued it to be Lancerot; we saw also a small
land (which lay between both) called Allegrania, and also the Iland
Forteuentura, which is 24. miles great, afterward we sailed Southwest along
the Coast of Forteuentura, which is a lande that hath very high hils.
[Sidenote: The whole Netherlandish fleet commeth before the Island and town
of Grand Canaria.] The sun Southwest, we were past the Iland Forteuentura,
and were sailed out of sight thereof, running as yet Southwest: about ii. a
clocke in the afternoone wee had sight of the Iland of great Canaria, for a
while wee kept our way, but when the Generall was assured that it was the
grand Canaria, wee all tooke in our sailes, and lay to the lee ward, and so
remained vntill it was past midnight, then wee set saile againe and made to
the lande, our course westwarde.

Saturday the 26. of Iune, in the morning the whole fleet sailed West
directly to the land the winde North and by East, and made all thinges
ready to land; being now neere the shore, the whole fleete let fall their
anchors harde by the great castle, which lieth North Northwest from the
town, from whence they began to shoot mightily against the ships. The lord
Generall and the vize Admirall with the other ships that had the greatest
ordenance, anchored close vnder the castle, and for a certain time they
plied each other with their great shot; the Generals main mast, and his
missen mast were shot thorow, and his vize Admirall, namely the great new
ship of Amsterdam was shot thorow 6. or 7. times; so that some of the
souldiours and maryners also were slaine before they entered their long
boates to rowe to the shore: But the ships for their parts, had so well
bestowed their shot on the castle, that they of the castle began to faint,
wherby they discharged not so thicke and often as before. Our men rowed to
the land in the long boates, euery one full of souldiours, and the ships
which could not discharge their ordenance against the castle, bent them
against the shore, (for the enemy had three brasse peeces lying vpon the
strand) and many people were there gathered together where our souldiours
shoulde land. Nowe as soone as the Generall with the most parte of the long
boates were come together, they all at one instant rowed toward the shore,
maintaining for a while the fight on both sides with their shot. But the
General perceiuing that the enemie woulde not abandon the place, with a
valiant courage made to the shore, and altogether leaping into the water vp
to the middle, maintained the fight with the enemy. Notwithstanding the
enemy no lesse couragious, would not yet leaue the strond, so that some of
our souldiours and mariners lost their liues before the enemy would retire:
for the place was discommodious, and hard to lande, but most of the enemy
were slaine, to the number of 30. or 36. and the Gouernor his right leg was
shot off, sitting on his horse. The lord General Peter von der Doest
leaping first on land, was thrust in his leg with a pike, and had in his
body 4. wounds more, and was in great danger to haue lost his life but that
one of the souldiours slewe the Spaniarde which meant to haue don it; but
his wounds were of small moment, and his ancient bearer was slain with a
shot, the Lieutenant Generall was shot in his throte, captaine Kruye in the
heade, 4. soldiours were slain, and 15. hurt in the generals pinnace before
they could come to land: But when our people now with one courage all
together rushed vpon the enemie, (leauing their ordenance behinde them,)
they forsooke the strond, and ran together into the town, carying with them
their Gouernour, whose leg was shot off, and he was a knight of the order
of the crosse, and leauing behind them 36. deade carcases on the strond,
were presently by our people ransacked, and our dead people buried. Our men
now hauing won the strond, put themselues presently in battell ray; the
empty boates returned to the ships, but after our people had taken the
strond, the castle did neuer shoot shot. [Sidenote: Twenty foure companies
strong of Netherlanders.] After the boates were returned aboord, presently
they rowed againe to the shore full of soldiours; our people being all
landed, they which for the first time had commandement, set vs in 7.
troupes, or battalions, being xxiiii. companies strong, of soldiours and
Mariners, with twentie foure Auncientes. At which time we marched a little
forward twenty one a brest, and standing altogether in battell; [Sidenote:
The first castle taken.] suddainly three mariners came running to the
Generall, (which had bin at the castle) telling him that the Spaniards
desired to deliuer him the castle, so their liues and goods might be saued:
the generall with some of the captaines and souldiours went first thither,
and presently the castle was deliuered into his possession, hoping on his
pitty and mercy, and leauing behind them all the great ordenance, namely 9.
peeces of brasse, and 6. Iron peeces, and also al their weapons. In the
castle were about 80. Spaniards, some cannoniers, some soldiors, and some
people of the countrey, for the defence thereof: beside powder, shot and
match accordingly, for the artillery, and also thirty small peeces or
caliuers. Also wee founde 58. prisoners, the rest were slaine with shot in
the fury, and some were run away. The prisoners (which our people had taken
in the road with two Barkes, and a ship sunke with our ordenance, as they
lay all 3. hard before the castle) were sent altogether aboorde the ships
except 3. of the principals which the lord General reserued by him, to the
end he might the better knowe the state of all things. Presently 80.
soldiours were sent into the castle, who tooke down the kings flag, and set
vp the princes colours. At the same instant two Negros were brought to the
General, which were fetched out of the mountains, they said that they had
lien there a sleepe, and knew nothing of any matter. But now when it began
to wax dark, we marched altogether a great way towards the town, 4.
companies of soldiors approached hard vnder the towne, and other 4.
companies had the rereward: those of the Maze, with the Amsterdammers
remained a pretty way from the town, vnder the hils; and the Zealanders,
with the North Hollanders lay neere the waters side, so wee remained al
that night in order of battell.

Sunday the 27. of Iune, after we had now stood al night in battel order,
early in the morning we marched with al our 7. troupes: hard vnder the town
of Canarie, where we remained a while in that order: but because they of
the castle (which lieth to the towne) shot so mightily among vs; 2. of the
troupes retired vnder a hill, where we were a little freede from the
castle: for while our people stood imbattailed before the town, the castle
did vs great hurt, for sometimes they shot fiue or sixe men with one shot,
ere we could entrench our selues before the castle: but after they
perceiued that our people had made a small trench against the shot of the
castle, they placed on the hill fiue or sixe small peeces of brasse called
falconets (which shoote about a pounde of pouder) and sometimes they shot
boules of wood, wherewith in the beginning they slew manie of our people:
so aduantagiouslie had they placed their ordenaunce to shoot among vs. Ten
or twelue of our Souldiours ranne vp the hill, whereof the enemy tooke one,
and presently cut him in foure peeces. Our people seeing that they so
tyranouslie dealte with them, about the euening tooke a Spaniarde prisoner,
and vsed him after the same maner. The lorde, Generall perceiuing that many
men were slaine with the ordenance, caused fiue peeces of brasse to bee
brought from the castle which we had taken the daie before, and towarde the
euening we beganne to make a battery, and the same euening brought into it
three peeces, whereof two were placed presentlie to play vppon the Castle
and the hill; but that euening were but fiue or sixe shotte made. While
that our men made the batterie, and planted or placed the ordenaunce, the
enemy placed his ordenance in counter-battery: and before our battery could
be finished, and the ordenance placed, many of our men were shot, among
whom Peter vanden Eynde commissioner, had his leg shot off, whereof he died
within three daies after. After that it was dark, al they which lay there
before the towne were againe set in order of battel, 15. on a ranke, and so
remained all that night.

The 28. of Iune, early in the morning euery man retired to his quarter, and
then were two peeces more brought to the battery, which also were presently
placed on the Rampire, and so wee began to shoot against the castle with 4.
peeces, and with the fifth we plaied vpon the small ordenance which lay
vpon the hils. The enemie in the castle laid many sackes of wooll, and
placed many tonnes or barrels filled with stones vpon the castle walles
supposing thereby to make some little defence from our ordenance; but when
an Iron bullet chanced to hit the barrels so filled with stones, it did
them mightie hurt, for the stones would scatter maruailouslie abroad,
whereby many of them that were in the castle were slaine. Our men hauing
now with their shot almost abated the force of the castle, 4. companies
marched vp the hils, intending to beate the enemy from thence, which lay
there with the ordenance. But the enemy perceiuing himselfe to bee
assaulted on all partes, (for most of the ordenance of the castle were
dismounted and made vnprofitable, the gate of the towne set one fire by the
Generals commandement) about noone they forsooke both the castle, hill, and
town, and with all their wiues, children, money and Iewels, and all other
things that they coulde carry with them, fled into the mountaines. Which
when our men perceiued, they put themselues in order of battle xv. in a
ranke. [Sidenote: The second castle and town of Grand Canaria taken.] The
lord Generall seeing the Spaniards shamefullie to flie, caused 2. ladders
belonging to the enemies, to be brought out of a church which stood without
the towne, whereof the one was too shorte, notwithstanding himselfe with
one of the ladders climed vp the walles, one man at once followed, and by
this meanes entered the towne ouer the wals. About noone some of our men
ran into the castle without any reencounter: the enemy had vndermined the
gate, but as we approched the wall, it tooke fire, but not one of our
people was therewith hurt. They had also skattered powder in sundrie
places, but our men themselues did fire the same: and as soone as our
people were entred the castle, the kinges colours were taken downe, and the
prince of Oranges set vp, and we found fiue peeces of brasse therein. When
wee were all entered into the towne, we put our selues againe into order of
battell 15. in a ranke in a low ground within the towne: and the souldiours
which entered the towne by the hils side, brought to the Generall a man of
Flushing, which they had taken out of prison: as soone as the Generall sawe
him, he went presently with him to the prison, accompanied with some of our
captaines, where they found 36. prisoners, which presently were discharged.
And further they declared, that the Spaniards had taken with them 2.
prisoners into the mountaines, which were condemned to be burnt, the one
was an English man, the other a Dutchman, which had lien in the holy house.
Thus with the helpe of God about noone, wee won the great Iland of Canaria,
and the town of Allegona, battered with their owne artillery, and skaled
with their owne ladders. Towards the euening wee were quartered in the
housen, those wherein the Generall was, were by writing freed, that no man
might take out any goods, in the rest euery one might go, and take what
pillage he could find: but the Spaniards had caried all the best things
with them into the mountaines, and in the euening all our people entered
the town. Euery captaine with his company were seuerallie lodged, but yet
we appointed watch on the hils, as well as in the towne, for the enemy
shewed himselfe often vpon the hils, whereby we were forced to keep very
good watch.

The 29. of Iune, this morning some of the mariners climed vp the hils, but
the enemy (to whom the passage were better known, then to our people)
suddainly set vpon them, and killed 20. of them. Towards the euening some
300. of our Soldiours marched towardes a small castle which lay halfe an
houres iourney from the towne: but the enemy seeing our people to approch,
forsooke the place and fled into the mountaines, our men being ascended,
they founde in the castle three brasse peeces: and after they had appointed
a Corporall with certaine soldiours to keepe the watch, the rest returned
to the citty. The same night the Spaniards tooke one of our soldiors
appointed for a forlorne Sentinel, whom they presently put to the sword.

The last of Iune, as soone as day appeared, wee began to cary the pillage
aboorde belonging to the General, and captaines, as wines and other goods.
About noone 3. cheefe men of the Spaniards came to our people, which kept
watch on the hils with a flag of truce in their handes, which were straight
brought before the Generall, and within a while after, there were 2. more
brought vnto him; but after they had bin a while with him they departed
again towards the mountaines: and in the euening came other 7. Spaniardes
to our watch with a flag of truce, desired to speake with the Generall: but
they were sente backe againe into the Mountaynes.

The first day of Iuly, 1599. in the morning (our people being on the hils)
2. friers with three other Spaniards came vnto vs, desiring to be brought
to the Generall, which our men accomplished: but the General denied to
talke with them, wherefore they were presently sent backe againe from
whence they came, for we were then labouring to send the goods a shipboord.
Also at that instant was a sermon in the great church of great Canaria,
made by the preacher of Ysilmond with great deuotion, and giuing thanks
vnto God for our great victory, desiring him that it would please him daily
to increase the same, to the honour of his name: at which Sermon the Lorde
Generall was present with foure hundred persons.

The second of Iuly 1599. wee were forbidden by sounde of the drum that no
man should go beyond the forelorne sentenell placed on the Mountaines: and
to sende backe againe into the hilles all such Spaniardes which came with a
flag of truce, to speake with the Generall, and to put all such to the
sworde as came with weapons. One of our Pinnaces tooke a fisherman fishing
vnder the Ilande Forteauentura, wherin were 7. Spaniardes, which were
brought before the General, and prently committed to prison.

The 3. of Iuly in the morning we began to sende aboord our ships all the
bels, ordenance and munition which the enemies had left behinde them, at
which time 2000. soldiors were appointed to march to the hils, to seeke the
enemy, which lay hid there with their wiues, children and goods, as they
were fled out of the towne: and as soone as they approched each other, they
began the fight on both sides with great courage, but the enemy was forced
to flie, beeing better acquainted with the passages of the mountains then
our people were. Our men returned with the losse of some 70. persons: among
whom captain Iacques Dierickson with his boatson were slaine: the rest came
into the towne againe into their appointed quarters.

The 4. of Iuly, in the morning we began to burn the towne, and with pouder
blewe vp the castle which lay by the towne, and we burned likewise all the
cloisters and churches which were without the towne, lying neere the water
side. The town burning, our people were set in battell, and in that order
marched out of the towne, vntill they came to Gratiosa, the castle, which
we first tooke, lying about halfe an houres iourney from the towne, where
the long boates receiued our men, and caried them againe aboorde. Presently
after wee were departed out of the towne, the enemy entered, endeuoring by
all meanes possible to quench the fire. And while we were shipping our
people, the enemy shewed him selfe sometimes 5. or 6. in a company, but
they durst not approch vs. The rereward of our men being shipped, we put
fire to the castle which we tooke first, and blew it vp: This done,
captaine Quit imbarked himselfe also with his soldiours and pillage, which
he had taken in the rode, for his ship wherein he was before was ready to
sincke.

The 5. of Iuly, lying in the roade, in the morning the Generall discharged
two peeces of ordenance, and afterward put out 2. flags of the princes
colours, thereby giuing to vnderstand, that all land captaines, and sea
captaines also with one of their Pilots should resort to him, whereupon
presentlie they all rowed aboorde the Generall; the Pilots which were best
acquainted with the coast, were demanded by the Generall which were the
weakest Ilands, and where they might most commodiouslie land: Towards the
euening captaine Quyt his ship was fired, and suffered to driue towarde the
strond. At which time a newe captaine was appointed to captaine Iaques
Dirriksons ship aforesaide, who was slaine in the mountaines, namely
captaine Kloyers Lieutenant. And the Generals Clarke of the band was
appointed Lieuetenant to captain Kloyer.

The 6. of Iuly, by reason of the contrary winds, and other inconueniences
which happened at this present, and also because such ships, which before
were sent to sea, and could not returne by reason of the contrary windes;
we remained in the road, vnder the castle of Graciosa. About noone 4.
Spaniards came out of the towne with a flag of truce to the strond,
directly ouer against our ships, whereof 2. were brought aboorde the
Generall in one of our long boates, (the other two with their flag of truce
were left behinde on the stronde) which remained with the Generall vntil
the euening, and then were set on shore, and so the 4. Spaniardes returned
to the towne.

The 7. day riding in the roade, in the morning 4. Spaniards with a flag of
peace, came to the shore from the towne, directly ouer against our ships:
the fleet seeing them, sent a long boate to the shore, and brought the said
4. Spaniards aboord the General, these men brought with them the ransome of
certaine Spaniards, which had deliuered vp the castle of Graciosa at the
Generals pleasure, which were set to ransome, euery one according to his
habilitie and office: and thus all the Spaniardes which were ransomed,
together with the 4. Spaniardes which brought the ransoms, were set on
shore with a long boat, and departed to the towne.

The 8. day of Iuly, two howers after sun rising, the Generall with all the
ships set saile, carying with him all the Spaniardes that were not
ransomed, sailing along the coast of great Canaria; in which time Ian
Cornelesson Zwartekeys departed this worlde, whose leg was shot off at the
taking of the Iland of great Canaria. Hauing nowe sailed from the hight of
the said Iland, which lay southerly from vs, we had sight of captaine
Hertmans ship, and of 3. others which rode there at anchor: who, so soone
as they perceiued our fleete, waied their anchors, and sailed along the
coast with vs, which were the ships that the Generall had sent to sea.
Sailing thus together vntill the sun was in the West, the wind began to
rise more and more, so that we coulde not keep our direct course, but were
forced to put to the Southwest of the great Iland of Canaria, where we
anchored: wee had sight of the Iland Teneriffe, and of an other of the
Ilands of Canaria, wherein is the hie mountaine called the Pyck. This hil
was from vs 14. miles, but by the great hight thereof it seemed to bee
within foure or fiue miles off vs, but in the daie time when the sun shined
wee could not see it.

The 9. of Iuly, lying thus at anchor, in the morning most of the long
boates went a shore to fetch fresh water, such as they could there find and
caried with them the deade corps of Ian Cornelesson aforesaid, the
Constables son of the Admiralty of Roterdam, called Zwertkeys, which was
there honorably buried on the high and drie land. This done, we set on fire
the woode which lay on the shore piled and heaped in the woods, but in this
place we found not any Spaniards.

The tenth of Iuly, the boates being all returned to their ships with their
people, euery one wayed their anchors and hoised their sailes, the winde at
Northwest; but being vnder saile together, the wind slacked and by reason
of the great calme the ships lay a drift for want of wind.

The 11. of Iuly, in the morning it blewe a stout gale in our topsailes out
of the Northeast, but as we approched the Iland of Teneriffa, the winde
altered often; sixe or seuen of our shippes, and the rest which were next
vnto the shore, had sometimes a gale in their topsailes, and sometimes
againe without wind: so that we lay a drift, and could keepe no reckoning
either of the wind or course, and were forced to alter our course more than
12. times a day.


A declaration of the taking of Gomera one of the Ilands in Canaria, and how
  we afterwardes left it.


The 12. day of Iuly sailing thus with great variety of wind, vnder the
great Iland Teneriffa, the day appearing, we had the wind more certain,
filling our topsailes with a full gale from the Northwest: And when it was
faire day light we saw our fleet scattered far one from another, by meanes
of the foresaid mutable windes. Some ships lay driuing by reason of the
calme, and other some had a little gale, but the most part of our fleet
were West of vs, towards whom with all speed, we with the rest of the ships
made. Being al come together, wee endeuored to reach the Ilande Gomera,
wherein is a little towne: towardes the euening many of our ships were
neere the Iland, but the most part were to the lee ward; so that before it
grew toward the euening none of vs could come neere the towne.
Notwithstanding in the twilight and shutting vp of the euening: Ian
Garbrantson Admirall of the white flag, his vize Admirall, and a Pinnace
following, were come neere the town. Thus the Admirall sayling so neere to
the Iland, they of Gomera discharged 2. pieces at him, but touched him not.
The saide Admirall seeing this, passed on a little farther with the other
ships which were neere him, and then tooke in their sailes, and cast their
anchors. The other ships which were behinde, laboured all they might to
come also vnder the Iland to them.

The 13. of Iuly, the Admirall of the white flag lying thus at anchor neere
to Gomera, the greatest part of the fleete were yet in the morning betweene
the Iland of Teneriffa and Gomera, so that parte of the ships were beyonde
the towne, and must sometimes cast about to conducte the others in, which
were in the lee of vs. When wee had nowe for the most part passed the hight
of the Iland, the Generall gaue a signe to all captaines to come aboorde
him, being vnder saile, directing his course to the Iland of Gomera, and
the other ships did their endeuour to follow him and anchored about the
necke of the valley, lying North North East off the towne. The ships being
all come to anchor, the captaines entered presently into the long boates,
and aboorde the Generall to know his minde: and after they had beene a
while in the Generals ship, they returned to their ships, and 4. companies
of souldiours were chosen out, and landed in the valley. Which done, al the
ships waied their anchors, and sailed directly toward the towne, and then
came to anchor againe. After that all our ships lay thus together in the
road neere the valley, before the town: we discharged certaine peeces
against the town, but they made no shewe at all of resistaunce, for they
had buried foure brasse peeces as soone as they had sight of vs, which lay
on the strond neere vnto a small castle; the other sixe companies were also
set on land in the long boates, without any resistance: for the Spaniardes
with their wiues, children, and all their goods whiche they coulde carry
with them were fled into the mountains. [Sidenote: The towne of Gomera
abandoned by the Spaniards.] The first 4. companies that were landed, as
they marched along the hils side towards the towne, perceiuing that the
enemy fled with all his goods towards the hils, sent out a certaine number
of soldiours to intercept them, and to take from them the goods which they
caried away. And to accomplish this enterprise, our souldiours descended
the hill into the valley, meaning suddainly to set vpon the Spaniardes; but
the enemie perceiuing their intent, hid themselues in caues which were
neere vnto them, vntill our souldiours were in the valley. The Spaniardes
perceiuing that they were strong enough to encounter with our people,
suddainly leapt out of their dens, and beset our souldiours on both sides.
[Sidenote: Eighty Netherlanders and diuers Spaniards slaine.] Our people
seeing themselues thus compassed with their enemies, behaued themselues
most valiantly, so that many of the Spaniards lost their liues, and 80. of
ours were slaine in this valley: among whom were 2. Lieutenants (the one
was Meerbecks sonne, and the other was Lieutenant to captaine Bynon) which
had receiued aboue 50. wounds in their bodies, so pittifullie were they
massacred, thus were these worthie champions intercepted. The rest of those
4. companies, which were not present at this fury of the Spaniardes,
towardes the euening, descended the hills, and marched into the towne.
Presently after this, watch was appointed in al places of the towne, and
some of the soldiours began to dig the ground, to seeke for such goods as
the Spaniardes had buried, but at that instant they founde nothing, except
only certain pipes of wine.

About the sunne setting was brought in a Spanish prisoner, which was de
deliuered to the Prouest marshal, by the Generals commandement, to the end
he might bring them to all such places in the Ilande, whereas the
Spaniardes had hidden their goods: But because nothing could then be
effected by reason that the euening approched, and it began, to bee too
dark, the Spaniard was committed to a keeper vntil the next morning for the
purpose aforesaide. But the night being far spent, and the keeper taking
small regard to his charge, the Spaniard secretlie stole awaie and ran to
the mountaines.

The 14. of Iuly, in the morning the long boates rowed againe to the shore,
and caried aboorde such goods as the enemy had left behind them, which for
the most, part were wines, for they had caried clean awaie all other things
into the mountains, and had left almost nothing in the towne, but only the
wines which they had buried in the earth: In the afternoone our people
found 3. bels, which they had buried in the fields, where corne had growne.

The 15. of Iuly in the morning our people running vp to the hils 10. or 12.
in a company to hunt and seeke for pillage were suddainly inuironed by the
enemy, and 6. or 8. of them slaine; the rest saued themselues by flight.
About noone there was a generall muster taken of all the soldiours, to see
how many wee had lost: and such ships as were appointed to returne home,
began to deliuer out the victuals. The same day were two copper peeces
founde: whereof the one was 16. foot and halfe long, and the other about
14. foot.

The 16. day in the morning the Lord Generall gaue notice to all captaines
to resort to him aboord his ship, because some of the captaines had not
sent victuals vnto the soldiors that were on land, whereby they suffered
hunger, and sundry of the soldiours had complained to the General thereof:
At afternoone, the enemy came to the hill which lieth ouer the towne,
crying and calling vnto our men to come and fetch againe their muskets, and
towards the euening many marriners with their weapons landed, and at that
instant also all things were ordered to march very early the next morning
vp the hils to fetch againe our muskets, caliuers, and other weapons, which
the Spaniards before had in mockery, and gibing wise willed vs to fetch
from them. But now when all things were ordered for this seruice: the same
night arose a strong gale of winde, encreasing more and more, that in the
ende it grewe to a mightie tempest, that notwithstanding our fleet did ride
vnder the Iland Gomera in the road before the towne, some were forced to
way their anchors and to put to sea, to preuent the mischiefe like to
happen to the ships, by reason they lay so neere one another. And when
those shipps were a little way in the Sea, they cast their anchors, and
there remained. By this occasion the generals aforesaid enterprise was kept
backe: we iudging it as a warning, that the Generall should spare and
preserue his people from the bloud-thirsty Spaniards, which had their holes
and dens in the hils, and perhaps might haue taken away many of our liues.
And heere by the way; by the name of the Iland Canaria, the Spaniards may
rightly bee called Canarians or Canes, for Canaria is by interpretation,
dogs kinde, for they ran as swift as dogs, and were as tyrannicall and
bloud thirsty as the rauening Wolfe, or any other wild beast, which they
sufficiently manifested, for as soon as they could lay handes on any of our
people (like vnto mad curs, agreeing with their name Canarians) they would
presently woary them.

The 17. this hurtfull night ended, and the tempest ouer passed, and alaid,
the couragious soldiors were all in redines, desirous to execute this peece
of seruice, exspecting and desiring nothing more, then to march vp the
hils, and to incounter their idolotrous enemies. But vpon good
consideration, this enterprise was staied, and some 300. soldiours sent
into the same valley, where 3. daies before our people had beene suddainly
compassed, intrapped, and slaine by the Spaniards. Our soldiours being come
to the valley aforesaid found no resistance, neither could once see a
Spaniard; but found a smal peece of brasse about a fadome long, and two
barrels of gunpowder; and when our souldiours perceiued that there was no
good to bee done (forbearing to mount the hils, because they had no
commission so to do) with such thinges as they had they returned to the
towne. The euening now approaching, the Generall commanded to carry aboord
the ships, such goods as they had there found, and digged out of the
ground, which was accordingly done and accomplished, among which things
were three brasse peeces, some bels and other goods.

Sunday the 18. of Iuly, we remained at anchor in the road of the Iland
Gomera.

Munday the 19. of Iuly, remaining yet in the Iland Gomera, and seeing that
the Spaniardes continued in their secret holes, and dens of the mountaines,
wee set fire on the towne, and as neere as we could burnt down all places,
as Cloisters churches, hermitages and houses, remaining yet in the towne
vntill it was noone. After that all this was accomplished: we the vnited
soldiours forsooke the towne, and presently the Lord General, with al his
company, went aboord the ships. Thus we left the Iland Gomera burning,
which was neuer before done by any nation. The Spaniardes seeing that the
soldiours were departed out of the Iland, with all speed possible, in great
heapes came running out of their secret caues and holes, to quench the
fire, like as they of Allegona in the Iland of great Canaria before had
done.

Wednesday the 20. of Iuly, we lay stil in the road before Gomera, in this
time 2. of our soldiours were put into captain Cloiers ship, and in lew of
them, we receiued out of his ship 2. others, which were hurt, with two
Spaniards.


The summary or briefe declaration of the Admirals departing towardes the
  West Indies.

Aftre that the Generall had left the Ilands, he giueth order to the fleete,
  taketh his leaue of all the Captaines and officers in most honorable
  sort: he aduanceth the voyage to the West Indies with his Nauy: the rest
  of the ships returne into the low Countries, euery one from whence he
  came.

After that the Iland of great Canaria was by the vnited soldiours taken,
and won by force of armes, and the Iland Gomera conquered, for sundry
reasons they were forsaken, after they had caried to their ships such
things as they found, fired the townes, churches, cloisters, and houses,
and rased their Castles. The Lord Generall commanded all Captaines and
officers of the fleete to resorte vnto him aboord his ship. The same
principals being come accordingly, he welcommed them and shewed them al
friendship he could, thanking them for their good and faithfull endeuours
which they had shewed in this seruice, which he performed with a singular
oration, praying Almighty God that he woulde vouchsafe to be his only
loadsman and merciful defender, in all his enterprises, to the honor of his
name, and happy successe of the vnited Netherlandish prouinces. After this,
the lorde Generall againe in most friendly sort, and kind speeches,
perswaded and desired all the saide captaines and officers, (alleadging
many reasons and examples) to perseuer in their good beginning of true and
faithfull seruice for God, and for their good Lords and principall
magistrates, the honorable gentlemen and states of the vnited Netherland;
and to the good liking of their valiant and high borne gentleman, and
gouernour General prince Mauritz, their principal lorde and commander, &c.
with these and such like matters the daie was spent.

Wednesday the 21. of Iuly, the wind was northerly: The lord Generall
commanded all the captaines and officers to resort vnto him: and in most
curteous maner againe the second time, tooke leaue of them all, ordaining
and appointing in his place as Admirall Generall ouer all those shippes
which were to returne home, the valiant captaine Ian Gerbrantson, desiring
and straightly charging them at there present, to shew all obedience and
duty vnto him, as to his owne person, and that they should make his minde
knowne to all others which had not beene there present. After these
speeches, and leaue taken, [Marginal note: The Netherlandish fleet diuide
themselues into two companies, whereof the one returneth homewardes, and
the other proceedeth for the West Indians.] the Admirall Ian Gerbrantson
put out the princes colours in the maine top: and the honorable gentleman
Peter von der Doest presentlie caused the princes flag also to be spread;
and as soone as the sunne was Southwest, all the ships at one instant waied
their anchors, and hoised their sailes, taking leaue nowe the third time
one of another, in most braue and triumphant sort, and in this maner
departed the one from the other. The lord General with his fleet, set this
course South Southwest, with 36. ships, and the Admirall Ian Gerbrantson
ran East by the wind, with 35. ships with intent to returne home.

[Sidenote: Two Spanish prizes taken.] Wednesday the 18. of August, sixteene
ships of our fleet which were sent to returne home, being in company
together in the latitude of 36. degrees and 10. minutes, the wind Southwest
sailing Northeast, before it was noone, we perceiued 2. strange ships vnder
saile comming out of the Northwest, towards whom we made, and at afternoone
we ouertooke them, and made them our prises: they were both Spaniardes, the
one was a small Barke, and came from Cape de Blanco in 21. degrees, loaden
for Woluis in the Condate where they dwelled. In the same ships was a
marchant of Cyuill with 47. men, each of their ships hauing two cast
peeces, and euery man his musket, but they made no shewe of defence, or
offending. There was also found laden in the same ships, sixty thousand
drie hides or skins, esteemed to bee worth 6000. duckets as they reported,
there were also found two bags with mony, in the one was 11. hundred single
rials, and in the other 10. hundred and forty single rials, with two Buts
of traine oile, and two barrels of gum Arabique.

Thursday the 19. day, we the abouesaid 16. ships were together, beside the
two Spanish ships, 4 ships of war of North Holland, 4 ships of Warres of
Zeland and one ship of war of the Maze: the captain wherof was Antony
Leonardson, al the rest were victualers. The wind West Northwest, we sailed
Northeast, and by North in 36. degrees and 45. minutes. The captaines had
beene all aboord the Admirall in councell aduising what were best to bee
done in this matter of the Spaniards prises.

Saturday, Sunday, the 21. and 22. of August, our said fleet of 18. ships
kept yet together, we found our selues to bee in 39. degrees, 6. minuts.
The sun South and by West, the winde blew vp at West Northwest, wee sailed
North Northeast, and North and by East, Lysborne was East of vs.

Munday the sixt of September, the winde westerly, we ran East, at noone wee
sounded, the depth was 50. fadome water, we found small white shels with
needles therein, in the hight of 49. degrees 20. minuts, the sun Southwest,
wee had sight of Vshant, we ran Northeast and by North.

Tuesday the 7. of September, the sun East South East, wee saw England, a
mighty blustering gale of winde from the South Southwest, wee sailed North
Northeast. The sunne Southwest, came to land at Gawstert. Afterwarde wee
turned and sailed East Southeast: In the euening it blewe so much winde,
that wee were forced to strike our maine top mast, and we ranne the whole
night with two courses by the wind.

Wednesday the 8. of September, the foule weather continued, the sunne East
and by South, we had sight of the Ile of Wight North Northwest of vs, and
ranne the whole day, East Northeast with the foresaile by the wind: as the
evening approached we saw Beuersier, in the night and second quarter we
passed by Douer.

Thursday the 9. of September, as soone as the daie began to appeare it was
calme weather, and darke, the sun Southeast, we lay still before Newport
all the ebbe, The wind easterly, in the after noone the wind came
Northwest, we set saile againe, running al night by the wind with our
foresaile.

Friday the 10. of September 1599, by the break of day wee were before the
Maze, the sun Southwest, we arriued by the helpe of God's mercy and grace
before the Brill.

Since then, there is arriued at Texell another ship of war, whereof one
Cater of Amsterdam was captain, the wich was seuered from the fleet in this
voiage by tempest, and thought to be lost. The said captaine met with some
prises, and in company of two English shippes tooke a Caruell of Aduiso,
verie richly laden comming out of India, and hauing more men then the
English, shared halfe of the goods with them, and so came home this present
month of Octob.


FINIS.

       *       *       *       *       *

The Worldes Hydrographical Discription.

WHEREIN IS PROUED NOT ONELY BY AUTHORITIE OF WRITERS, BUT ALSO BY LATE
EXPERIENCE OF TRAUELLERS, AND REASONS OF SUBSTANTIALL PROBABILITIE, THAT
THE WORLDE IN ALL HIS ZONES, CLYMATS AND PLACES, IS HABITABLE AND INHABITED
AND THE SEAS LIKEWISE VNIUERSALLY NAUIGABLE WITHOUT ANY NATURALL ANOYANCE
TO HINDER THE SAME

WHEREBY APPEARES THAT FROM ENGLAND THERE IS A SHORT AND SPEEDIE PASSAGE
INTO THE SOUTH SEAS, TO CHINA, MALUCCA, PHILIPPINA, AND INDIA, BY NORTHERLY
NAUIGATION TO THE RENOWNE, HONOR AND BENIFIT OF HER MAIESTIES STATE, AND
COMMUNALTY.

PUBLISHED BY J. DAUIS OF SANDRUDG BY DARTMOUTH IN THE COUNTIE OF DEUON.
GENTLEMAN.

ANNO 1595. MAY 27.

IMPRINTED AT LONDON

BY THOMAS DAWSON

DWELLING AT THE THREE CRANES IN THE VINETREE.
AND ARE THERE TO BE SOLD.
1595.



TO THE RIGHT HONORABLE

LORDES OF HER MAIESTIES MOST HONORABLE PRIUIE COUNSAYLE.

My most honorable good Lords for as much as it hath pleased God, not only
to bestow vpon your Lordships, the excellent gifts of natures benefite, but
hath also beautified the same with such speciall ornamentes of perfection:
As that thereby the mindes and attentiue industrie of all, haue no small
regard vnto your honorable proceedings. And so much the rather, because to
the great content of all her maiesties most louing subiectes; it hath
pleased her highnes in her stately regard of gouernment, to make choise of
your honours as speciall members in the regall disposition of the
mightinesse of her imperiall command: Emboldeneth me among the rest to
humble myself at your honorable feete, in presenting vnto the fauour of
your excellent iudgementes this short treatise of the Worldes
Hydrographicall bands. And knowing that not onely your renowned places, but
also the singularitie of your education, by the prudent care of your noble
progenitors hath and still doth induce and drawe you to fauour and imbrace
whatsoeuer beareth but a seeming of the commonweales good: Much more then
that which in substantiall truth shal be most beneficiall to the same. I am
therefore the more encouraged not to slacke this my enterprise, because
that through your honorable assistance when in the ballance of your
wisedomes this discouery shall haue indifferent consideration, I knowe it
will be ordered by you to bee a matter of no small moment to the good of
our countrie. For thereby wee shall not onely haue a copious and rich vent
for al our naturall and artificiall comodities of England, in short time by
safe passage, and without offence of any, but also shall by the first
imployment retourne into our countrey by spedie passage, all Indian
commodities in the ripenes of their perfection, whereby her Maiesties
dominions should bee the storehouse of Europe, the nurse of the world and
the glory of nations, in yielding all forrayne naturall benefites by an
easie rate: In communicating vnto all whatsoeuer God hath vnto any one
assigned: And by the increase of all nations through the mightinesse of
trade. Then should the merchant, tradesman, and poore artificer, haue
imployment equall to their power and expedition, whereby what notable
benefites would growe to her Maiestie, the state, and communaltie, I refer
to your perfect iudgementes. And for that I am desirous to auoyde the
contradiction of vulgar conceipts, I haue thought it my best course, before
I make profe of the certaintie of this discouerie, to lay downe whatsoeuer
may against the same be obiected, and in the ouerthrowe of those conceipted
hinderances the safenes of the passage shall most manifestly appeare, which
when your wisdomes, shall with your patience peruse, I doe in no sort
distruct your fauorable acceptance and honorable assistance of the same.
And although for diuers considerations I doe not in this treatis discouer
my full knowledge for the place and altitude of this passage, yet
whensoeuer it shall so please your honours to commaund I will in few wordes
make the full certainty thereof knowne vnto your honours being alwaies
redie with my person and poore habilitie to prosecute this action as your
honours shall direct, beseeching God so to support you with all happines of
this life, fauour of her Maiestie, loue of her highnes subiectes, and
increase of honour as may be to your best content.

I most humbly take my leaue from Sandrudg by Dartmouth

this 27. of May 1595.

Your Honors in all dutifull seruice to command

I. D.



THE WORLDS HYDROGRAPHICALL OBIECTIONS AGAINST AL NORTHERLY DISCOUERIES.

All [Footnote: Hakluyt has published an extract from this treatise in his
Collection of Voyages; but the original work is so very rare and occupies
so small a space that it has been deemed eligible to reprint it entire.
EDIT.] impediments in nature, and circumstances of former practises duly
considered. The Northerly passage to China seme very improbable. For first
it is a matter very doubtfull whether there bee any such passage or no,
sith it hath beene so often attempted and neuer performed, as by historical
relation appeareth, whereby wee may fully perswade our selues that America
and Asia, or some other continent are so conioyned togeather as that it is
impossible for any such passage to be, the certaintie whereof is
substantially proued vnto vs by the experience of Sebastian Gabota an
expert Pylot, and a man reported of especiall iudgement, who being that
wayes imployed returned without successe. Iasper Corteriallis a man of no
meane practise did likewise put the same in execution, with diuers others,
all which in the best parte haue concluded ignorance. If not a full consent
of such matter. And therfore sith practise hath reproued the same, there is
no reason why men should dote vpon so great an incertayntie, but if a
passage may bee prooued and that the contenentes are disioyned whereof
there is small hope, yet the impedimentes of the clymate (wherein the same
is supposed to lie) are such, and so offensiue as that all hope is thereby
likewise vtterly secluded, for with the frozen zone no reasonable creature
will deny, but that the extremitie of colde is of such forceable action,
(being the lest in the fulnes of his owne nature without mitigation,) as
that it is impossible for any mortall creature to indure the same, by the
vertue of whose working power, those Northerly Seas are wholly congealed,
making but one mas or contenent of yse, which is the more credible because
the ordenary experience of our fishermen geueth vs sufficient notice
thereof, by reason of the great quantitie of yse which they find to be
brought vpon the cost of newefound land from those Northerne regions. By
the aboundance whereof they are so noysomly pestred, as that in many weekes
they haue not beene able to recouer the shore, yea and many times recouer
it not vntill the season of fishing bee ouer passed. This then being so in
the Septentrionall latitude of 46, 47 and 48 degrees, which by natures
benifit are latitudes of better temperature than ours of England, what hope
should there remayne for a nauegable passing to be by the norwest, in the
altitude of 60, 70 or 80 degres, as it may bee more Northerly, when in
these temperate partes of the world the shod of that frozen sea breadeth
such noysome pester: as the pore fishermen doe continually sustain. And
therefore it seemeth to be more then ignorance that men should attempt
Nauigation in desperate clymates and through seas congeled that neuer
dissolue, where the stiffnes of the colde maketh the ayre palpably grosse
without certainty that the landes are disioyned.

All which impediments if they were not, yet in that part of the world,
Nauigation cannot be performed as ordenarily as it vsed, for no ordenarie
sea chart can describe those regions either in the partes Geographicall or
Hydrographicall, where the Meridians doe so spedily gather themselues
togeather, the parallels beeing a verye small proportion to a great circle,
where quicke and vncertayne variation of the Compasse may greatly hinder or
vtterly ouerthrow the attempt. So that for lack of Curious lyned globes to
the right vse of Nauigation; with many other instruments either vnknowne or
out of vse, and yet of necessitie for that voyage, it should with great
difficultie be attayned. All which the premises considered I refer the
conclusion of these obiections and certainty of this passage to the
generall opinion of my louing countrymen, whose dangerous attemptes in
those desperate uncertainties I wish to be altered, and better imployed in
matters of great probabilitie.


To prove a passage by the Norwest, without any land impedimentes to hinder
  the same, by aucthoritie of writters, and experience of trauellers,
  contrary to the former obiections.

Homer an ancient writer affirmeth that, the world being diuided into Asia,
Africa, and Europe is an Iland, which is likewise so reported by Strabo in
his erst book of Cosmographie, Pomponius Mela in his third booke, Higinius,
Solinus, with others. Whereby it is manifest that America was then
vndiscovered and to them vnknowne, otherwise they would haue made relation
of it as of the rest. Neither could they in reason haue reported Asia,
Africa and Europa to bee an Iland vnles they had knowne the same to be
conioyned and in all his partes to be inuironed with the seas. And further
America being very neere of equall quantitie with all the rest could not be
reported as a parte either of Africa, Asia, or Europa in the ordenarie
lymites of discretion. And therefore of necessitie it must be concluded
that Asia, Africa and Europa the first reueiled world being knowne to bee
an Iland, America must likewise be in the same nature because in no parte
it conioyneth with the first.


By experience of Trauellers to proue this passage.

And that wee neede not to range after forrayne and ancient authorities,
wherat curious wittes may take many exceptions, let vs consider the late
discoueryes performed, within the space of two ages not yet passed, whereby
it shall so manifestly appeare that Asia, Africa, and Europa are knit
togeather, making one continent, and are wholy inuironed with the seas, as
that no reasonable creature shall haue occasion thereof to doubt. And first
beginning at the north of Europe, from the north cape in 71 degrees,
whereby our merchantes passe in their trade to S. Nicholas in Rouscia
descending towardes the South, the Nauigation is without impediment to the
cape of Bona Esperanca, ordenarilie traded and daily practised. And
therefore not to be gaynesayd: which two capes are distant more then 2000
leagues by the neerest tract, in all which distaunces America is not founde
to bee any thing neere the coastes either of Europe or Afric, for from
England the chefest of the partes of Europa to Newfoundland being parte of
America it is 600. leagues the neerest distance that any part thereof
beareth vnto Europa. And from cape Verde in Gynny being parte of Africa,
vnto cape Saint Augustine in Brasill beeing parte of America, it wanteth
but little of 500 leagues the neerest distance betweene Africa and America.
Likewise from the sayd North Cape to Noua Zemla by the course of East and
West neerest, there is passable sayling, and the North partes of Tartaria
are well knowne to be banded with the Scithian Seas to the promontory Tabin
so that truely it is apparant that America is farre remooued and by a great
sea diuided from any parte of Africa or Europa. And for the Southerne
partes of the firste reueiled worlde it is most manifest that from the cape
of Bona Esperanca towardes the east, the costes of Safalla, Mosombique,
Melinde, Arabia, and Persia, whose gulfes lye open to the mayne occian: And
all the coastes of East India to the capes of Callacut and Malacca, are
banded with a mightie sea vpon the South whose lymmates are yet
vndiscouered. And from the cape of Malacca towardes the North so high as
the Ile of Iapan, and from thence the cost of China being part of Asia
continueth still North to the promontory Tabin, where the Scithian sea and
this Indian sea haue recourse togeather, no part of America being neere the
same by many 100 leages to hinder this passage.

For from the Callafornia beeing parte of America, to the yles of Philippina
bordering vpon the coastes of China being parte of Asia is 2100 leages and
therefore America is farther separated from Asia, then from any the sea
coastes either of Europe or Africa. Whereby it is most manifest that Asia,
Africa and Europa are conioyned in an Iland. And therefore of necessity
followeth that America is contained vnder one or many ylands, for from the
septentrionall lat. of 75 deg. vnto the straights of Magilan it is knowne
to be nauigable and hath our west occian to lymet the borders thereof, and
through the straightes of Magillane no man doubteth but there is Nauigable
passage, from which straightes, vpon all the Westerne borders of America,
the costs of Chili, Chuli, Rocha, Baldiuia, Peru to the ystmos of Dariena
and so the whole West shores of Noua Hispania are banded out by a long and
mightie sea, not hauing any shore neere vnto it by one thousand leagues
towardes the West, howe then may it be possible that Asia and America
should make one contenent:


To proue the premisses by the attemptes of our owne Countreymen, besides
  others.

But lest it should be obiected that the premises are conceites, the acting
aucthors not nominated, I will vse some boldnes to recyte our owne
countreymen by whose paynefull trauells these truthes are made manifest
vnto vs. Hoping and intreting that it may not bee offensiue, though in this
sorte I make relation of their actions. And firste to begin with the North
partes of Europe, it is not vnknowne to all our countrymen that from the
famous citie of London Syr Huge Willobie, knight, gaue the first attempt
for the North estren discoueries, which were afterward most notably
accomplished by master Borrowes, a Pylot of excellent iudgemente and
fortunate in his actions, so farre as Golgoua Vaygats and Noua Zemla, with
trade thereby procured to S. Nicholas in Rouscia. Then succeded master
Ginkinson who by his land trauell discouered the Scithian sea to lymit the
North coastes of Tartaria, so farre as the riuer Ob. So that by our
countrymen the North partes of Europe are at full made knowne vnto vs: and
prooued to ioyne with no other continent to hinder this passage. The common
and ordenary trade of the Spanyard and Portingall from Lysbome to the
coasts of Guyny, Bynny, Mina, Angola, Manicongo, and the cost of Ethiopia
to the cape of Bona Esperanca, and all the cost of Est India and Illes of
Molucca, (by which wonderfull and copious trade, they are so mightily
inriched, as that now they challeng a monarchy vnto themselues vpon the
whole face of the earth) that their trade I say, prooueth that America is
farre separated from any parte of Africa or the South of Asia. And the same
Spaniard trading in the Citye of Canton within the kingdome of China,
hauing layd his storehouse of aboundance in Manellia a Citye by him erected
in Luzon one of the Illes of Philippa bordring vpon the cost of China, doth
by his common and ordenarie passages to Iapan and other the borders of the
coast, knowe that the Est continent of Asia lieth due North and South so
high as the promontory Tabin, wher the Scithian sea and his maine occian of
China are conioyned. But with what care they labour to conceale that matter
of Hydrographie for the better preseruation of their fortunate estate, I
refer to the excellent iudgement of statesmen, that painefully labour in
the glorious administration of a well gouerned Common weale, so that by
them Africa and Asia are proued in no parte to ioyne with America, thereby
to hinder this passage.


By late experience to prone that America is an Iland, and may be sayled
  round about contrary to the former obiection.

Asia, Africa and Europa being prooued to be conioyned and an Iland, it now
resteth to bee knowne by what authoritie America is proued to be likewise
an Iland, so that thereby all land impedimentes are remoued, which might
brede the dread or vncertaynty of this passage. The first Englishman that
gaue any attempt vpon the coastes of West India being parte of America was
syr Iohn Hawkins knight: who there and in that attempt as in many others
sithins, did and hath prooued himselfe to be a man of excellent capacity,
great gouernment, and perfect resolution. For before he attempted the same
it was a matter doubtfull and reported the extremest lymit of danger to
sayle vpon those coastes. So that it was generally in dread among vs, such
is the slownes of our nation, for the most part of vs rather ioy at home
like Epicures to sit and carpe at other mens hassardes, our selues not
daring to giue any attempt. (I meane such as are at leisure to seeke the
good of their countrie not being any wayes imployed as paynefull members of
a common weale,) then either to further or giue due commendations to the
deseruers, howe then may Syr Iohn Hawkins bee esteemed, who being a man of
good account in his Country, of wealth and great imployment, did
notwithstanding for the good of his Countrey, to procure trade, giue that
notable and resolute attempt. Whose steps many hundreds following sithins
haue made themselues men of good esteeme, and fit for the seruice of her
sacrid maiestie.

And by that his attempt of America (wherof West India is a parte) is well
prooued to be many hundred leagues distant from any part of Afric or
Europe.

Then succeeded Syr Francis Drake in his famous and euer renowned voyage
about the world, who departing from Plimouth directed his course for the
straightes of Magillane, which place was also reported to be most dangerous
by reason of the continuall violent and vnresistable current that was
reported to haue continuall passage into the straightes, so that once
entring therein there was no more hope remayning of returne, besides the
perill of shelues, straightness of the passage and vncertayne wyndinges of
the same, all which bread dread in the highest degree, the distance and
dangers considered. So that before his revealing of the same the matter was
in question, whether there were such a passage or no, or whether Magillane
did passe the same, if there was such a man so named, but Syr Frauncis
Drake, considering the great benefit that might arise by his voyage through
that passage, and the notable discoueries, that might be thereby performed,
regarded not these dastardly affections of the idle multitude, but
considering with iudgement that in nature there cold be no such perpetuitie
of violence where the occian is in no sorte straighted, proceeded with
discreet prouision and so departing from England arriued vnto the same, and
with good sucesse (through Gods most fauorable mercy passed through)
wherein his resolution hath deserued euerlasting commendations. For the
place in viewe is dangerous and verye vnpleasing, and in the execution to
passe Nothing may seeme more doubtful, for 14 leagues west within the cape
of Saint Maria lyeth the first straight, where it floweth and ebbeth with
violent swiftnes, the straight not half a mile broad, the first fall into
which straight is verye dangerous and doubtfull. This straight lasteth in
his narrownes, 3 leages, then falling into another sea 8 leages broad and 8
leages through there lyeth the second straight due west. South West from
the firste, which course being vnknowne it is no small perill in finding
this second straightes, and that agayne is not a myle broad and continueth
the bredth 3 or 4 leages Southwest, with violent swiftnes of flowing and
reflowing, and there agayne he falleth into another Sea, through which due,
South South West, lyeth the cape Froward, and his straight (so rightly
named in the true nature of his peruersnes, for be the wind neuer so
fauorable, at that cape it will be directly agaynst you with violent and
daungerous flaughes) where there are three places probable to continue the
passage. But the true straight lyeth from this cape West Nor West, where
the land is very high all couered with snowe, and full of dangerous
counter-windes, that beate with violence from those huge mountaines, from
which cape the straight is neuer broder then 2 leages and in many places
not halfe a mile, without hope of ancorage, the channell beeing shore deepe
more then tow hundreth fadomes, and so continueth to the South sea forty
leages only to bee releued in little dangerous coues, with many turnings
and chang of courses; how perilous then was this passage to Syr Frauncis
Drake, to whom at that time no parte thereof was knowne. And being without
reliefe of ancorage was inforced to follow his course in the hell darke
nights, and in all the fury of tempestious stormes. I am the bolder to make
this particuler relation in the praise of his perfect constancy and
magnanemitye of spirite, because I haue thrise passed the same straights
and haue felt the most bitter and mercyles fury thereof. But now knowing
the place as I doe (for I haue described euery creke therein) I know it to
be a voiage of as great certaynty, pleasure and ease, as any whatsoeuer
that beareth but 1/4 the distaunce from England that these straightes doe.
And this straight is founde to be 1200 leages from any parte of Africa so
that truely it is manifest that these two landes are by no small distance
seperated.

And after that Syr Frauncis was entred into the South Seas he coasted all
the Westerne shores of America vntill he came into the Septentrionall
latitude of forty eight degrees being on the backe syde of Newfound land.
And from thence shaping his course towardes Asia found by his trauells that
the Ills of Molucca are distant from America more then two hundreth leages,
howe then can Asia and Africa be conioyned and made one continent to hinder
the passage, the men yet liuing that can reproue the same, but this
conceipt is the bastard of ignorance borne through the fornication of the
malitious multitude that onely desire to hinder when themselues can doe no
good.

Now their onely resteth the North parts of America, vpon which coast my
selfe haue had most experience of any in our age: for thrise I was that
waye imployed for the discouery of this notable passage, by the honourable
care and some charge of Syr Francis Walsingham knight, principall secretary
to her Maiestie, with whom diuers noble men and worshipfull marchants of
London ioyned in purse and willingnesse for the furtherance of that
attempt, but when his honour dyed the voyage was friendlesse, and mens
mindes alienated from aduenturing therein.

[Sidenote: The 1 voyage.] In my first voyage not experienced of the nature
of those climates, and hauing no direction either by Chart, Globe, or other
certaine relation in what altitude that passage was to be searched, I
shaped a Northerly course and so sought the same toward the South, and in
that my Northerly course I fell vpon the shore which in ancient time was
called Groenland, fiue hundred leagues distant from the Durseys
Westnorthwest Northerly, the land being very high and full of mightie
mountaines all couered with snow, no viewe of wood, grass or earth to be
seene, and the shore two leagues off into the sea so full of yce that no
shipping could by any meanes come neere the same. The lothsome view of the
shore, and irksome noyse of the yce was such, as that it bred strange
conceites among vs, so that we supposed the place to be wast and voyd of
any sensible or vegitable creatures, whereupon I called the same
Desolation: so coasting this shore towards the South in the latitude of
sixtie degrees, I found it to trend towards the West, I still followed the
leading therof in the same height, and after fifty or sixtie leagues it
fayled and lay directly North, which I still followed, and in thirtie
leagues sayling vpon the West side of this coast by me named Desolation, we
were past al the yce and found many greene and pleasant Isles bordering
vpon the shore, but the mountaines of the maine were still couered with
great quantities of snow, I brought my ship among those Isles and there
mored to refresh ourselues in our weary trauell, in the latitude of sixtie
foure degrees or there about. The people of the countrey hauing espyed our
shippes came downe vnto vs in their Canoas, and holding vp their right hand
to the Sunne and crying Yliaout, would strike their breasts: we doing the
like the people came aboard our shippes, men of good stature, vnbearded,
small eyed and of tractable conditions, by whome as signes would permit, we
vnderstood that towards the North and West there was a great sea, and vsing
the people with kindenes in giuing them nayles and kniues which of all
things they most desired, we departed, and finding the sea free from yce
supposing our selues to be past al daunger we shaped our course
Westnorthwest thinking thereby to passe for China, but in the latitude of
sixtie sixe degrees we fell with another shore, and there found another
passage of twenty leagues broad directly West into the same, which we
supposed to be our hoped straight, we entered into the same thirty or
fortie leagues, finding it neither to wyden nor streighten, then
considering that the yeere was spent (for this was in the fine of August)
not knowing the length of the straight and dangers thereof, we tooke it our
best course to returne with notice of our good successe for this small time
of search. And so returning in a sharpe fret of Westerly windes the 29. of
September we arriued at Dartmouth. And acquainting master Secretary with
the rest of the honourable and worshipfull aduenturers of all our
proceedings, I was appointed againe the second yere to search the bottome
of this straight, because by all likelihood it was the place and passage by
vs laboured for. [Sidenote: The 2 voyage.] In this second attempt the
marchants of Exeter, and other places of the West became aduenturers in the
action, so that being sufficiently furnished for sixe moneths, and hauing
direction to search these straights, vntill we found the same to fall into
another sea vpon the West side of this part of America, we should againe
returne: for then it was not to be doubted, but shipping with trade might
safely be conueied to China and the parts of Asia. We departed from
Dartmouth, and arriuing vnto the South part of the coast of Desolation
coasted the same vpon his West shore to the latitude of sixetie sixe
degrees, and there ancored among the Isles bordering vpon the same, where
we refreshed our selues, the people of this place came likewise vnto vs, by
whom I vnderstood through their signes that towards the North the sea was
large. At this place the chiefe ship whereupon I trusted, called the
Mermayd of Dartmouth, found many occasions of discontentment, and being
vnwilling to proceed, shee there forsook me. Then considering how I had
giuen my faith and most constant promise to my worshipfull good friend
master William Sanderson, who of all men was the greatest aduenturer in
that action, and tooke such care for the performance thereof that he hath
to my knowledge at one time disbursed as much money as any fiue others
whatsoeuer out of his owne purse, when some of the companie haue bene
slacke in giuing in their aduenture: And also knowing that I should loose
the fauour of M. Secretary Walsingham, if I should shrink from his
direction; in one small barke of 30 Tunnes, whereof M. Sanderson was owner,
alone without farther comfort or company I proceeded on my voyage, and
arriuing at these straights followed the same 80 leagues, vntill I came
among many Islands, where the water did ebbe and flow sixe fadome vpright,
and where there had bene great trade of people to make traine. [Sidenote:
The North parts of America all Islands.] But by such things as there we
found, wee knew that they were not Christians of Europe that had vsed that
trade: in fine by searching with our boat, we found small hope to passe any
farther that way, and therefore retourning agayne recouered the sea and
coasted the shore towards the South, and in so doing (for it was too late
to search towards the North) we found another great inlet neere 40 leagues
broad, where the water entered in with violent swiftnesse, this we also
thought might be a passage: for no doubt the North partes of America are
all Islands by ought that I could perceiue therein: but because I was alone
in a small barque of thirtie tunnes, and the yeere spent, I entred not into
the same, for it was now the seuenth of September, but coasting the shore
towardes the South wee saw an incredible number of birds: hauing diuers
fishermen aboord our barke they all concluded that there was a great skull
of fish, we being vnprouided of fishing furniture with a long spike nayle
made a hooke, and fastening the same to one of our sounding lines, before
the bait was changed we tooke more than fortie great Cods, the fish
swimming so abundantly thicke about our barke as is incredible to bee
reported, of which with a small portion of salt that we had, we presented
some thirtie couple, or thereaboutes, and so returned for England. And
hauing reported to M. Secretarie Walsingham the whole successe of this
attempt, he commanded me to present vnto the most honourable Lord high
Treasurour of England, some part of that fish: which when his Lordship saw,
and heard at large the relation of this second attempt, I receiued
fauourable countenance from his honour, aduising me to prosecute the
action, of which his lordship conceiued a very good opinion. The next yere,
although diuers of the aduenturers fell from the Action, as all the
Westerne marchants, and most of those in London: yet some of the
aduenturers both honorable and worshipfull continued their willing fauour
and charge, so that by this meanes the next yere two shippes were appointed
for the fishing and one pinnesse for the discouerie.

[Sidenote: The 3 voyage.] Departing from Dartmouth, through Gods mercifull
fauour, I arrived at the place of fishing, and there according to my
direction I left the two ships to follow that busines, taking their
faithful promise not to depart vntill my returne vnto them, which should be
in the fine of August, and so in the barke I proceeded for the discouerie:
but after my departure, in sixteene dayes the two shippes had finished
their voyage, but so presently departed for England, without regard of
their promise: my selfe not distrusting any such hard measure proceeded for
the discouerie, and followed my course in the free and open sea betweene
North and Northwest to the latitude of 67 degrees, and there I might see
America West from me, and Desolation, East: then when I saw the land of
both sides I began to distrust it would prooue but a gulfe: notwithstanding
desirous to know the full certainty I proceeded, and in 68 degrees the
passage enlarged, so that I could not see the Westerne shore: thus I
continued to the latitude of 73 degrees, in a great sea, free from yce,
coasting the Westerne shore of Desolation: the people came continually
rowing out vnto me in their Canoas, twenty, forty, and one hundred at a
time, and would giue me fishes dryed, Salmon, Salmon peale, Cod, Caplin,
Lumpe, Stonebase and such like, besides diuers kinds of birds, as Partrige,
Fesant, Guls, Sea birds and other kindes of flesh: I still laboured by
signes to know from them what they knew of any sea toward the North, they
still made signes of a great sea as we vnderstood them, then I departed
from that coast, thinking to discouer the North parts of America: and after
I had sailed towards the West 40 leagues, I fel vpon a great banke of yce:
the winde being North and blew much, I was constrained to coast the same
toward the South, not seeing any shore West from me, neither was there any
yce towards the North, but a great sea, free, large very salt and blew, and
of an vnsearcheable depth: So coasting towards the South I came to the
place where I left the ships to fish, but found them not. Then being
forsaken and left in this distresse referring my self to the mercifull
prouidence of God, I shaped my course for England, and vnhoped for of any,
God alone releeuing me, I arriued at Dartmouth. By this last discouery it
seemed most manifest that the passage was free and without impediment
toward the North: but by reason of the Spanish fleet and vnfortunate time
of M. Secretaries death, the voyage was omitted and neuer sithens
attempted. The cause why I vse this particular relation of all my
proceedings for this discouery, is to stay this obiection, why hath not
Dauis discovered this passage being thrise that wayes imployed? How far I
proceeded and in what form this discouery lieth, doth appeare vpon the
Globe which M. Sanderson to his very great charge hath published, for the
which he deserueth great fauor and commendations. Made by master Emery
Mullineux a man well qualited of a good iudgment and very experte in many
excellente practises, in myselfe being the onely meane with master
Sanderson to imploy master Mulineux therein, whereby he is now growne to a
most exquisite perfection.

Anthony de Mendoza viceroy of Mexico, sent certayne of his captaynes by
land and also a nauy of ships by sea to search out the Norwest passage, who
affirmed by his letters dated from Mexico in anno 1541 vnto the Emperour
being then in Flaunders, that towardes the Norwest hee had founde the
Kingdome of Cette, Citta, Alls, Ceuera, seuen cities and howe beyond the
sayd Kingdome farther towardes the Norwest, Francisco Vasques of Coronado
hauing passed great desarts came to the sea side, where he found certayne
shippes which sayled by that sea with merchandize, and had in their banners
vpon the prows of their shippes, certayne fowles made of golde and siluer,
named Alcatrazzi, and that the mariners signified vnto him by signes that
they were thirtie dayes comming to the hauen, whereby he vnderstoode that
those could be of no other country but of Asia, the next knowne continent
towardes the West. And farther the sayd Anthony affirmed that by men wel
practised hee vnderstoode that 950. leages of that country was discouered
vpon the same Sea, now if the cost in that distance of leages should lye to
the West, it would then adioyne with the Northe partes of Asia, and then it
would be a far shorter voyage then thirtie dayes sayling, but that it is
nothing neere Asia by former authoritie is sufficiently expressed, then if
it should lie towardes the North, it would extend itself almost vnto the
pole, a voiage ouer tedious to be perfourmed by land trauell. Therefore of
necessity this distance of 950 leages must lie betweene the North and East,
which by Anthony de Especio in his late trauells vpon the North of America
is sufficiently discouered, then this beeing so, the distance is very small
betweene the East parte of this discouered Sea and the passage wherein I
haue so painefully laboured, what doth then hinder vs of England vnto whom
of all nations this discouery would be most beneficiall to be incredulous
slow of vnderstanding, and negligent in the highest degree, for the search
of this passage which is most apparently prooued and of wonderfull benefit
to the vniversal state of our countrey. Why should we be thus blinded
seeing our enemies to possess the fruites of our blessednes and yet will
not perceiue the same. But I hope the eternall maiestie of God the sole
disposer of all thinges will also make this to appeare in his good time.

Cornelius Nepos recyteth that when Quintus Metellus Cæsar was proconsull
for the Romanes in Fraunce, the King of Sueuia gaue him certayne Indians,
which sayling out of India for merchandize were by tempest driuen vpon the
coastes of Germany, a matter very strange that Indians in the fury of
stormes should ariue vpon that coast, it resteth now carefully to consider
by what winde they were so driuen, if they had beene of any parte of Africa
how could they escape the ylls of Cape Verd, or the ylles of Canaria, the
coastes of Spayne, Fraunce, Ireland or England to arriue as they, but it
was neuer knowne that any the natyues of Afric or Ethiopia haue vsed
shippings. Therefore they could not bee of that parte of the worlde, for in
that distance sayling they would haue been starued if no other shore had
giuen them relefe. And that they were not of America is verye manifest, for
vpon all the Est parte of that continent, beeing now thereby discouered, it
hath not at any time beene perceiued that those people were euer accustomed
to any order of shipping, which appeareth by the arriual of Colon vpon
those coastes, for they had his shipping in such wonderfull admiration that
they supposed him and his companie to haue descended from heauen, so rare
and strange a thing was shipping in their eyes. Therefore those Indians
could not bee of America safely to bee driuen vpon the coastes of Germany,
the distance and impedimentes well considered.

Then comming neither from Afric nor America, they must of necessitie come
from Asia by the Noreast or Norwest passages. But it should seme that they
came not by the Noreast to double the promontory Tabin, to bee forced
through the Scithian Sea, and to haue good passage through the narrow
straight of Noua Zemla and neuer to recouer any shore is a matter of great
impossibilitie. Therefore it must heedes be concluded that they came by the
North partes of America through that discouered sea of 950 leages, and that
they were of those people which Francisco Vasques of Coronado discouered,
all which premises considered there remaineth no more doubting but that the
landes are disioyned and that there is a Nauigable passage by the Norwest,
of God for vs alone ordained to our infinite happines and for the euer
being glory of her maiestie, for then her stately seate of London should be
the storehouse of Europe: the nurse of the world: and the renowne of
Nations, in yielding all forraine naturall benifits, by an easie rate, in
short time returned vnto vs, and in the fulnes of their natural perfection:
by natural participation through the world of all naturall and artificiall
benefites, for want whereof at this present the most part liue distressed:
and by the excellent comoditie of her seate, the mightines of her trade,
with force of shipping thereby arising, and most aboundant accesse and
intercourse from all the Kingdomes of the worlde, then should the ydle hand
bee scorned and plenty by industry in all this land should be proclamed.

And therefore the passage prooued and the benefites to all most apparant,
let vs no longer neglect our happines, but like Christians with grilling
and voluntary spirits labour without fainting for this so excellent a
benefit.


To prooue by experience that the sea fryseth not.

Hauing sufficiensly prooued that there is a passage without a land
impediments to hinder the same, contrary to the first obiection, it nowe
resteth that the other supposed impediments bee likewise answered. And
firste as touching the frost and fresing of the seas, it is supposed that
the frozen zone is not habitable, and seas innauigable by reason of the
vehemencie of cold, by the diuine creator allotted to that part of the
world, and we are drawn into that absurdity of this opinion by a
coniectural reason of the sunnes far distance and long absence vnder the
horizon of the greatest parte of that zone, whereby the working power of
colde perfourmeth the fulnesse of his nature, not hauing any contrary
disposition to hinder the same and when the Sunne by his presence should
comfort that parte of the world, his beames are so far remoued from
perpendicularitie by reason of his continuall neerenes to the horizon, as
that the effectes thereof answere not the violence of the winters cold. And
therefore those seas remayne for euer vndissolued. Which if it be so, that
the nature of cold can congeale the seas, it is very likely that his first
working power, beginneth vpon the vpper face of the waters, and so
descending worketh his effect, which if it were, howe then commeth it to
passe that shippes sayle by the North cape, to Saint Nicholas fiue degrees
or more within the frozen zone, and finde the seas from pester of yse, the
farther from the shore the clearer from yse. And myselfe likewise howe
coulde I haue sayled to the septentrionall latitude of seuentie fiue
degrees, being nine degrees within the frozen zone, betweene two lands
where the sea was straightened not fortie leages broade in some places, and
thereby restrained from the violent motion and set of the maine occian and
yet founde the same Nauigable and free from yse not onely in the midst of
the chanell, but also close aborde the estern shore by me name Desolation,
and therefore what neede the repetition of authorities from writers, or
wrested philosophical reasons, when playne experience maketh the matter so
manifest, and yet I deny not but that I haue seene in some part of those
seas, tow sortes of yse, in very great quantity, as a kind of yse by seamen
name ylands of yse, being very high aboue the water, fortie and fiftie
fadomes by estimation and higher, and euery of those haue beene seuen times
as much vnder the water, which I haue proued by taking a peece of yse and
haue put the same in a vessell of salt water, and still haue found the
seuenth part thereof to bee aboue the water, into what forme soeuer I haue
reduced the same, and this kind of yse is nothing but snow, which falleth
in those great peeces, from the high mountains bordering close vpon the
shore depe seas. (For all the sea coastes of Desolation are mountains of
equall height with the pike of Tenerif with verye great vallies betweene
them) which I haue seene incredible to bee reported, that vpon the toppe of
some of these ylls of yse, there haue beene stones of more then one
hundreth tonnes wayght, which in his fall, that snowe hath torne from the
clyffe, and in falling maketh such an horible noyse as if there were one
hundreth canons shot of at one instant, and this kind of yse is verye
white, and freshe, and with shore winds is many times beaten far of into
the seas, perhaps twentie leages and that is the farthest distance that
they haue euer bin seene from the shore. The other kind is called flake
yse, blue, very hard and thinne not aboue three fadomes thick at the
farthest, and this kinde of yse bordreth close vpon the shore. And as the
nature of heate with apt vessels diuideth the pure spirit from his grosse
partes by the coning practice of distillation: so doth the colde in these
regions deuide and congeale the fresh water from the salt, nere such shores
where by the aboundance of freshe rivers, the saltnes of the sea is
mittigated, and not else where, for all yse in general beeing dissolued is
very fresh water, so that by the experience of all that haue euer trauelled
towardes the North it is well knowne that the sea neuer fryseth, but wee
know that the sea dissolueth this yse with great speede, for in twentie
foure houres I haue seen an ylande of yse turne vp and downe, as the common
phrase is, because it hath melted so fast vnder water that the heauier
parte hathe beene vpwarde, which hath beene the cause of his so turning,
for the heuiest part of all things swiming is by nature downwards, and
therefore sith the sea is by his heate of power to dissolue yse, it is
greatly against reason that the same should be frozen, so that the
congealation of the seas can bee no hinderance to the execution of this
passage, contrary to the former obiection, by late experience reprooued,
yet if experience wanted in ordenary reason men should not suppose nature
to bee monstrous, for if all such yse and snowe as congealeth and
descendeth in the winter did not by natures benefit dissolue in the sommer,
but that the cold were more actual then the heate, that difference of
inequalitie bee it neuer so little would by time bread natures ouerthrowe,
for if the one thousand parte of the yse which in winter is congealed, did
the next sommer remayne vndissolued, that continual difference sithins the
worldes creation, would not onely haue conuerted all those North Seas into
yse, but would also by continuall accesse of snow haue extended himselfe
aboue all the ayers regions by which reason all such exalations as should
be drawn from the earth and seas within the temperate zones and by windes
driuen into these stiffe regions, that moysture was no more to bee hoped
for that by dissolution it should haue any returne, so that by time the
world should be left waterlesse. And therefore how ridiculous this
imagination of the seas frysing is, I refer to the worlds generall opinion.


That the ayre in colde regions is tollerable.

And now for a full answer of all obiections, if the ayre bee proued
tollerable then this most excellent and commodious passage is without al
contradiction to be perfourmed. And that the ayre is tollerable as well in
the winter as in the Sommer is thus proued. The inhabitantes of Moscouia,
Lapland, Swethland, Norway and Tartaria omit not to trauel for their
commodity: in the deepest of winter, passing by sleades ouer the yse and
congealed snowe being made very slipperie and compact like yse by reason of
much wearing and trading, hauing the vse of a kind of stag by them called
Reen to drawe those their sleades.

Groynland (by me lately named Desolation) is likewise inhabited by a people
of good stature and tractable conditions, it also mayntayneth diuers kinde
of foules and beastes which I haue their seene, but know not their names,
and these must trauell for their food in winter, and therefore the ayre is
not intolerable in the extremest nature of coldnes: and for the quality
thereof in Sommer by my owne experience I knowe that vpon the shore it is
as hot there as it is at the ylls of cape de Verde in which place there is
such aboundance of moskeetes, (a kind of gnat that is in India very
offensiue and in great quantitie) as that we were stong with them like
lepers, not beeing able to haue quiet being vpon the shore.

And vnder the clyfe in the pooles vnto which the streames aryse not, I haue
found salt in great plenty as whyte as the salt of Mayo congeled from the
salt water which the spryng tyds bring into those poles, which could not be
but by the benefit of a noble heat, of which salt I brought with me and
gaue to master Secretory Walsingham and to master Sanderson, as a rare
thing to be found in those parts and farther the same was of an
extraordenary saltnes. And therefore it is an idle dreame that the ayre
should there be insufferable, for ourselues haue with the water of those
seas made salt, because we desired to know whether the benefit of the sunne
were the cause of this cogulation, what better confirmation then can there
be then this.

Island is likewise inhabited and yeldeth haukes in great store, as falcons,
Ierfalcons, lanardes and sparrow haukes, rauens, crowes, beares, hares and
foxes, with horses and other kinde of cattell, vpon which coast in August
and September the yse is vtterly dissolued, all which the premises are
certainly verified by such as trade thither from Lubec, Hambro, Amsterdam
and England yerely, then why should wee dread this fayned distemperature:
from cold regions come our most costly furres as sables beeing esteemed for
a principall ornament and the beastes that yeld us those furres are chiefly
hunted in the winter, how grieuous then shall we thinke the winter to be,
or howe insufferable the ayre, where this little tender beast liueth so
well, and where the hunters may search the dennes and hauntes of such
beastes through the woods and snow.

Vpsaliensis affirmeth that he hath felt the Sommer nights in Gotland
scarcely tollerable for heate, whereas in Rome he hath felt them cold.

The Mountaynes of Norway and Swethland are fruitefull of mettalls in which
siluer and copper are concoct and molten in veines, which may scarcely bee
done with fornaces, by which reason also the vapors and hot exhalations
pearcing the earth and the waters and through both those natures breathing
forth into the ayre, tempereth the quantitie thereof making it tollerable,
as wyttnes the huge bignes of whales in those seas, with the strength of
body and long life of such beastes as liue on the land, which thing could
not bee except all thinges were there comodiously nourished, by the benefit
of the heauen and the ayre, for nothing that in time of increase is hindred
by any iniury or that is euill seed all the time it liueth can prosper
well.

Also it is a thing vndoubtedly knowne by experience that vpon the coastes
of newfounde land, (as such as the yse remayneth vndissolued vpon those
shores,) the wind being esterly, comming from the seas, causeth very sharpe
colde, and yet the same is sufferable, but comming from the shore, yt
presently yeldeth heat aboundantly according to the true nature of the
scituation of the place, whereby it plainly appeareth that the very breth
of the yse is rather the cause of this cold, then the distempreture of the
ayre.

Wherefore if in winter where is aboundance of yse and snowe the ayre is so
sufferable, as that traueling and hunting may be exercised how much rather
may wee iudge the seas to be Nauigable, and that in the deepest of winter,
where there is neither yse nor snow that may yeld any such damps or cold
breathings to the anoiance of such as shall take these interprises in hand.
And therefore the Summer in no sort to be feared, but some curious witt may
obiect that the naturall anoyance of cold is preuented by reason of the
trauell of the body with other artificiall prouisions to defend the fury
thereof, as also the whot vapors which the earth may yeld, whereof
experience vrgeth confession, but vpon the seas it cannot be sith it is a
cold body subiect to yeld great dampes and cold brethinges most offensiue
to nature. To the which I answere in the vniuersall knowledge of all
creatures that God the most glorious incomprehensible and euer being sole
creatour of all thinges visible, invisible, rationall, irrationall,
momentory and eternall in his diuine prouidence hath made nothing
vncommunicable, but hath giuen such order vnto all things, whereby euery
thing may be tollerable to the next, the extremities of ellements consent
with their next the ayre is grosse about the earth and water, but thinn and
hot about the fyer, by this prouidence in nature the sea is very salt, and
salt (sayth Plinie) yeldeth the fatnes of oyle, but oyle by a certayne
natiue heate is of propertie agreeable to fire, then being all of such
qualitie by reason of the saltnes thereof moueth and stirreth vp generatiue
heate, &c. Whereby the sea hath a working force in the dissolution of yse
for things of so great contrariety as heate and cold haue togeather no
affinitye in coniunction, but the one must of necessitye auoyde, the seas
not being able by the bandes of nature to step backe, doth therefore cause
the coldnesse of the ayre (by reason of his naturall heate) to giue place,
whereby extremities being auoyded, the ayre must of necessitie remayne
temperate, for in nature the ayre is hote and moyst, the colde then being
but accidentall is the soner auoided, and natures wrongs with ease
redressed.


That vnder the Pole is the place of greatest dignitie.

Reason teacheth vs and experience confirmeth the same, that the Sun is the
onely sufficient cause of heat through the whole world and therefore in
such places where the Sunne hath longest continuance, the ayre there
receueth the greatest impression of heat, as also in his absence it is in
like sort afflicted with colde. And as the heate in all clymates is
indurable, by the eternall ordinance of the creator, so likewise the cold
is sufferable by his euerlasting decree, for otherwise nature should bee
monstrous and his creation wast, as it hath beene ydly affirmed by the most
Cosmographicall writers, distinguishing the sphere into fiue Zones haue
concluded three of them to be wast, as vaynely created, the burning zone
betweene the two tropikes, and the two frozen Zones, but experience hauing
reprooued the grosenes of that errour it shall be needlesse to say further
therein. For although in the burning Zone the sun beames are at such right
angles as that by the actuall reuerberation thereof the lower region of the
ayre is greatly by that reflexion warmed, yet his equall absence breadeth
such mitigation as that there we find the ayre tollerable, and the
countries pleasant and fruitfull, being populos and well inhabited: so
likewise vnder the pole being the center of the supposed frozen Zone,
during the time that the Sunne is in the South signes, which is from the
thirteenth of September vnto the 10 of March, it is there more cold then in
any place of the world, because the Sunne in all that time doth neuer
appeare aboue the Horyzon, but during the time that the Sunne is in the
North signes which is from the tenth of March vnto the thirteenth of
September he is in continuall view to all such as posses that place, by
which his continuall presence, he worketh that notable effect, as that
therby all the force of frysing is wholy redressed and vtterly taken away,
working then and there more actuall then in any other part of the world. In
which place there continuall day from the Sunne rising to the sunne setting
is equall with twenty sixe weekes and fiue dayes, after our rate: and their
night is equall with twenty fiue weekes and three dayes such as we haue, so
that our whole yeere is with them but one night and one day, a wonderfull
difference from al the rest of the world, and therefore no doubt but those
people haue a wonderfull excellencie and an exceeding prorogatiue aboue all
nations of the earth and this which is more to be noted. In all other
places of the world the absence and presence of the Sun is in equall
proportion of time, hauing as much night as day, but vnder the Pole their
artificiall day (that is the continuall presence of the Sunne before he
sett) is nine of our naturall dayes or two hundreth 16 houres longer then
is their night, whereby it appeareth that they haue the life, light and
comfort of nature in a higher measure then all the nations of the earth.
How blessed then may we thinke this nation to be: for they are in
perpetuall light, and neuer know what darknesse meaneth, by the benefit of
twylight and full moones, as the learned in Astronomie doe very well knowe,
which people if they haue the notice of their eternitie by the comfortable
light of the Gospel, then are they blessed and of all nations most blessed.
Why then doe we neglect the search of this excellent discouery, agaynst
which there can be nothing sayd to hinder the same. Why doe we refuse to
see the dignity of Gods Creation, sith it hath pleased his diuine Maiestie
to place vs the nerest neighbor therevnto. I know there is no true
Englishman that can in conscience refuse to be a contributer to procure
this so great a happines to his country, whereby not onely the Prince and
mightie men of the land shall be highly renowned, but also the Merchant,
tradesman and artificer mightily inriched.

And now as touching the last obiection that the want of skill in Nauigation
with curious instrumentes, should be the hinderance or ouerthrow of this
action. I holde that to bee so friuolous as not worth the answering, for it
is wel knowne that we haue globes in the most excellent perfection of arte,
and haue the vse of them in as exquisite sort, as master Robert Hues in his
book of the globes vse, lately published hath at large made knowne, and for
Horizontall paradox and great circle sayling I am myself a witnesse in the
behalfe of many, that we are not ignorant of them, as lately I haue made
knowne in a briefe treatis of Nauigation naming it the Seamans Secreats.
And therfore this as the rest breadeth no hinderance to this most
commodious discouery.


What benefits would growe vnto Englande by this passage being discouered,

The benefits which may growe by this discouery, are copious and of two
sorts, a benifit spirituall and a benifit corporall. Both which sith by the
awes of God and nature we are bound to regard, yet principally we are
admonished first to seeke the Kingdome of God and the righteousnes thereof
and all thinges shall be giuen vnto vs. And therfore in seeking the
Kingdome of God we are not onely tied to the depe search of Gods sacred
word and to liue within the perfect lymits of Christianity, but also by al
meanes we are bound to multiply, and increase the flocke of the faithfull.
Which by this discouery wil be most aboundantly perfourmed to the
preseruation of many thousands which now most miserably are couered vnder
the lothsome vayle of ignorance, neither can we in any sort doubt of their
recouery by this passage discouered, Gods prouidence therein being
considered who most mercifully sayth by the mouth of his prophet Esaias 66
I will come to gather all people and tongues, then shall they come and see
my glory, of them that shall be saued. I will send some to the Gentils in
the sea and the yls far of that haue not heard speak of me, and haue not
sene my glory, shall preach my peace among the Gentiles.

And in this 65 Chapter he farther sayth, They seeke me that hitherto haue
not asked for me, they find me that hitherto haue not sought me.

And againe chapter 49 I wil make waies vpon al my mountains and my
footpathes shall be exalted, and behold these shall come from farre, some
from the North and West, some from the land of Symis which is in the South.
Then sith it is so appointed that there shal be one shepheard and one
flocke, what hindreth vs of England, (being by Gods mercy for the same
purpose at this present most aptly prepared,) not to attempt that which God
himselfe hath appointed to be performed, there is no doubt but that wee of
England are this saued people by the eternal and infallible presence of the
Lord predestinated to be sent vnto these Gentiles in the sea, to those ylls
and femous Kingdoms ther to preach the peace of the Lorde, for are not we
onely set vpon Mount Sion to giue light to all the rest of the world, haue
not we the true handmayd of the Lord to rule vs, vnto whom the eternall
maiestie of God hath reueled his truth and supreme power of excellencye, by
whom then shall the truth be preached, but by them vnto whom the truth
shall be reueled, it is onely we therefore that must be these shining
messengers of the Lord and none but we for as the prophet sayth, O how
beautifull are the feet of the messenger that bringeth the message from the
mountain, that proclameth peace, that bringeth the good tidings and
preacheth health and sayth to Sion thy God is King, so that hereby the
spirituall benefit arising by this discouery is most apparant, for which if
there were no other cause wee are all bound to labour with purse and minde
for the discouery of this notable passage. And nowe as touching the
corporall and worldly benefits which will thereby arise, our owne late
experience leadeth vs to the full knowledge thereof, as by the communitie
of trade groweth the mightines of riches, so by the kinde and guide of such
tradinges may grow the multiplication of such benifits, with assurance how
the same may in the best sort be continued. In the consideration whereof it
is first to bee regarded with what commodities our owne country aboundeth
either naturall or artificiall, what quantity may be spared, and wher the
same may with the easiest rate be gained, and how in his best nature vnto
vs returned, all which by this passage shall be vnto vs most plentifully
effected, and not onely that, but this also which is most to be regarded
that in our thus trading wee shall by no meanes inrich the next adioyning
states vnto vs, for riches bread dread, and pouertie increaseth feare, but
here I cease fering to offend, yet it is a question whether it were better
by an easy rate to vent our commodities far of or by a more plentifull
gayne to passe them to our neerer neighbours, and those therby more
inriched then ourselues, the premises considered wee finde our country to
abound with woll, and wollen cloth, with lead, tin, copper and yron,
matters of great moment, wee also knowe our soyle to be fertill, and would
if trad did so permit haue equal imploiment with any of our neighbours, in
linnen cloth, fustians, seys, grograms or any other forraine artificiall
commodities, besides the excellent labours of the artsman, either in
metallyne mechanicall faculties, or other artificiall ornaments, whereof
India is well knowne to receiue all that Europe can afford, rating our
commodities in the highest esteeme of valewe, which by this passage is
speedily perfourmed, and then none of these should lie dead vpon our handes
as now they doe, neither should we bee then ignorant as now we are in many
excellent practices into which by trade wee shoulde bee drawne. And by the
same passage in this ample vent, we should also at the first hand receiue
all Indian commodities both naturall and artificial in a far greter measure
by an easier rate and in better condition, then nowe they are by many
exchaunges brought vnto vs, then would all nations of Europe repayre vnto
England not only for these forraine merchandizes by reason of their plenty,
perfection and easy rates, but also to passe away that which God in nature
hath bestowed vpon them and their countrie, wherby her maiestie and her
highnes successors for euer, should be monarks of the earth and commaunders
of the Seas, through the aboundance of trade her coustomes would be
mightily augmented, her state highly inriched, and her force of shipping
greatly aduanced, as that thereby shee should be to all nations moste
dredful, and we her subiects through imploiment should imbrace aboundance
and be clothed with plenty. The glory whereof would be a deadly horrer to
her aduersaries, increase friendly loue with al and procure her maiestie
stately and perpetuall peace, for it is no small aduantage that ariseth to
a state by the mightines of trade: being by necessity linked to no other
nation, the same also beeing in commodities of the highest esteeme, as
gold, siluer, stones of price, iuels, pearls, spice, drugs, silkes raw and
wrought, veluetts, cloth of gold, besides many other commodities with vs of
rare and high esteeme, whereof as yet our countrie is by nature depriued,
al which India doth yeld at reasonable rates in great aboundance receiuing
ours in the highest esteeme, so that hereby plenty retourning by trade
abroade, and no smale quantity prouided by industry at home, all want then
banished in the aboundance of her maiesties royalty, so through dred in
glory, peace and loue, her maiesty should be the commaunding light of the
world, and we her subiects the stars of wonder to al nations of the earth.
Al which the premises considered it is impossible that any true English
hart should be staied from willing contribution to the performance of this
so excellent a discouery, the Lords and subiectes spirituall for the sole
publication of Gods glorious gospell. And the Lords and subiectes temporal
for the renowne of their prince and glory of their nation should be
thervnto most vehemently effected. Which when it shall so please God in the
mightines of his mercy, I beseech him to effect. Amen.


END OF VOL. VI.





*** End of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation — Volume 06
 - Madiera, the Canaries, Ancient Asia, Africa, etc." ***

Copyright 2023 LibraryBlog. All rights reserved.